Home

Screenwriter 6 Help / Manual for Mac OS X

Contents

1. 327 Produccion WISIN ees m 329 x audi Ac 330 AUTO REVISION t 330 zii NER 331 A ade 332 BCAKGOW ic as aaa 332 IRE M 333 Generate Rundown SNCS EP 333 Generate Set List COPY c it 335 Scene Character LIS S E net 337 AMINA ON LOCKING e 338 A SEO E o RR 339 RIGID MA doo dios 339 Oy ASSIQNMEON ciTc 340 Snoncut Keys TORE GUNN Gi siad dedo ocioso icadanisian ambas 341 Shortcut Keys for Inserting and Manipulating ElemMentS oooccccccccoonnncnnnnnnonnononnnnnononannnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnonannrnnnnnos 342 Snoncut lt eys tor Tile Operal0AS sico is ile 343 Shorte tisevs Tor FOIT alligat Deos da NE 343 SHOCK EVS op NAVI OC assi ada od oct dicta 344 SMOMCUTIK ss cmo m AV IG AON me T 345 SHOMCUTINCYS Tor Selection ds uns eis ias 346 Miscellaneous SHOMCUL RSS iu coc techo e e HO Orr ora eh R Ser bec bete cute Pelea ae Ste 347 EUIBCHODI K BUS eatis cio datdeivess sete rioe rea mand rego sd des detta ades tied iaiids 347 PEOUDIESHOOUING ED ETE CLOS TD E EL 347 Known FHardware Software Problems e oen etienne Dea ech do bes acceded aed ie Br T gees 348 Common Technical Support Questions and ANnSWeFS oco
2. P 131 o x c 131 HARE sienten OA tr E oL APER AL Ee 132 Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue 111 11 LLeeeee eee LLLeeeeeecelliiee eene sana a uasa anna aaa a asas a asas assa sa nnmnnn 132 Movie Magic Screenwriter Dual amp olumris MPs oodd oca Deos ote e 132 Dual Golumin Submenus a a CONS casi is 133 Dual amp olumns ASUS A o lo en sce 133 Dial Column MaS A A A 134 ienr u MEM coo 135 Cheat dn Element Deco idas 135 Cheat Fage Breaks recede no Yon aes 135 Cheara PAGS S E 136 Ghear he Whole DOCUMENT Tm 136 Cheat the Page s Header 22 03 oi n ida 136 USer LISIS er cc 136 ACUSCONO TSX ected CC 138 Edita USCIS Sa r 138 Loading USEF LISS saci adas poi 139 Loading Locations Character Names or Transitions from Screenwriter SONDIS O stones iubent tet Dis usto Sa Seamer beer Set Ls tta sta i eetutet itn ect tob tubes cde tuu 139 Saving Lists as the Default Lists for all New Documents sssesssssssssssseeeeeeeeneene nennen 140 ID rz II Ser WEIS Serine chat PP 140 Reloaditig Default User BISIS oes tss seg Go eb aru o eet t timer mendi teet abortus iturus roD MU deut 142 Alas TON tee 142 A I UU UU T EE 142 apitalizatoti ot Alas T OX priu Mtt rer A esu evesdunt t
3. 201 E 2CA Multilock After Normal Scene 3 2 A C 24A OE Multi Lk 1 A1 This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Scene Headings and fall between two existing A Scenes Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Number For example a scene inserted between scenes 12A and 12B would be 12A1 the next one would be 12A2 and so on Multi Lk 1 AA This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Scene Headings and fall between two existing A Scenes Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Letter For example a scene inserted between scenes 12A and 12B would be 12AA the next one would be 12AB and so on Multi Lock Scene between 1 amp 1A is Determines how a Multi Lock Scene inserted between a Normal Scene and an A Scene is numbered e 1 A Adds a Dash plus the A Letter after the scene number e 1AA Adds the A Letter plus the Multi Lock Letter after the scene number e A1 Flips the normal A Scene numbering order 284 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 4 7 16 4 8 Multi Lock Pages To use Multi Lock Pages you need to click on its tab Multilack After A Page fe 201 E CA Multilock After Normal Page 2 4 C 2AA fe A2 ai Multilock A
4. e Marks 27 Toggles current Auto Revision Marks on or off for the currently displayed document A checkmark appears next to Auto Revision Marks when they are on e Auto Revision Colors Shows options for Auto Revision Colors Any new text you add is automatically highlighted in the color you select Useful when you have different people working on the document and you want to show who s made what changes e Blue Highlights new text in blue e Red Highlights new text in red e Green Highlights new text in green e User Defined Color Highlights new text in a color of your choice Requires Screenwriter to convert certain characters which may be in your document to codes first e Turn Revision Color Off Turns your color selection off displaying any new text you add as normal Red Blue Green User Defined v Turn Revision Color Off Remove Controls removal of various items in the document Current Revision Marks Strikethrough Style or Text Text Color Scene Heading w o OMITTED e Current Revision Marks Removes all current revision marks from the document e Strikethrough Style or Text Removes all Strikethrough Text or just the Strikethrough Codes leaving the text intact e Text Color Red Highlights Blue Highlights Green Highlights User Defined Color Highlights 332 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Red Style Removes red highlighting from revised
5. 15 2 f Fixed Text Size Use the slider to specify a fixed magnification factor for screen text Toolbar Icons Menu View gt Toolbar Icons Menu xX Show Toolbar Customize Toolbar Y Small Icons Large Icons v Icon Only icon and Text Reset Toolbar to Defaults Remove All Icons Y Default Toolbar Standard Large Icons Minimal Large Icons All Toolbar Icons User Customized Toolbar The View Toolbar Icons menu has options that control the display of the Toolbar and Toolbar icons that appear at the top of the document window 4 Eu B ow la a4 0 B RB enu e Show Toolbar Turns the Toolbar display on and off e Customize Toolbar 227 Clicking this opens the Customize Toolbar window This is where you can drag and drop specific icons from the palette to customize the icons in the Top Toolbar e Small Large Icons These options allow the user to choose between small or large size icons on the top Toolbar e Reset Toolbar to Defaults Clicking this sets the Toolbar to the default set of visible icons icon positions and icon size e Remove All Icons Clicking this removes all icons from the Toolbar but still keeps the Toolbar visible Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 227 e Default Toolbar Clicking this sets the Toolbar to the default set of icons and icon positions e Standard Large lcons Selecting this sets the Toolbar to the def
6. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 23 4 3 New File Format MMSW Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 introduces a new file format and a new file name extension mmsw This new file format accommodates the many new features found in 6 0 on both Macintosh and Windows NOTE mmsw files are NOT compatible with pre 6 0 scw versions of Movie Magic Screenwriter but the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 software is compatible with most all earlier document formats To create pre 6 0 compatible documents see Saving Documents as SCW files 23 below 4 3 1 Opening Existing Documents Opening existing documents is done in the normal ways e Double click on the document icon e Use the File gt Open command in Screenwriter e Drag the document onto the Movie Magic Screenwriter icon 43 2 Saving Documents in 6 0 MMSW Format For new documents created in 6 0 or later the File Save File Save As or File Save A Copy commands save the document with the mmsw extension MMSW When saving a document created in a pre 6 0 scw version of Screenwriter for the first time Screenwriter creates a new copy of the document with the mmsw extension This prevents the overwriting of original pre 6 0 versions of your documents After you have saved a document once it remains a mmsw file and does not create new copies when you save it again 43 3 Saving Documents as SCW Files At times it is necessary to share docume
7. P 269 Break ACUOA casi I 270 Break Dial A aed E A ee 270 TFANSIONS mari rs 271 Miscellaneous scars m 271 Locked SCIPS carr ena dues bane ge ates 272 16 Production Features cai 273 Prod ction Rewrite Seci eaa a SAO a ads 273 The Production Cycle ipinia eean aeaeaei aa Rara aaa Aae Ee aeae EARE Re aa ai aE EAA A AAEE 274 MOOI G ele d ei sessin a a T TN TR 274 PST TORN ICM SIONS e m 277 ISS US CVISCO ecl cic EET TEE E E COE oe a S E RE ROREE NE 277 otan oin REVISION RE UU EE 277 Revisi n MARKS aa I S 278 Manual REVISION MaEKS aede ioc hee toco Rel ge tet a 278 AUTO REVISION Mans acond iia iaa decease 279 Enabling Auto Revisi n Marks escis cocus iis saut a AAA 279 Removing All Current Revision Marks eeeesesesssssssssseeeseee nennen nnne nennen nnn nnn nenne arr r nnn nn en reines s nnne sain 279 Locked Scripts ODIOS me 279 Locked Seele TeadifidS oss hit ciet os rs eee 280 Ml Page3Breaks cius eee hate n teta vd suu aE DEN LUN due M 281 iQ UIN qe MR oL ERES 282 A Scene Numbering Sehietfie cei ue neige ge ert en quce foe eua Ade tempu dui ie raha Ostuni as 282 DIUI Bele d Mer D EE 283 MUN BOCK SCENES Eua duin ctet ee botes A puni ede ec scu ua EE 283 Mui LOCK Page A PEE mm REUS 284 Conte
8. Generate Rundown Sheet Displays a menu where you can choose options for printing TV Sitcom Scene Rundowns Can generate or regenerate Character Lists before printing Allows you to enter 334 Movie Magic Screenwriter Generate Rundown Sheets Script Attributes Separate Columns Script Title 1 u s EJ Act Scene Numbers Page Numbers Production Company Day Night Numbers Episode Number Act Scene Text 1 Bold Underline Draft Version First Date 1 23 07 Scene Headings Director Bald f Underline Font Palatino Timing Boxes 4 Boxes per Row C 2 Double wide Boxes List Each Location Only Once per Timing Box Width 0 7 pa in Min Height 0 7 in i Tj i 4 i T a Print Total Boxes at End of Page Print Scene Description Text Specify Set List Settings 3 e Script Title Production Episode Draft Version Date auto entered but editable Director Offers these printing options e Choice of Font and font Size e Box Width Lets you choose the width of the blank boxes printed for timing notes etc Accepts a value between 0 5 and 2 inches in 1 10 inch increments e Box Min Height l ets you choose the minimum height of the blank boxes printed for timing notes etc Boxes expand if more space than this value allows is needed Accepts a value between 0 5 and 2 inches in 1 10 inch increments e Print Separate Act Scene Col
9. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 211 14 1 6 14 1 7 14 1 8 14 1 9 14 1 10 e CTRL ALT SPACE Puts in a Hard Space Revoking Slave s editing privileges The Master can revoke the Slave s ability to edit the document only by clicking on the Showing Partner button The Master can permit the Slave to still view the document by simply clicking the Show to Partner button again Ending the session Either side can end the iPartner session by clicking the Disconnect button When you disconnect iPartner will ask if you wish to synchronize your document with the document that has been edited by your partner If you select Yes it overwrites the copy of the document you currently have open in your program with the edited changes in your partner s program If you choose No then the document in your program will not reflect any of the changes made since you sent the document to your partner Using the Voice feature to talk to your partner iPartner allows you and your partner to actually speak to each other via the connection using a microphone and speaker This feature functions best if both you and your partner are on the same LAN Local Area Network or if you both have high speed internet connections DSL Cable etc Slower modem connections may produce undesirable results when using the Voice feature In order to enable speaking and listening you must have the microphone and speaker buttons available Thes
10. e Prev Goes to the previous page in the document e Next Goes to the next page in the document 198 Movie Magic Screenwriter 13 4 e Close Exits the Print Preview screen e 1 Page Displays one page at a time onscreen e 2 Pgs Displays two pages at a time onscreen e Setup Document Layout Disabled when previewing from the Header Footer window Normally it goes to the Document Layout screen see above displaying your actual document page instead of a non printable sample page e Zoom In Displays the sample page larger onscreen You can also left click on the sample page to zoom in e Zoom Out Displays the sample page smaller onscreen You can also right click on the sample page to zoom out Printing the Document Printing in Screenwriter is accessed through the Print Window Under the File menu select Print You will see the following window Check one of the print selection radio buttons on the top half of the screen Screenwriter s default is to select Current Page Print Job Entire Document Current Page Selected Text Forwards Selected Pages beta Selected Scenes List Revision Asterisked Pages C 3 Production Breakdowns an aea Dialoque Character List F d 5cene Heading List Notes Ma a po ha Outline Report vi Run SmartCheck before this print Job Print in Reverse Order Previaw 3 Print Title Page F e Curr
11. Print Breakdown Sheets 332 Print Color Text Highlight 252 Print Headers 197 Print Notes 169 Print Notes in Script 127 269 Print Notes on facing pages of script 126 Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers 126 Print Numbering in Script 304 338 Print Preview 197 311 312 Print Preview 343 Print Scene Description Text 333 Print Scene Text 335 Print Selection 198 Print Separate Act Scene Column 333 Print Separate Day Night Count Column 333 Print Separate Page Number Column 333 Print Set List 335 Print Standard Breakdowns 201 291 332 Print Tagged Items 205 295 Print the Set List Directly 335 Print Title Page 198 Print to Option Window 198 Print total boxes at end of pg 333 Print without Prompting 126 Print 343 Printer Setup 311 312 Printing 102 112 251 Printing a Title Page 102 Printing Animation Recording Scripts 303 Printing Index Cards 112 Printing Options 222 251 Printing the Script 192 198 Production 201 294 333 Production Breakdown Print Options 204 205 Production Breakdown sheets 291 Production Breakdowns 198 Production Cycle 274 Production Features 273 Production Menu 92 329 Production Problems 350 Production Rewrites 273 Production Sides 198 Production Solutions 329 PROLOGUE 124 140 Prologue Text 124 136 140 Promote Outline Element 19 325 Promote Outline Style Elements 344 Promoting 191 Prompt on Multiple Words 154 Pronunc
12. 8 Press the Tab key and type the character name tina Screenwriter automatically puts it in ALL CAPS and at the correct margin 9 Press the RETURN key Screenwriter automatically takes you to Dialogue 10 Type in the dialogue Don t move I ve been working on this all day Screenwriter automatically makes the dialogue double spaced with the correct margins 11 Add a Parenthetical to put in some instructions for the actor Click right before the sentence I ve been working on this all day 12 Press Shift 9 open parentheses on the keyboard to insert a Parenthetical element 13 Type in shushes him with her hand The text following the parentheses will be in ALL CAPS this is correct for now 14 Press Shift 0 closed parentheses on the keyboard to close the Parenthetical Now only the text within the parentheses is in ALL CAPS Ending a scene Starting a new act Let s end this scene to start a new one in ACT ONE 1 Type fade out Screenwriter automatically makes that a Transition flush right ALL CAPS and brings up the Scene Heading pop up list 2 Type a to select End of Act Screenwriter automatically does the following e Enters END OF TEASER and centers it e Puts in an Act Scene Break forced page break e Puts in Act Break and Scene Label ACT ONE A When entering the last End of Act act three the program will put End of Show instead You can change SHOW to EPISODE or something
13. AMIR BURBSIS THBOUGH THER FRONT DOOR SHE IS ALL SMILES NOTE Certain items are underlined in Action The first instance of a character s name character entrances and exits sounds or effects Character Name Character Name This element shows which character is about to speak Formatting e Left margin is roughly 3 7 from the left edge of the page e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page e Left justified not centered e ALL CAPS e here is one blank line above each new Character Name e he first instance of the character name mentioned in Action is underlined EXAMPLE ACT ONE A FADE IN INT MANHATTAN HIGHRISE DAY D o NA o LES ON 2 Q E OUCH PLAYING 230 ALE A SHAKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLES ON THE COFFEE TABLE 80 Movie Magic Screenwriter AMIR BURSTS THROUGH THE FRONT DOOR HE IS ALL SMILES TINA Don t move I ve been working on this all day Dialogue Dialogue A speech by a character Formatting e Left margin is roughly 2 5 from the left edge of the page e About 3 5 wide e Left justified e Sentence case e Double spaced above and within the paragraph EXAMPLE ACT ONE A FADE IN INTE MANHATTAN ITGHRISS DAL D e NA ONCE D E LL EL SE aa Q ALK A SHAKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLES ON THE COFFEE TABLE AMIR BURSTS THROUGH THE FRONT DOOR HE IS ALL SMILES IINA Don t move I ve been working on Chis all 049355
14. Loading Element Styles options window TT ee 1 24 07 1 24 07 T Instructional Templates 1 24 07 5 3 TV Templates 1 24 07 Cancel After selecting a template the Loading Element Styles options windows displays This window allows control over how certain formatting gets loaded or not from the template The items that you can choose to Keep or Load are e User Lists see User Lists 130 e Title Page Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 105 8 3 8 4 8 5 e Note Categories e Outline Styles NOTE If you choose to load the Outline Styles and Note Categories from a Template they will be added on to any existing styles or categories in order to provide the most flexibility Any unwanted styles or categories can be removed after the loading process has completed Television Templates These templates have the pre set formats for certain Sitcoms and Episodic Dramas Loading a Television Template is as easy as opening one of your document files 1 Under the File menu select Open You will be in the default subdirectory unless you changed it 2 Open the TV Templates folder If you didn t install the templates uninstall Screenwriter and re install it 3 Select a Template file Click on OK to open it For a list of Television Templates and the shows they correspond to see the Appendix chapter entitled Files Installed Creating Your Own Template Margins and formatting settings are
15. amp Single color based on Outline Style NP Use Sounds for Outline Drag Drop iv Up Down moves rows Start Drag Sound Tink v Left Promotes row Right Demotes row Dragging Sound Pop Promote Demote Sound Zoop Moved Row Sound Purr Cancel 15 15 Script Format Options The script formats supplied with Screenwriter for Screenplay Sitcom Sitcom 2 Stage Play or Multimedia can be customized to your preference The changes affect the current script or can be saved as a default to affect all new scripts created using that format Formats for the Television Templates can also be changed to reflect the different format of a new TV show for example Change options for specific script formats by using the Element Styles screen Under the Format menu select Element Styles A screen similar to the following displays 260 Movie Magic Screenwriter Element Styles Margins in Inches ak i Left 1 5 ify Action rat Character Names 5pacing in Lines l l l fa Parentheticals Lines Before 1 0 Line Spacing 1 0 7 Dialogue W aLL cars C Bold C talicized C Underlined TE Font Courier Peg Sizes l2i te Transitions Sample COURIER 12PTS Not Des Use this Font for All Elements Outline Time of Day Dashes 2 5 Spaces 1 Act Breaks Ti Number of Spaces after INT EXT Scene Labels Scene Numbers Centered Title Te tj Left Righ
16. 144 Send As Email Attachment Command The File Send As Email Attachment menu command transmits the open document to a recipient via email Use this feature to send MMSW files to other Screenwriter users or PDF and RTF files to non Screenwriter users Send As Email Attachment Attach As MMSW Screenwriter Document Compose Message In Apple Mail Cancel 220 Movie Magic Screenwriter 14 4 1 14 4 2 14 5 Attach Document As PDF Portable Document Format RTF Rich Text Format v MMSW Screenwriter Document SCW Pre Screenwriter 6 0 Format There are three choices of file formats when sending the document as an email attachment from Movie Magic Screenwriter e MMSW Screenwriter Document default This is the file format Movie Magic ocreenwriter 6 0 uses for saving documents Select this to send another Screenwriter user your Screenwriter document The recipient must have Movie Magic Screenwriter to be able to open this type of file e PDF Portable Document Format This is the file format used by Adobe Acrobat Reader a popular free document utility This format will allow others to view your document as it appears in Screenwriter with the exact same formatting and page breaks The file is read print only and cannot be edited It is recommended to select this if the other party does not have Screenwriter or you are unsure RTF Rich Text Format This is an editable standard word pro
17. Customizing Screenwriter Screenwriter comes with a set of program option defaults As you become more familiar with ocreenwriter s features you may want to customize these default settings to the way you Work Most of Screenwriter s program settings are found on the Screenwriter Preferences menu Under the Screenwriter menu select Preferences At the Preferences window go to one of the following option screens by clicking on its tab Outline You can make changes to e Editing Options including QuickType e Files Options e SmartCheck Options 24 e Spelling Options 243 e Miscellaneous Options e Revisions Options e Printer Options e Keyboard Options e Animation Dialog e NaviDoc Options e Outline Options Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 223 15 1 15 1 1 15 1 2 View Menu Y Normal Full Page x NaviDoc Title Page Publisher Index Cards Toolbar Icons v Ruler v Right Element Buttons Scene Numbering Show Format Codes Hide Names in Pop Up List Hide Locations in Pop Up List Hide Elements On Screen Running Lists Zoom Screen Text The View menu holds the display controls For a description of each of these commands see Screenwriter 6 Menus 318i in the Appendices Ruler View gt Ruler If checked displays the horizontal page Ruler showing margin markers for the Element in which the cursor is located Element margins
18. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 215 Voices window 14 22 Speak Selection Tools gt Speak Selection This command uses the Mac s build in speech tools to read the selected text aloud You ll know it is running when you see the following window i FI Now Speaking Cancel 143 Voice Commands In the application preferences dialog a new checkbox has been added to the Misc panel amp Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter f Configure y e When Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter is checked Screenwriter uses Mac OS X s built in speech recognition system to listen for and respond to spoken commands e The Configure button takes you to Screenwriter s Keyboard preference panel which now has a new column for voice commands Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline Primary Key Alternate Key Voice Command Menu Commands ve About Screenwriter Y File New using Default Template New from Template Open Close Save Save changes Save AS e Double clicking a row in this table now lets you change keyboard shortcuts and specify spoken commands 216 Movie Magic Screenwriter 14 3 1 Change Shortcuts Shortcuts for Save Primary Key Voice Command Save changes Hint longer voice commands are easier for the computer to recognize than short ones Cancel These are the only options needed to set up Screenwriter to respond to voice commands Ho
19. Parenthetical Parenthetical wryly This element is used to indicate character character instructions Frequent usage is more accepted than in a screenplay Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 81 Formatting e Included as part of the dialogue paragraph e ALL CAPS EXAMPLE ACT ONE A FADE IN INT MANHATTAN HIGHRISE DAY NA ollo ON IH D Q OUCH PLAYING gt 50 ALE A SHAKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLES ON THE COFFEE TABLE D D AMIR BURSTS THROUGH Tor FRONT DOOR HE IS ALL SMILES TINA Don t move SHUSHING HIM WITH HER HAND I ve been working on this all Cy oe sus Transition Transition This element describes the shift between one scene and the next Formatting e Flush right e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page e ALL CAPS e One blank line double spaced above EXAMPLE ACT ONE A FADE IN 82 Movie Magic Screenwriter INL MANHATTAN I TGHRISS DAT NA QN IH L O E UC PLAY Th O ALR NGA A SHAKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLES ON THE COFFEE TABLE AMILE BURSIS THBOUGH THE I BONI DOOR HE Lo ALL SMILES IINA Don t move SHUSHING HIM WITH HER HAND I ve been working on this all OAY a ues AMIR GINGERLY APPROACHES HER AMIR WHISPERING I have some news to tell IINA GLARES UP AT HIM WITH AND POINTS A SCOLDING FINGER AMIR MOVES A BIT CLOSER It s really IINA BURSTING What What is SO important THE JENGA TOWER COLLAPSES
20. Show Hide Note Categories in Document IER me ul Show All Categories in NaviDoc Hide All Categories in NaviDoc Y LL Default Note Y LL Note Category 1 Y LL Note Category 2 This control shows or hides categories of notes in the document This control does not affect the NaviDoc view Note categories may be turned on or off individually by selecting them from the popup list Alternatively all categories may be shown or hidden by selecting the appropriate option from the popup list The default is to show all note categories in the document Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 169 12 8 8 Print Notes Control E JE Aa This control opens the Print Notes window where controls for printing the notes are found Print Notes Your notes can be printed sequentially with reference page numbers or they can be printed on the BACKS of the pages which they are facing For instance notes for page l on the back of the title page notes for page 2 on the back of page 1 etc To do the latter you must have first printed out your script Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers F3 Print Notes on Facing Pages of Printed Document Prompt You to Insert Each Page As Meeded Print Without Prompting After Inserting Entire Document Select Which Color Notes to Print Uncheck All Check All F 12 8 9 Notes Options Control A This control opens the NaviDoc options window where opt
21. e Title Page Publisher se Displays the Title Page Publisher for WYSIWYG Drag n Drop creation of Title Pages e Index Cards Switches to View as Index Card Mode e Toolbar Icons 2 s Control the display of the Toolbar and Toolbar icons that appear at the top of the document window e Ruler 2 If checked displays the horizontal page Ruler showing Element margins e Right Element Buttons lf checked displays the insert element buttons found on the right side of the document window e Scene Numbering 27 Controls the display of scene numbers in the document Scene numbers are associated with Scene Heading elements They can appear to the left of the scene heading the right of the scene heading or on both the left and right of the scene Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 319 headings v Scene Numbering Off Left Only Right Only Both Left and Right e Show Format Codes zs lf checked displays the hidden format codes embedded in the text of your document e Hide Names in Pop Up List Displays a menu where you can hide unhide a character name A hidden name does not appear on the Character Name pop up list which appears when you press the TAB key Use for a character who s not in many scenes and whose name you don t want to always appear on the Character List e Hide Locations in Pop Up List This menu allows you to hide certain Locat
22. 143 TI TEX centes 145 MOVING Bas Sell lo eec ea 145 Selecting TEXT E 146 Adjusting TNE SCIOCUION ee M HH 147 D Sclecting qr A AR A RARE 147 MOVING TEXT a ic 147 Cutting and Pasting with the MOLbSO arra diia 147 Gopying and Pasting withthe Mouse 4d 12i eee nte aaa 147 Cutting Copying Pasting with the KeybOard ccccccccccccsesseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeaueeseseseeeeeeeeeeesessasaaaesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 148 Dragdirgand OTOP DUNG esame A ia DM ic 148 Deleting Text c 149 Undo NND do 149 Redo Nec E P 149 ejr Wie me 149 BOIGING ME c 150 lato dl Lal ale Bi ie 150 jrzillevalsro Ey m 150 SMKN OUD rir E 150 Removing Text Forman escairar ra daa d osxku vog ps p XA ER odia 150 API ING Bis Ple MEM pedi DE 151 Changing RT cR ER 151 Typing Accented Nara cia o tC 151 Eel d c c vis 152 lait Sell CMCC d A A OX 153 Auto Correct Typo P C 154 User DICH OM ANS S55 Gusher EE 155 Find and Replace TeX o 156 FIN and Replace VY GOW EE 157 Change Character
23. Age 30 Sex Male Play Sample Jl II 214 Movie Magic Screenwriter The window has voices that are divided into two categories Female Voices and Male Voices Play Sample Clicking this button plays the voice that you selected in the Voice window The voice will say a brief introduction Select Voice Clicking this button will assign the selected voice to a particular element shown at the top of the window Speak Silently Clicking this button will mute the voice of this character even though Screenwriter will still read it This will create an appropriate pause to allow a human actor character to read that part aloud The purpose of this feature is to allow a particular actor character to read interactively with the program to help them rehearse and memorize their lines Do NOT Read Clicking this button will ignore reading the chosen element or Character Name The voice shows as do not read and does not create an appropriate pause as does Speak Silently Setup Available Voices Clicking this button changes the configuration of the window by showing options to add or modify existing voices Edit Vocal Characteristics Clicking this button displays a window that allows control of the Pitch and Speed of the voice the user selected from the Voice window Edit Pronunciation Clicking this button displays a window that allows alteration of the pronunciation of the voice tha
24. DAY 5 Type First Line of Action e Type the first paragraph of Action RICK 30s and laid back reads Variety while installing his new Screenwriter program FADE IN INT RICK S ROOM DAY RICK 30s and laid back reads Variety while installing his new Screenwriter program 6 Add Character Name e Press TAB Screenwriter moves the cursor into a Character Name element with the proper margins e Type in the character s name jack The name will automatically be entered in ALL CAPS 34 Movie Magic Screenwriter FADE LIN INT RICK S ROOM DAY RICK 30s and laid back reads Variety while installing his new Screenwriter program JACE 7 Add Character Extension e Type the left parenthesis character SHIFT 9 A pop up list of character Extension text displays 0 5 v o Mew Extension Mo Extension Add as Text Mevermind Esc e Type the letter o for O S meaning Off Screen JACK O S is entered for you and Screenwriter moves the cursor down to a Dialogue element FADE IN INT RICK S ROOM DAY RICK 30s and laid back reads Variety while installing his new Screenwriter program JACK 0 4 8 Add Dialogue e Type Jack s dialogue How can I get this word processor to break my script pages correctly Screenwriter automatically formats the margins for dialogue for you Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 35 JACK 0 85
25. Keyboard You can move through the NaviDoc using the keyboard Top of NaviDoc CTRL HOME Bottom of NaviDoc CTRL END Scroll up one screen CTRL PAGEUP Scroll down one screen CTRL PAGEDOWN Previous Row CTRL UP ARROW Next Row CTRL DOWN ARROW Since these key commands actually select the previous next row the document will be moved to that element as well Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 53 Menus You can also move through the NaviDoc using the menu items under the NaviDoc menu Selecting Multiple Elements Open the tutorial template 1 Click on File New from Template 2 Double click the Tutorials folder and open the file called Se ecting Multiple Events Selecting a Range of Adjacent Outline Elements Let s say you have a few outline elements of the same style next to each other and you want to select them all 1 Open the Outline panel on the left if it is not already open 2 Click on the Scene called Neal slips in the kitchen 3 Hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard 4 Click on the Scene called Valerie puts chocolate syrup on mashed potatoes Notice that it selects everything in the range of elements between and including Neal slips and Valerie puts chocolate syrup NOTE you cannot select outline elements of different styles e g Act amp Scene Sequence amp Scene etc Selecting Nonadjacent Outline Elements 1 Open the Outline panel on
26. Movie Master 352 Moving Text 147 MS Word 352 370 Movie Magic Screenwriter Multi Lock 329 Multi Lock Dialogue Numbering 304 Multi Lock Pages 284 Multi Lock Scenes 283 Multi Locked 281 287 Multimedia 103 Multimedia Options 222 Multiple Revision Marks 301 N Name Bank 220 Name Bank 327 Names 220 NaviDoc 19 94 160 161 168 173 176 186 208 318 344 NaviDoc Keyboard Commands 162 NaviDoc Menu 92 162 325 NaviDoc Options 19 163 222 258 NaviDoc Outline Styles 183 NaviDoc panel 160 161 NaviDoc Preferences 325 NaviDoc splitter 160 NaviDoc View Icon 94 Navigation 345 Navigation Pointer 161 New using Default Template 311 312 New Act 124 New Bookmark 19 325 344 New Color Category 167 New Document choose Template 343 New Document using Default def 343 New Extension 120 New File 97 314 New from Template 311 312 New Note 19 325 342 344 New Outline Style 183 New Scene 125 NEWACT 124 138 140 NEWSCENE 125 138 140 Next 197 Next A Page 324 Next character 145 Next Current Revision Mark 324 Next Element 145 Next Forced Page Break 324 Next Hidden Text 324 Next Line 145 Next Note 324 Next Row 19 325 Next Scene 145 Next Scene Heading 324 345 Next Screen 145 Next Script Page 145 Next Speech By 324 Next Strikeout or Colored Text 324 Next Word 145 NIGHT 140 No Page Zs 335 Non Editable Index Cards 111 Non Speaking Characters 295 Normal
27. 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY Z3 uDJ 8 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING Deb 278 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 5 B78 T278 Secondary Sort by Production Breakdown Print Options Script Order First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then in the order they appear in the document without any sorting Interior VS Exterior First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Exterior scenes before Interiors within each group Location First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Locations alphabetically within each group Time of Day First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts alphabetically by Time of Day within each group Calculate Eighths by Specifies how Screenwriter should define an 1 8th of a page Historically an 1 8th of a page was one inch 6 lines Nowadays writers are allowing more than 48 lines on a page so Screenwriter gives you a choice between the standard 1 8th or a truer 1 8th Standard 6 lines 1 8th of a Page lIf checked defines an eighth of a page as 1 6 lines If you have more than 8 of text on a page however it s possible for a page to calculate as longer than 8 8ths giving inaccurate page counts Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th of a Page lf checked defines an eighth of a page as the total allowable lines on a page divided by eight When rounded this equals 7 lines Display Eighth Totals Specifies how Screenwriter should calcula
28. 4 EXT STREET DAY 5 INT CHURCH DAY b EXT CHURCH ANOTHER ANGLE DAY EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET WINTER DAY amp EXT STREET DAY SINT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAY 10 FULL SHOT THE OFFICES ARE UNCHANGED STILL SMALL TIME AND OLD FASHIONED THE SAME OFFICE 4 Selected Scenes ONLY All Scenes All Scenes except OMITTEDs Cancel The Export window displays with a list of all your script s scene headings Choose which scenes to export using these options e Selected Scenes Only Clicking on individual scenes to select them for export will select this radio button automatically Only the scenes you select will have breakdown information exported e All Scenes Exports breakdown information for all scenes in the script This is the default and the radio button is automatically checked unless you select a scene heading by clicking on it Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 301 16 10 16 10 1 16 10 2 e All Scenes except OMITTEDs Exports all scenes except those which have been deleted and designated OMITTED in the script There is no breakdown information apart from the scene number to be exported for OMITTED scenes If the script contains no OMITTED scenes this option is grayed out and unselectable Click OK to export Cancel to exit the menu without exporting If you click OK to start exporting Screenwriter begins gathering breakdown data from each scene in the script
29. Available only after a successful Find command Replaces ALL instances of the found text with the replacement text This command does NOT ask for confirmation while replacing the text in the document e Change Character Name Displays a Search amp Replace menu modified for Character Names only The Search for box contains a list of available Character Names to choose from Choose one enter the new Name in the Replace with box and define the Search amp Replace parameters 318 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 1 4 View Menu Y Normal Full Page x NaviDoc Title Page Publisher Index Cards Toolbar Icons v Ruler v Right Element Buttons Scene Numbering Show Format Codes Hide Names in Pop Up List Hide Locations in Pop Up List Hide Elements On Screen Running Lists Zoom Screen Text The View menu controls the display of various windows and controls e Normal o Displays the document as a continuous flow of text Page breaks are indicated by a dashed line Example 320 e Full Page s Displays the document as it will appear on the printed page Page breaks appear as separate pages with headers and footers displayed Example 320 e NaviDoc o Displays a panel to the left of the document Like its name implies the NaviDoc lets you navigate quickly around your document The NaviDoc has four panel tabs Outline vs Scenes 17s Notes 164 and Bookmarks 170
30. Cheat Element Insert New Element after the cursor element chosen contextually Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 343 17 2 3 Shortcut Keys for File Operations Shortcut Key for File Operations EE New Document using Default def HEN New Document choose Template Open EM save EM save As EM Close ZEN Page Setup Cow Quit Screenwriter owitch Between Open Documents CONTROL DA 17 24 Shortcut Keys for Formatting Shortcut Keys for Formatting Toggle Bold Toggle Italics Toggle Underline Toggle Strikethrough BEEN CMD CONTR OL CONTR SHIFT OL CONTR OL CONTR SHIFT OL CONTR OL Insert Soft Hyphen Insert Hard Dash Capitalize Word Lowercase Word Uppercase Word Add Forced Page Break Add Hard Return Insert a blank space RETURN RETURN SPACE Insert a Hard Space SPACE 344 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 2 5 Shortcut Keys for NaviDoc Shortcut Keys for NaviDoc i NENNEN Toggle NaviDoc Display 2 Display Outline NaviDoc Panel oe TF Display Scenes NaviDoc Panel p fF Display Notes NaviDoc Panel wp eC Display Bookmarks NaviDoc Panel a a Decrease font size in NaviDoc a f y Increase font size in NaviDoc 3 Promote Outline Style Elements Demote Outline Style Elements Move the NaviDoc to the top of the document CONTROL Move the NaviDoc to the bottom of the document CONTROL Move the NaviDoc up one Screen CONTROL
31. Exits Screenwriter prompting to you save any open documents 312 Movie Magic Screenwriter 171 2 File Menu New using Default Template dN New from Template TEEN Open 80 Close a W Save db 5 Save AS 5 Save a Copy Save All Open Documents Import Export to Save As Template Send As Email Attachment Page Setup Print Preview Print New using Default Template Opens a new document using the default document template New from Template Opens a new document and lets you select a pre existing document template Open By default displays a list of existing Screenwriter documents to be opened Also allows you to open files in other formats for purposes of importing Close Exits the currently displayed document prompting you to save it Save Saves the document under its current name and location without prompting you for a name Performing a Save command overwrites the previously saved version of a document with the same name If you have not saved this file it will prompt you to specify a name and location to save the file Save As Saves the currently displayed document to a different name location or format This closes the original document and leaves open the document you just saved Save A Copy Saves a copy of the currently displayed document Selecting this menu item lets you create a copy of the document without closing the
32. Horizontal 109 Horizontal Index Cards 108 HP DeskJet printers 348 HTML Publishing 356 Icon 18 Ignore 153 Ignore Blank Lines 242 Ignore Margins for Element identification 352 Import 352 353 Import in Script Format 352 Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks 352 Importing a Scriptware for Windows script 355 Importing a Windows Word Processor 355 Importing Scripts 351 In All Caps 335 Include Pg s in Set List 335 Increase font size in NaviDoc 344 Increase NaviDoc Font 19 Increase NaviDoc Font Size 325 Increases Right Margin 342 Index Card 94 111 Index Card SpeedBar 108 Index Card View 107 Index Card View Icon 94 Index Cards 107 108 109 112 Index Cards 318 Initial Capitals 151 Initial Scene Text 136 Innoventive Software 356 Input Fields 91 Insert a blank space 343 Insert a Hard Space 343 Insert a New Note 342 Insert a new Shot 342 Insert a Scene Heading starting with EXT 342 Insert a Scene Heading starting with INT 342 Insert a Transition 342 Insert Action Element 342 Insert Character Element 342 Insert Character Extension 342 Insert Character Name into text 342 Insert Element 19 115 314 Insert Hard Dash 343 Insert Left Parenthesis 342 Insert New Element after the cursor 342 Insert Parenthetical Element 342 Insert Scene 342 Insert Soft Hyphen 343 Insert Typeover Button 93 Inserts a New Note 342 Inserts a new Shot 342 Inserts a Scene Heading starting with EXT 342 Ins
33. Move the NaviDoc Down one Screen CONTROL PAGE DOWN Modifier key for allowing drag reordering in CONTROL NaviDoc Outline to work WITHOUT including children of selected items The CONTROL key modifier can be pressed dynamically during the drag reordering A hint alert is displayed when the user does this operation in case they do it by accident or are playing around to find out what modifiers might do Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 17 2 6 Shortcut Keys for Navigation mewewwwem 7 T A mm o me 7 Wee eee E me 7 A A 39 amu M cw wemempeme 00 p mew 7 A ue mew MENU E NNNM keen T T Mese Lr ae Eu wy 345 346 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 2 7 Shortcut Keys for Selection Shortcut keys tor Selection seam l1 fea a selec sentence Per em saeco Temo armo Sese sur conmo m Select to the Beginning of the Line Select to the end of the Line Select a screen of text above the PA current carets position SHIFT Select text to the next Page break Select a screen of text above the pem current carets position SHIFT Select text to the next Page break Select text that is transversed by the Up Arrow Key SHIFT Select text that is transversed by the Down Arrow Key Combinations SHIFT Select text that is transversed by the Right Arrow Key Combinations SHIFT Select text that is transversed by the Left Arro
34. Standard with Numbers User Defined Flipped _ Flipped with Numbers Locked A Number Multi Locked Multi Locked between 12A amp 12B between 12 amp 12A 12 124 124A A12 DA aW WU RR RT a FCU Scene Number Following Scene Number A Number A Letter x e Multi Lock Number Multi Lock Letter Cancel 16 4 10 Locked Letter Skip List Certain letters are seldom used for Act Scene and Page numbering due to the potential for confusion Common pairs skipped due to their similarity are the letter I and the number 1 the letter O and the number 0 the letters E and F Clicking on the Locked Letter Skip List button displays a List of letters of the alphabet Check those letters you don t want to use NOTE Screenwriter also uses this skip list for use in its numbering of Act Breaks and Scene Labels if they are set to use Letters 286 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 5 16 5 1 Letter Skip List I Lh K C e Lj A i Don t Use a Scene Zero T E Lal I L f 31 Ll i I i I Cancel Advanced Locking Features In the normal day to day process of the Production Cycle Screenwriter s automated Production Features will meet most people s needs The following features give you an extra lev
35. TINA SINKS INTO THE COUCH AMIR Lt can walt FADE OUT Other Formatting Elements There are three other formatting elements worth mentioning e Character Extensions s3 e CONT D s Character Name e MORE and CONT D ss Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 83 Character Extensions These are extensions that are used generally to tell the reader whether or not a character is speaking in the scene and cannot be seen or whether their speech is a narration thoughts over the phone etc Formatting e Placed on the same line but directly after the Character Name e Surrounded by parentheses e ALL CAPS There are two extensions that are usually used e O S Off Screen Denotes a character that can be heard but is off camera e V O Voice Over Denotes a character s narration thoughts or dialogue heard in the soundtrack that is not taking place in the actual scene EXAMPLE JAMIE PIPES IN FROM THE KITCHEN JAMIE Uae Don t even bother Amir AMIR TAKES A BREATH IN TO SPEAK TINA GLARES UP AT HIM WITH AND POINTS A SCOLDING FINGER AMIR V O ECHOEY THOUGHTS She always does this to me CONT D Continueds are used to show that the same character is speaking again usually when two speeches are separated by Action They are perfectly acceptable to use but some writers prefer a cleaner page and turn them off NOTE These continueds should not be confused with scene continueds that can
36. When it s finished you re prompted to enter a filename for the Export file The default is your script s filename with the extension SEX added instead of MMSW Click on the Save button to create the export file A message box tells you that the export file was saved and under what filename Animation Production Animation Production scripts have certain unique needs that Screenwriter addresses with the following unique features Movie Magic Screenwriter has some great features designed specifically for Animation Production Assigning Each Speech a Unique Number Locking the Speech Numbering Printing Just Dialogue Multiple Revision Marks With much animation being produced overseas production companies are having to fax revised script pages to their production studios As fax machines transmit in black and white the usual means of identifying sets of revisions by printing them on different colored pages does not work To solve this problem a multi revision mark standard has been introduced The first day s revisions have a single asterisk the second day s revisions have two asterisks and so on Screenwriter handles this with a Revision Locking Count which you increase by locking the Current Revision Marks Locking Current Revision Marks Screenwriter produces two types of Revision Marks Current Revision Marks and Locked Revision Marks Current Revision Marks e Are either entered automatically by the Auto
37. e Cheat the Page s Header 136 Cheat an Element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the element to be cheated 2 Under the Format menu select Cheat then Element Or press CMD 3 Make the desired changes to e Left and Right Margins e Lines Before the element e Line Spacing Spacing between lines of text in an element e Text Formatting bold italic underline etc e Font Type and Size e Character Continueds Cheat Page Breaks To keep text together instead of splitting it over a Page Break you can cheat the Page Break Put the cursor anywhere in the element to be cheated on the first page of the two pages that it appears on Under the Format menu select Cheat then select one of the options 136 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 26 3 10 26 4 10 26 5 10 27 e Keep Element Together prevents the Element that the cursor is in from being broken e Keep Group Together keeps all elements in the current Group for example Dialogue Character Name or Scene Heading Action together over a page break e Keep With Following Keeps all elements in the current Group for example Dialogue Character Name or Scene Heading Action along with the Element that follows them together over a page break A checkmark displays next to the selected cheat option To allow Screenwriter to break an element which you ve previously told it not to uncheck the cheat option by select
38. e Normal Full Width Resets the selected element s as normal non dual column text e Set Column Margins Dual Column margins can be customized to your preference Dual Column Submenus and Icons Dual Columns submenus display check marks for Left Column Right Column and Normal Full Width If there are different column types in the selection the character is displayed to the left of the menu item instead of the check as is standard on the Mac If the user has displayed the column icons in the toolbar then these show the STATE of whatever is selected As with the character formats bold italics underline if there are multiple column types in the selection then multiple icons are shown as toggled L 1124 The textual L and R have a graphic icon next to the style popup A is displayed if multiple column types are in the selection see images below Note E Q Styles Dialogue e oo Dialogue n 4 9i Styles Action B Styles Dual Columns Instructions To enter Dual Column Dialogue or text 1 Type the Left column text as you would normally For example create a Character Name element then type the Character Name 2 With the cursor in that element press CTRL L The element is formatted as Character Name L as displayed in the Current Element pop up menu 3 Press RETURN to go to the next element In this example it is a Dialogue element already formatted as Dialo
39. notices perceives glimpses spies discerns distinguishes More gt gt 160 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 12 1 The NaviDoc The NaviDoc The single biggest new feature in Movie Magic Screenwriter is the NaviDoc The name comes from its function NAVI gating the DOC ument Like its name implies the NaviDoc lets you move quickly around your document Outline Fo Senes Bookmarks HN QE B E a WIPE TO EXT RESIDENTIAL STREET NIGHT CLOSE SHOT George s wrecked car is smashed against the tree He comes running into shot sees the car lets out a triumphant yell pats the car and dashes on elim D P A Se Sn O EXT MAIN STREET BEDFORD FALLS NIGHT CLOSE SHOT George sees that the POTTERSVILLE sign is now replaced by the original YOU ARE NOW IN BEDFORD FALLS sign GEORGE Hello Bedford Falls He turns as runs o tha bira snow up afe main street IE FE Scene Heading Page 60 of 68 a The NaviDoc has four primary panels e Outline Panel vs e Scenes Panel 173 e Notes Panel 164 e Bookmarks Panel 170 Each NaviDoc panel is comprised of two parts The top part of each panel holds the Controls The remainder of the panel is the Item List The items in the Item List change with each NaviDoc panel For example there is a scene list in the Scenes Panel a bookmark list in the Bookmarks Panel a notes
40. press RETURN in a blank Action element Type a or select End of Act on the pop up list A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate End of Act The appropriate End of Act is inserted then a forced page break is entered followed by the next consecutive Act Break element If you would like to change End of Act text to say something different you can change this Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 125 10 14 5 10 15 10 15 1 line by modifying the User Lists See User Lists 136 NOTE Screenwriter inserts End of Show in your document only if you have specified the last act You set the last act by selecting Format gt Element Styles to open the Element Styles window then click on the Act Breaks button At the center of this window towards the bottom is a field called End of Show Follows Act Enter the number of the last Act in this field New Scene To start a New Scene Type newscene at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter inserts it as SCENE where is the new Scene Number and formats it automatically A forced page does not get entered Alternatively press RETURN in a blank Action element Type r or select Start New ocene Same Act Or press RETURN while in an Act Break and Screenwriter puts in the appropriate new Scene Label for you To use this feature Automatically put in Scene Label after Act Break must be checked under Format Elements Styles
41. the entire element except when in Scene Heading Character Name or Transition that the cursor is in is changed Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 323 Upper Case Lower Case Initial Capitals Capitalize Word Cap amp Bold Word Lower Case Word e Change Element Type Shows options for changing the current element from Action to Shot for example e Mark One Character s Dialogue Displays a list of your document s Character Names for your selection A selected Character s dialogue appears in red in your document and in color printing and with a gray background in black and white printing Useful for printing out a document for an actor with his her dialogue highlighted e Dual Columns Allows changing selected text to Left or Right Column as in two column simultaneous dialogue or AudioVisual format and changing the margins for Right or Left Columns Left Column L Right Column R Normal Full Width F Set Column Margins e Normal WP Mode Toggles between the script format you re using and Word Processing mode where Tab and Return function as in other Mac OS X word processing programs e Cheat s Shows options for tweaking the margins of the selected element the current page the entire document etc Element Page Document Keep Element Together Keep Group Together Keep With Following Mark as Non Printing e Reset Cheated Shows options for Undoing any
42. thumping his pockets with increasing panic and looks in the waste paper basket on the floor He finally rushes through the door and out onto the street 11 INT BANK DAY CLOSE SHOT Uncle Billy is filling out a deposit slip at one of the desks UNCLE BILLY writing December twenty fourth He takes a thick envelope from his inside pocket and thumbs through the bills it contains It is evidently a large sum of money UNCLE BILLY writing Eight thousand MED SHOT door to street Potter is being wheeled in by his goon Various bank officials run over to greet him he is reading a newspaper Uncle Billy has finished filling out his slip and comes over to taunt Potter the envelope containing the money in his hand 14 INT POTTER S OFFICE DAY CLOSE SHOT Potter watching through the door POTTER to goon Take me back The goon wheels him back to his desk He is deep in thought with a crafty expression on his face 12 INT POTTER S OFFICE DAY CLOSE SHOT Potter is now behind his desk He spreads the newspaper out in front of him muttering as he does so POTTER Bailey He sees the envelope looks inside at the money Then to his goon indicating the office door POTTER Take me back there Hurry up as they go Come on look sharp Potter opens the door just a little and peers through into the bank 15 EXT STREET DAY MED CLOSE SHOT Uncle Billy running across the street
43. to work 4 Check the Auto Correct Typos as you Type box 5 Change these other Auto Correct settings if desired e Beep on Unknown Words Alerts you to any suspected typos that Auto Correct is unable to correct for you e Prompt on Multiple Words Gives you a choice of words when the typo could have two or more correct spellings If unchecked Auto Correct makes the decision for you e Maximum Sets the maximum word length of typos to auto correct If on a slower computer set this to a lower number Screenwriter uses a default word length of 25 letters e Auto Capitalize Character Names Capitalizes the first letter of all Character Names in Dialogue Action Notes and Outline elements To be capitalized by Auto Correct a character name must either have been used previously in the document or exist in the Character Name User List See Users Lists 136 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 155 11 10 3 When using names such as Mark or Art in your script Auto Correct also capitalizes the words mark and art To avoid this use Pause Autocorrection CTRL ALT S under the Tools menu Type the word with your desired capitalization move past the word then resume Auto Correct by clicking on Pause Autocorrection again e All Caps Makes Character Names ALL CAPS wherever they appear The following options work both during Auto Correct and when you run a manual Spell Check e Correct Dou
44. 150 282 318 320 Normal Full Width 132 Normal Order 198 Normal View Icon 94 Normal WP Mode 321 Not Page One 197 Note 115 126 342 344 Note Category 166 167 Note Category Commands 166 Note Category View 168 Note Colors in Outline View 179 Note icon 125 Note Options 125 127 Notes 19 125 126 127 198 269 325 Notes Category Controls 166 Notes Command 166 Notes Controls 166 Notes List 165 Notes Options 169 Notes Panel 160 164 168 169 Novel 103 Number of Copies 198 Number of Spaces before after Dashes 265 Numbering Dialogue for Animation 302 Numbering Scheme 267 268 Numbers 1 2 3 196 Numerical Input Fields 91 O O S 120 140 OMITTED 242 Omitted And Text 282 Omitted Thru Text 282 Omitted Text 282 Index 371 one word to the Left 345 one word to the Right 345 On Line Help 87 Only once per editing session 235 Open 94 112 343 Open File Menu 237 Open Find window 341 347 Open Replace window 341 Open the Goto Page dialogue 345 Open Thesaurus 347 Open 311 312 Opening a Document 87 94 Opening a Title Page 99 Opening Multiple Documents 95 Opens Search Dialogue 341 Options 222 Options Menu 88 89 Options 327 Original Defaults 142 Outline 19 325 Outline Controls 177 Outline Levels 178 Outline List 177 Outline Mode 109 Outline Options 179 222 259 Outline Panel 160 176 186 Outline Panel Font 179 Outline Panel Options 179 Outline Spacing 178 O
45. 93 s feto et QUES Bab zase RR a A 93 TING VICW OGM asec c 94 Opening DOCUMEN enano de ra iecoris deret ce o sade tenn ea ces nana ce oa tele eae MER CN IEEE 94 Opening Multiple Documents 3 9 a E A e A 95 Dispblayina MUlplS WINGOWS sico 95 O DC Sai 95 Opening a Previously Saved Vers iii inta tui ilu e to a a ii 95 Opening a Document automatically at Startup cece eeeeeseseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeaeaeaeaeasaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeanaaaes 96 Opening se AA A A e cu ces bun E EL EU EROS 96 Options for Loading Element 9lyles tas 96 Saving a Document A ee cen ids en cae r anes ene een DEM EU eee 96 Saving Potrtioris of a Docume scio e o het LA CL I ME E 97 Merging Doc ne td 98 Te Rage unn ecce ceed ccc ees eco eee ae eerie eens 99 Opening a Tile Page cht ttai o ins cane la 99 CREATING Text BOXOS siio Ea iiiter eio E oL oen ain rS S tre 100 MOVING a Text BOX AAA EE AE 100 Expor ng a Tille AAA nen AE EESE EOE KAREA ENEA ERS 102 importing a THUG PATO A A AAA AOE Ea A a Aaa a Ea eA Ea aaa A aena AEREA aSa 102 Prin ng a Til Page s a EEE ARANE a civ Eee bod EE EAEE 102 SA a a a a EAEE 103 Create a New Frile froma Template di 103 Loading a TOMI rit eniin aenean A la eaa Haa Eana iaaa 103 16levision Templates ge A a 105 Contents 5 Creating Your OWrn Template ooo oi cas aaee E Uu aepo ouo A tua ee AE coc 0e So s
46. AA or Normally numbered Dialogue to A Numbering e Set this Dialogue s numbering to AA Numbering Changes the current A or Normally numbered Dialogue to AA Numbering Only available in scripts where the dialogue numbering has been Multi Locked Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable e Override this Speech s Numbering Specifies which Normal number this speech should be given Accepts a number between 1 and 4096 Only available when the cursor is in a Normally numbered speech or in a script that has Locked or Multi Locked Dialogue Numbering Otherwise it s grayed out and unselectable NOTE If you change the Normal Dialogue Numbering order either by switching a Normally numbered speech to an A or AA speech or vice versa you ll be given the option to adjust all following speeches so that two speeches are not assigned the same number Watermarks Watermarks are visible labels printed on the printed document pages They are used to limit inappropriate distribution of the document They do this by personalizing every page of every copy with the name of the person s to whom it is distributed EXAMPLE 306 Movie Magic Screenwriter He practically embraces the astonished Bert then runs at top speed toward town LONG SHOT George runs away from camera yelling GEORGE CONT D Mary Mary WIPE TO EXT RESIDENTIAL STREET NIGHT CLOSE SHOT George s wrecked car is smashed against the tree
47. Add Bookmark Adds a new bookmark to the list in the Bookmarks Panel When created the bookmark grabs the first twenty five characters of the element where the cursor is located in the document and allows the bookmark description to be edited If desired change the bookmark description by typing the new text over the old Otherwise hit Return or click somewhere else to confirm the bookmark The keyboard command for adding a new bookmark is CTRL B Edit Highlights the description text of the selected bookmark to allow it to be modified or completely changed Double clicking a bookmark also allows it to be edited Remove Permanently deletes the selected bookmark This command does not affect the document text Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally En ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row EB OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled Bookmarks Panel Options The options for the Bookmarks Panel can be displayed by clicking the NaviDoc Preferences show icon button in the Bookmarks Panel You can also click on Tools gt Options gt NaviDoc to display them Bookmarks Panel Font These options control the appearance of the tex
48. Analysis 327 Document con 18 Document Layout 193 Document Layout 321 Document Outline Styles 186 Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification 352 Double Capitals 243 Double Sided 198 Double Click 146 DOWN ARROW 145 down One Element 345 Down one Page 345 Down one Screen 345 Draft Color 136 Draft Version 333 Drag and Drop 147 148 187 96 237 366 Movie Magic Screenwriter Drag n Drop 147 Dramatica 139 Draw Boxes 112 Drop down the Element menu 342 Dual Column Margins 134 Dual Columns 132 321 Dual Column 132 Dual Column Dialogue 132 133 ces Edit 131 Edit an Index Card 111 Edit Breakdown Sheets 332 Edit Categories 298 332 Edit Menu 92 97 147 314 Edit User Dictionary 327 Edit User Lists 139 Edit Word 155 Editing 145 Editing Screen 87 91 Editing User Lists 138 Electronic Index Cards 107 Element 135 136 145 146 153 Element Buttons 93 Element Styles 259 260 Element Styles 321 Element Type 128 Element s Numbering 332 Elements 115 148 Enable Alt Keys 229 Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter 247 END 145 END OF ACT 124 129 140 End of Act Text 136 140 End of Action 129 End of current line 145 END OF SHOW 140 end of the document 345 ENTER 116 ENTER Key 229 Entire Document 15 7 158 Entire Scenes 198 Entire Script 153 198 Episode 333 European Format 196 EVENING 140 Every Page 197 Every Page Except first Page of
49. Break Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Contains exactly the following text Forced Page Break Edit an Index Card Scenes containing regular script elements such as Action Dialogue Notes etc can be edited in Index Card View To ensure that your changes translate correctly back to the script scenes follow the guidelines in the Write an Index Card table 10s Non Editable Index Cards You will not be able to edit the Index Cards if e The document contains Locked Page Breaks e The document contains Locked Scene Headings e The document contains Act Break Scene Label information TV or Stage Play formats e The document contains Outline elements on the same level or higher than the Scene Heading document style NOTE If you have Cheated any elements in a scene editing that scene s Index Card causes all cheating of all elements in that scene to be lost Shuffle an Index Card Screenwriter allows you to move Index Cards around and change their order by Dragging and Dropping them This is done in Shuffle Mode entered by clicking on the Shuffle button on the bottom right of the Toolbar Mode i Qutline fa Shuffle 1 Select Shuffle Mode if it s not already selected 2 Click on the card you want to move 3 Go to the Index Card you want to move your card in front of using the Scroll buttons if necessary Click on that card and your shuffled Index Card
50. CLOSE SBUT NOTE The n arrow is in the screenshot to point out the splitter and the splitter mouse icon The yellow arrow is not part of Movie Magic Screenwriter Navigation Pointer and the NaviDoc Panel When you click on any item in the NaviDoc the document scrolls to the position of that item and shows an arrow pointing to the beginning of the item SCrap JMP DAY x CI gt MER AE d EXT HOUSE NIGHT Tz E CS ees CLOSE SHOT man be 162 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 4 NaviDoc Keyboard Commands Here are the six basic keyboard commands for moving around in the NaviDoc Top of the list CTRL HOME Bottom of the list CTRL END Page Up CTRL PAGE UP Page Down CTRL PAGE DOWN Previous Row CTRL UP ARROW Next Row CTRL DOWN ARROW 12 5 The NaviDoc Menu The NaviDoc menu contains the menu commands for working with the NaviDoc Panel Keyboard commands for each command are listed in the menu as well Note that most of the commands require using the CTRL key such as CTRL 1 to show and hide the Outline Panel in the NaviDoc For more information on the specific menu commands go to the NaviDoc 25 menu description in the Appendices x Outline Scenes Notes Bookmarks New Note New Bookmark Add Outline Element Promote Outline Element Demote Outline Element Create Edit
51. Calculate Eighths by Fa Standard 6 lines 1 8th Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th Display Eighths Totals by C Total of All Rounded Eighths True Total of All Lines Secondary Sort by Script Order Interior vs Exterior Location Time of Day Miscellaneous Options A List Characters in Each Scene Sorted Alphabetically S Script Order amp Speaking Characters First a User List Order List Non Speaking Characters Each Group on New Page Print Tagged Items Cancel Sort Breakdown Primarily by Sort Breakdown Primarily by fe Script Order Interior vs Exterior y Location _ Time of Day E o C Characters AN _ some Movie Magic Scheduling File rea y Script Breakdown Sheets Script Order Prints a breakdown of all scenes in the order they appear in the script without any sorting Interior VS Exterior Lists all the EXT scenes followed by all the INT scenes Location Lists by Location in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that take place in the same Location Time of Day Lists by Time of Day in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that have the same Time of Day Characters e All Lists every Character Name in the script in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 293 e Some Lists selected Character Names in al
52. Capitals 261 Cascade 95 339 Case 151 Cedilla 151 Center Act Info 267 Center on page 100 Centered 124 Centered Title 109 124 269 Centers 100 Change Character Name 158 314 Change Dictionary 327 Change Element Type 128 321 Changing Case 151 Character 342 Character Continueds 135 263 Character Extension 119 120 121 342 Character Extensions 232 Character Format 186 Character List 198 364 Movie Magic Screenwriter Character Name 109 115 119 121 129 130 143 Character Names 136 139 140 154 263 Character Names Box on Character Name Entry 230 Character Names without Dialogue 241 Character Set 327 Characters 202 292 Chat Window 208 Cheat 135 136 321 Cheata Page 135 136 Cheat an Element 135 Cheat Element 150 342 Cheat Page Breaks 135 Cheat Right Margins 135 Cheat the Page s Header 135 136 Cheat the Whole Script 135 Cheating 135 193 Cheating on Paste Drag 341 Check For Update 339 Check Homonyms 327 CheckBox 90 CheckBoxes 87 91 Cherry 274 Circumflex 151 Cleaning up Imported Scripts 355 Clear 19 314 Clear File History List 311 312 Clear Ignore List 327 Clear Out List First 139 Click and Drag 160 Close 96 197 311 312 343 Close All 311 312 COLD OPENING 124 140 Collapse All Hideable Elements 347 Collapsing 179 Color 164 290 Colors 183 330 Combine OMITTEDs 242 CompanyMOVE Showplanner 356 Compare Two Scripts 327 Completely Blank Elemen
53. Click OK when done to confirm your selections e Dialogue lf selected displays a Dialogue Selection menu Check a radio button to select the kind of Dialogue to print and select one or more Character Names Dialogue With Reference Page Numbers and Statistics lf checked prints a dialogue report with page number references and statistics about the number of speeches words sentences and sentence length for each character NOTE If you select all characters a screen displays asking if you d like to print characters dialog in Script order rather than printing all of one character s dialogue at a time If you click on Yes your Dialogue report will not contain any statistics If you click on No statistics will appear in your printed report Dialogue With Cues for Actors lf checked prints all the dialogue for selected characters along with either a Dialogue Cue preceding the speech if available or the preceding line of Action Entire Scenes that ANY of the Selected Character s is are in lf checked scans the document and finds only those scenes where At Least One of your selected characters is present Those scenes are automatically placed in the Selected Scenes window ready to be printed Entire Scenes that ALL of the Selected Character s is are in lf checked scans the document and finds only those scenes where All of your selected characters are present Those scenes are automatically placed in the Selected Scenes
54. Compatibility Mode AE mild hw amr zm cf jd r Lees m urnmla TRE FIT HB LEA A E NN A I Pt E mrd cfm mad rol ruci rh SLI bcr Lir malez LE x mu Approximate Lines on Page 57 AA EA Ado prt sco te the direc Fald rg lt Er Hih mi Fag Current Total Page Count ba mir in rmrinlipg pardas ee Fa Teba rlgs m3d rlk dcan gt m beck Mach a c oam lF were e Fx or tw cher Save as Defaults for New Scripts kmo km cater Hw 004 m tolere nd oder rd aum Cancel te Vui At the left of the screen is a Sample Page showing how a typical page will look with the current settings Adjustments made to the Top Margin Bottom Margin or Binding Adjustment change the Sample Page display Top Margin This is the fixed space between the top edge of the page and the first line of the Page Header Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 3 to 5 inches Bottom Margin This is the minimum amount of space between the last line of Text on the page not including Bottom Scene Continueds and the bottom edge of the page Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 3 to 5 0 inches 194 Movie Magic Screenwriter 13 3 Binding Adjustment eft and Right Margins are determined by the Element Styles of the document template you re currently using The Binding Adjustment allows you to add to or subtract from the leftmost Margin shifting all the pages text left or right without changing the
55. Controls affect the display and organization of the outline elements in the Outline Panel These controls can affect the styles of outline elements in the document view depending on the setting of the Outline preferences 17 Tools gt Options gt Outline 178 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 11 3 12 11 4 12 11 5 Notas Bookmarks ne Scenes ev Delete Add Outline Element Sequence M x Outline Levels Control Y Include All Outline Levels Exclude All Outline Levels Y Act Break Sequence Scene Label Scene Scene Heading Beat Script Notes y v ul ul il il Tl 4 Create Edit Outline Styles This control Includes or Excludes outline levels in the Outline Panel Outline levels may be turned on or off individually by selecting them in this control Alternately all outline levels may be Included or Excluded by selecting the appropriate option in this control The default is to Include all outline levels in the Outline Panel e f outline and document elements are set to expand collapse together Tools gt Options gt Outline this control will affect both the NaviDoc view and document view e f outline and document elements are set to expand collapse independently Tools gt Options gt Outline this control will only affect the NaviDoc view See ions 179 Style View Control E IE This control Expands or Collapses LY all outline elements
56. DAY Via e 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 23 BFS 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 5 5 DURO 1 258 With Location as the Secondary sort the same script would breakdown with the locations grouped together alphabetically EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 1 2 1 1 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6 8 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 294 Movie Magic Screenwriter Z 4758 INTERIOR 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY dug US 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING Deb 279 2 HOSPITAL DAY c 20 1 2 8 Secondary Sort Dy Script Order O Location Time of Day e Script Order First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then in the order they appear in the script without any sorting e Interior VS Exterior First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Exterior scenes before Interiors within each group e Location First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts all Locations alphabetically within each group e Time of Day First groups all scenes in the Primary sort order then sorts alphabetically by Time of Day within each group Calculating Eighths by Calculate Eighths by Standard 6 lines 1 8th fe Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th Calculate Eighths by Specifies how Screenwriter should define an 1 8th of a page Historically an 1 8th of a page was one inch 6 lines Nowadays writers are allowing more than 48 lines on a page so Screenwriter gives you a choice between the standa
57. Default Document Folder Users Chris Documents Movie Magic Screenwriter Beta f Password Protect Scripts When creating new documents Ww Retain previous versions of documents BK files Fat Retainupto 5 previous versions of a document Lu Show NaviDoc Panel From Template Show NaviDoc Panel Last Used I A subfolder named Previous Versions Start at last saved position C The same folder as the document Automatic Timed Backups TMB files Create a new previous version file Timed Backup Frequency 5 Minutes Oniy once per editing session Tuc Too ce None Every time a document is sawed Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 237 15 5 1 15 5 2 When Screenwriter starts it should fa Leave you in a Blank Document pas i l a Automatically check for updates Monthly bey o Display Open File Dialog y i j Retrieve Last Document you worked on Ma p Restore Last Workspace eut Screenwriter can be preset to automatically do one of five things each time it starts up by clicking on one of the following radio buttons e Leave You in a Blank Document Opens a new file with the default Screenplay format e Display the Open File Dialog Displays a standard Open File dialog set to your default documents subdirectory e Retrieve Last Document you worked on Opens in the last document you saved in your previous Screenwriter session e Restore Last
58. Extension An Extension is a modification to the Character Name appearing directly after it in parentheses or on the next line if you prefer and differs from a Parenthetical It is commonly used to indicate that the Character speaking cannot be seen speaking on screen The two most common Extensions are e V O Stands for Voice Over which tells the reader that the character is commenting on the onscreen action but is not part of it or is narrating over the scene e O S Stands for Off Screen which tells the reader that the character is not visible on screen but is nearby somewhere in the scene To enter a Character Extension 1 Press Shift 9 left parenthesis while the cursor is anywhere in a Character Name and a Character Extension pop up list displays B Extensions 0 5 V D No Extension Add as Text Never Mind 2 You can either click on a menu item with the mouse or press the Hot Key designated by Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 121 10 8 3 10 9 the underline for that item For example type v for V O and it is entered New Extension Displays the Character Extension User List where you can enter text and create a new extension Add as Text Enters whatever you type as a Character Extension without adding it to the User List 3 The cursor moves to a new Dialogue element If you pressed RETURN and the cursor s already gone to a blank Dialogue element
59. He comes running into shot sees the car lets out a triumphant yell pats the car and dashes on EXT MAIN STREET BEDFORD FALLS NIGHT CLOSE SHOT George sees that the POTTERSVILLE sign i w replaced by the original YOU ARE NOW IN BEDFORD F 5 GEORGE Hello Bedford Falls He turns and es the co t est main street of the town ch gh s Ay the town is back in its Sd Sa a EN fe OY shoppers on the A ad Mer c mas Merry Christmas George ar A e X Chri GS EXT THEATER NIGHT PAN SHOT AS GEORGE RUNS BY GEORGE Merry Christmas movie house EXT BEDFORD FALLS EMPORIUM NIGHT PAN SHOT AS GEORGE RUNS BY GEORGE Merry Christmas emporium EXT BUILDING AND LOAN OFFICES NIGHT CLOSE SHOT George notices a light in Potter s office window and races across the street The watermark can be large or small light or dark centered on the page or off to the edge ocreenwriter gives you a tremendous amount of control over watermarking your document There are two things are required to use watermarks a Distribution List and a Serial Number e he distribution list is the list of people to whom the watermarked document is to be distributed Each person on the list receives his or her own copy with his or her name watermarked on it e The serial number is a number that is incremented on each copy as an additional method of identifying the copy You decide the structure of the serial number It can be as si
60. How can I get this word processor to break my script pages correctly 9 Add Another Character e Press TAB e Type in the character name rick e Press RETURN Screenwriter moves the cursor down to a Dialogue element automatically JACKE 0 8 How can I get this word processor ta break my Script pages correctly RICK 10 Add Dialogue e Type Rick s dialogue You can t JACEK 0 85 3 How can I get this word processor to break my script pages correctly RICK You can t 11 Add Another Location e Press RETURN e The cursor moves to a new blank Action element Press RETURN again i e Type the letter INT is entered for you and a list Locations already being used in the script pops up It contains one entry RICK S ROOM 36 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Ignore it and type a new location instead Jack s room RICE You can t INT JACK S ROOM NOTE Only Locations and Character Names actually being used in the script show on the pop up lists If a Location or Character Name is completely removed from the script it will no longer show on the pop up lists 12 Add Continuous e Press RETURN A Time of Day list pops up AFTERNOON EVENING NIGHT LATER CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER Never Mind e Type the letter c One dash and the Time of Day CONTINUOUS is entered for you The cursor drops down to a new blank line RICE You can t INT JIACEK S RO
61. INIA Str EE o e A 247 Diskette Bultonom TOD e elo e e lo cel e E att 247 A A A aaah 248 PAI P 248 Revisions PreferencBS ina dde 249 After Revision Marks on the Page put a Revision Mark on the Header occccc oooccccccccccooonccnnnnnnnnnanonnnnnnnnnos 249 Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Lu E a H T 249 Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to Menon OM gi c re Y 250 Don t print Revision Marks on each Mesa ai A delenit 250 Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on tHeM ccccccccccccnnnccccccnoccnnnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnos 250 Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED pads eerie t ceu chet ernie Geel as 250 Mark Element following Complete Deletion ccccccccccccccecccececececeeecececeeececeeeeeeececeeeneneeeeeneeseenenenenenenenenenens 250 Auto Update Locked Headers on ReVISION ccccceeeeeee ee eee cece teed eect eee rara 250 Printer O E 251 Prine Bottom GoDlndeds Ed a E E M c INI EE 251 PUNECOOR TOX ER PO o E PL PRI E 252 PROGUCIION IS td ld 252 When printing to PDF prompt user with COPY ilocococococicicicococoooooononono nono nono nonononono nono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrs 252 Movie Magic Screenwriter Prine OSingsFractomall WVIGKIS REPE 252 Key bOard PrelerenCes A a eimai 252 Keyboard Preterences BUIN ico 253 Edit Keyboard Preferenci
62. Incoming connections allowed on port 2200 the default port for iPartner The minimal configuration is Outgoing connections only on port 2200 Speak Text Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to actually read your document aloud using Microsoft s free Text to Speech engine e Setup Voices 212 e Read Document Setup Voices Selecting Tools gt Assign Voices displays a window that allows the user to assign voices to elements of the document Element Types Act Information Action Character Name Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Information Script Note Shot Title Transition Unassigned Character Characters ANNIE ANOTHER MAN BERT BOUNCER CAROL ANNE CARTER CHARLIE CHILDREN CHILDREN S VOICES Juniar Junior do not read Ralph id do iot read do not read do not read do not read Agnes Agnes Ralph Bruce Bad News Hysterical unassigned Whisper ysterical unassigned _ Assign Voices fa a ee Clear All ee To assign a voice to a character or element type select an item from one af the lists at left and then choose a voice from the pop up menu below Age 30 Sex Male Play Sample Voice File Wonderful 6 mmsw Load Voice Assigment File 3 Character Name Options This area allows you some choices on the way Character Names are read in the document e Do not read lf selected the C
63. Instead 1 Press the SHIFT key and hold it down 2 Use the Up and Down and Side to Side Arrow keys This will allow you to extend or reduce the selection 3 Release the SHIFT key De Selecting Text To de select a selected block of text e Left Click the mouse anywhere on the page e Or press a movement key alone without the SHIFT key Moving Text ocreenwriter offers these methods of moving text around in your document e Cut and Paste 4A two step method Text is removed from one location and placed on the Clipboard then Pasted into a new location e Copy and Paste A two step method Text is left in its original location and placed on the Clipboard then Pasted into a new location e Drag and Drop A one step method Direct movement of text without cutting or copying Cutting and Pasting with the Mouse To cut and paste text with the mouse 1 Select the text using one of the methods described in Selecting Text 146 2 Click on the Edit menu or right click or Ctrl Click on the selected text 3 Choose Cut 4 Click where you want the text to be inserted 5 Click on the Edit menu or right click or Ctrl Click on the selected text 6 Choose Paste NOTE If you want to insert the text from an element into a different type of element e g Action into Dialogue choose Edit Paste into Current Element Copying and Pasting with the Mouse To copy and paste text with the mouse 1 Select the text usin
64. Lines EE a FA Lines Before 10 Interline 30 mi LR I ALL CAPS Bold iralicized Cl Underlined E Sa ha Font Courier Courier 1 pts e Margins in Inches These controls adjust the left and right margin indent measured in decimal inches and whether the text is Justified e Line Spacing in Lines These controls adjust the line spacing before the outline element and the space between lines within the element The measurements are in decimal inches e Text Format Options These controls set the outline style s font font size and font styles all capitalized letters bold italics and underline The font name is displayed using the settings chosen 12 11 17 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Move Outline Elements in the Document The NaviDoc Outline Panel scene list may be used to move outline elements in the list via Drag and Drop When you move an outline element in the NaviDoc Outline Panel outline Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 187 list the corresponding material is moved in the document The following example moves a Note outline element o Select the outline item to be moved o Click and drag your cursor UP or DOWN the list In this example the note is moved from ocene 6 to just before scene 8 o Release the mouse button to drop the outline element at the position indicated by the bold line The item is always moved in the document to the point imm
65. Lock Character For example a page added after page 67 would become A67 using the default Multi Lock Character 16 4 3 Omitted Text Scene Omitted Text OMITTED m Omitted Thru Text THRU EN Omitted And Text AND Scene Omitted Text lf you completely delete a Scene the text of the Scene Heading and the Action Character Names Dialog etc in a Locked or Multi Locked script Screenwriter enters the text specified here into the blank Scene Heading Default text is OMITTED Omitted Thru Text lf you delete a series of adjacent Scenes in a script with Locked or Multi Locked scenes Screenwriter produces a Run of Omitted Scenes Onscreen it looks something like 3 OMITTED 5 3 IHRU THRU 5 s The 5 in Omitted 5 is provided for manual override control and does not print It allows you to change the ending number of the run if you ever need to Default Omitted Thru text is THRU Omitted And Text Used for a Run of only 2 Omitted Scenes Default Omitted And text is AND 16 4 4 A Scene Numbering Scheme A Scene Numbering Scheme f Normal 1A gt Flipped Al f Use the Following 5cene s Number opecifies how A Scenes and A Pages are numbered Normal 1A Places the A Letter After the scene page number Flipped A1 Places the A Letter Before the scene page number Use the following Scene s Number This option only affects the numbering of Scene Headings
66. Marks 338 Lock Dialogue Numbering 304 338 Lock The Script 274 329 Locked 28 7 Locked Headers 136 Locked Letter Skip List 285 Locked Page Break 331 Locked Page Breaks 281 Locked Pages 136 Locked Revision Mark 358 Locked Scene Headings 280 Locked Scripts 272 286 Locked Scripts Options 279 Locking Current Revision Marks 301 Locking Level 301 Lowercase 151 Lowercase Word 151 343 Main Menu Bar 16 87 88 91 92 Make Default for All New Documents 321 Male Names 220 Manual Overrides 350 Margins 261 Margins Format 186 Mark Element 250 Mark One Character s Dialogue 321 Marks 330 Max Length 154 Menu 147 Menu Changes 19 Menu Selection 146 Menus 87 310 Merging Documents 87 98 microphone 216 Microsoft Windows 87 Minimize All 339 Miscellaneous Options 222 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys 347 MMSW 219 220 MOMENTS LATER 140 Month Day Year 196 Month Day Year 196 More 271 More Cont d 263 More Text 263 MORNING 140 Mouse Blocking 146 Mouse Options 222 Mouse Selection 146 Move the caret down One Element 345 Move the caret one word to the Left 345 Move the caret one word to the Right 345 Move the caret to the Next Scene Heading 345 Move the NaviDoc Down one Screen 344 Move the NaviDoc to the bottom of the document 344 Move the NaviDoc to the top of the document 344 Move the NaviDoc up one Screen 344 Movie Magic Scheduling 202 292 299 Movie Magic Scheduling Export 332 356
67. Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 13 NaviDoc Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt NaviDoc es Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline ral Sync NaviDoc Row with Document ral Point to Paragraph when Navigating E Frame current row with this color al gt Flash pointer 2 times Quickly ht Use System Selection color for frame Disappear after flashing Medium fade Row Height fe Variable less wasted space Fixed faster resizing on slow computers Scenes Panel Font Lucida Grande 4 size 12 LS Tec MEO Fi RowLines Gray e vi Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel Odd Row Text EN Odd Row Fill EE Even Row Text Even Row Fill Motes Panel Font Font Lucida Grande ES Size 12 449 Row Lines Thick Solid 4 Bookmarks Panel Font Font Lucida Grande e Size 12 PS Text MN Fill _ Row Lines Thin Solid P mm L Cancel Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 259 15 14 Outline Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Outline Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline 1 Expand Collapse together puff Clicking in an Outline Element in document reveals that element in the Outline Panel FJ Expand Collapse independently Same color as Note in script
68. NOTE The Time of Day Dashes and Number of Spaces after INT EXT settings do not update existing Scene Headings They only change the appearance of future Scene Headings you create after changing the settings To change existing Scene Headings use the Search amp Replace command Time of Day Dashes Lets you choose how many dashes should be placed between Location and Time of Day in Scene Headings when using QuickType popup lists Enter a number between 0 and 9 Number of Spaces before after Dashes The number entered determines how many spaces are placed before and after the Time of Day Dash es Scene Numbers Allows you to choose how and when Scene Numbers are displayed onscreen and printed if you have Scene Numbers set to print e Left lf checked displays left Scene Numbers e Right lf checked displays right Scene Numbers e Starting Allows you to enter a Scene Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 e Always put Right Number on Line 1 lf checked always puts the right Scene Number on the first line of Scene Heading even when the Scene Heading text wraps to a second line Unchecked the right Scene Number may appear on the second wrapped line Scene Continued Text Allows you to choose whether Scene Continued text is displayed and what text to use e Top of Pg If checked puts the default text CONTINUED above a Scene that s continued from the previous page Enter your preferred text i
69. Notes with or create a Custom color Click OK to accept your choice Cancel to exit without changing color AOA Colors Cancel Note Category Drop Down List Control y CJ Default Note 168 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 8 6 12 8 7 Default Note 7 Note Category 1 J Note Category 2 New Color Category This control sets the default note category style for adding and modifying notes e Default Note Category Selecting a note category in the Note Category drop down list places a check mark to the left of the category and makes it the note category default The default note category style is used when new notes are added e New Color Category Selecting the New Color Category option in the Note Category drop down list creates a new notes category Use the Notes Category controls to modify the category style Show Hide Category View in NaviDoc Lame mi y Show All Categories in NaviDoc Hide All Categories in NaviDoc Y L Default ScriptNote z Y C ScriptNote Category 1 Ho E ScriptNote Category 2 This control shows or hides categories of notes in the Notes Panel This control does not affect the document view Notes categories may be turned on or off individually by selecting them from the popup list Alternately all categories may be shown or hidden by selecting the appropriate option from the popup list The default is to show all note categories in the NaviDoc Notes Panel
70. Page Break will only change the numbering of Fixed or Flexed pages Combining Short Pages There may be a situation whereby in a Locked production draft you end up with a few consecutive short pages that need to be combined and show a hyphenated page number Example Pages 15 16 and 17 are short pages that need to be combined into one 15 17 page Combining the short pages The first step is to delete the page breaks that separate the short pages e Place the cursor at the Beginning of the Element following the first short page e Press the Backspace Delete on Mac key or under the Edit menu select Remove Forced Page Break e Screenwriter will display a dialog box that asks Delete this Locked Page Break Choose Yes e Repeat these steps until all short pages are combined Hyphenating the page numbering The next steps is to add Non Printing Omitted pages at the end of the newly combined page This will tell the program that there used to be multiple pages occupying the space of the newly combined page e Place the cursor at the end of the newly combined page e Press Ctrl Return on the keyboard to add a Non Printing Omitted page The page number on the combined page should now be hyphenated e g 15 16 from the example above Repeat this step until the page number reads correctly e g 15 17 NOTE You can also choose to add an A Page as the last Non Printing Omitted page if you want the number after the hyphen
71. Revision function Apply Revision Mark Ctrl M or by pressing the Asterisk key 302 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 10 3 16 11 e Are the only revision marks removed by selecting Remove Current Revision Marks under the Format menu e Are the only revision marks found when you select Next Current Revision Mark from the GoTo menu e Are the only revision marks used to select pages to print when you select Asterisked Pages under the Print menu To Lock Current Revision Marks Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Lock Current Rev Marks Once the Current Revision Marks are locked they become Locked Revision Marks Locked Revision Marks Are former Current Revision Marks which have been Locked Animation Locking does the following e Converts all Current Revision Marks into a code appropriate for the Revision Locking Level e Embeds this code in the text where the Current Revision Mark previously was located e Increases the Revision Locking Level To Display Locked Revision Marks Under the View menu select Show Format Codes Locking Level is indicated by the number of asterisks on the line that has been edited e g Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 etc To Decrease a Locking Level Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Unlock One Rev Mark Level Assigning Numbers to Speeches Animation Scripts often have each Dialogue speech numbered for ease of ide
72. S Unchecked it flags this as an error Combine OMITTEDs that are Widowed on page If checked SmartCheck finds any page that contains only an OMITTED scene and prompts you to combine that OMITTED with any OMITTEDs that precede or follow it Unchecked the page prints with only an OMITTED scene on it SmartCheck Prompts If you select Yes to fix an error SmartCheck has prompted you about it fixes the error and continue to check your document If you select No it asks you whether YOU want to fix it If you reply Yes it pauses at the format error to allow you to fix it If you reply No it ignores the error and continues checking If you select Cancel it stops the SmartCheck scan If SmartCheck was run automatically before a print job printing begins Otherwise you ll be returned to your document When SmartCheck completes a manual scan it informs you with a dialog box When it finishes an automatic scan before printing it starts printing without any further message Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 243 15 7 15 7 1 15 7 2 Spelling Options Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Spelling Preferences l Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline es Spell Check as you Type amp Edit Required for the use of Character Name Aliases and Substitution Text Wi Beep on Unknown Words Beep Sound None Highlight Unknown Words Auto Cor
73. SHOT in Item D and edit it as desired If you delete an item the list is updated when you exit the window Loading User Lists User Lists can be loaded from other Screenwriter documents or reset to the original defaults Open the document you want to load the User Lists into Under the Format menu select Load User Lists from then one of the following formats e Screenwriter Document Loads all User Lists from another Screenwriter document e Original Defaults Reloads Screenwriter s originally installed default User Lists Loading Locations Character Names or Transitions from Screenwriter scripts Frequently a document s Locations Scene Body Text and Character Names are not actually in the User Lists but are accessed from within the document itself To make these items available to another document s User Lists you must first copy them into a User List in 140 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 27 5 10 27 6 their original document 1 Open the document containing the User List items you want to load 2 Under the Format menu select User Lists 3 Click on the button of the items to copy e Character Names e Scene Body Text e Transitions 4 At the bottom left of the screen a Copy from Script button displays Click on it and a menu of the unique text items for that element displays 5 Double click on an item to copy it to the User List Click on the Close button when finished 6 Click OK to save
74. Scene 197 Every time a document is saved 235 Except Following Shots 154 Existing File 97 314 Exit 96 311 312 Exits Screenwriter 343 Expand All Hideable Elements 347 Expanding 179 Expanding amp Collapsing Outline Elements 179 Export to Movie Magic Scheduling 300 Export to 19 311 312 Exporting 356 357 EXT 117 129 140 202 ext 115 Extend Selection 146 Extend Selection 314 Extension 263 Extensions 136 140 Exterior 202 F3 135 150 F4 128 185 F6 150 FADE IN 93 117 129 140 FADE IN Text 136 140 fadein 115 FADE OUT 140 Family Names 220 Fax 198 Female Names 220 Fie 94 File Menu 92 96 105 311 312 Files Installed 359 Filmed Sitcom 103 Final Act 267 Final Draft 356 Final Draft RTF 9352 Final Text 335 Final Text formatting check boxes 335 Find 314 341 Find command 157 Find Next 314 341 Find What 157 Find with Same Capitalization as Search Text ONLY 157 Firewall 211 Index 367 Fit Width 225 Fix Lock All Headers 288 330 Fix All A Pages 288 330 Fix or Flex 288 Fix or Flex 329 330 Fixed 164 Fixed Text Size 225 Flash Pointer 164 Flashing 164 Flex All A Pages 288 330 Flex All Headers 288 330 Flipped 282 Flipped Locked 287 floating microphone 216 Flush Left at Margin 197 Flush Right 195 Flush Right at Margin 197 Font Button 112 Font Color 321 Font managers 348 Font Options 169 172 175 Font Size 181 Font Size Control 170 176 Fon
75. Shots to be misinterpreted as Character Names e Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification Some word processors lose Capitalization Information when exporting files Checking this box tells Screenwriter to ignore Capitalization when identifying Elements e Ignore Margins for Element identification Some script files have their script elements defined by their margins others by codes or Hard Returns If a script file is being imported incorrectly due to its margins not being what Screenwriter expects checking this feature may allow a more accurate import e Action is in Parentheticals Check this if your import file has the Action Element in parentheses such as certain TV or Stage Play scripts Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 355 17 4 4 17 4 5 17 4 6 e Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Check this if the import file has Page Breaks and you want to keep them exactly the same in the resulting Screenwriter script 6 Click on OK to paste the imported text 7 Under Screenwriter s File menu Save your imported file under a new name If your script does not import successfully try again with different options checked You may have to experiment with these options to get the best results Importing a Macintosh Word Processor script If the Cut and Paste method does not import satisfactorily try this method Also if the Mac Word Processor script you want to imp
76. Some Lisis Selected Character Names in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Checking this radio button and pressing OK brings up a Select Names screen Click on a name to select it and Double Click on the top bar of the Select Names screen to return to the Production Breakdowns menu NOTE If you select any Primary sort other than Script Order Time of Day Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 203 13 5 2 Normalization is performed any scene that ends with CONTINUOUS LATER or SAME TIME is automatically given the previous Scene Heading s Time of Day e Movie Magic Scheduling File Prints a breakdown to disk saving it as a Movie Magic Scheduling import file It contains the Scene Number Scene Heading and Starting Page Number and page count in Eighths of a page Options under Secondary Sort and Miscellaneous is grayed out and unselectable e Script Breakdown Sheets Prints breakdown sheets that include any items you have tagged in Breakdown Tagging Checking this radio button and clicking on the OK button displays the Production Breakdowns scene selection screen here you can enter the Production Company name and Production Title No to print on the breakdown sheets and select which scene breakdowns to print e Selected Scenes ONLY If checked only breakdowns for the scenes you select by clicking on them are printed e All Scenes If checked breakdowns
77. TAB then L the name LAURA is automatically highlighted for you NOTE Without SmartTab enabled pressing TAB followed by a letter always highlights the first name starting with that letter If you ve added a name starting with that letter to the Character Name User List the User List name always appears highlighted See User Lists below Running Lists Y Running Shot List v Running Transition List Running lists are lists of user defined items such as character names shots and transitions created and updated as you write in the document e Running Shot List lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Shots List plus any initial shot text defined in the User List when you add a new Shot element Unchecked displays User List items only e Running Transition List lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Transitions List plus any Transition text defined in the User List when you add a new Transition Unchecked displays User List items only Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 233 15 3 2 15 3 3 Pressing the ENTER key in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name lin Script Note adds a Hard Return in Transition takes you to Action in Action with hidden names goes to Dialogue Pressing the ENTER Key e Enter in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name lf checked QuickType creates a new Character Name element when you press ENTER in a Dialogue element To go to
78. This control sets the number of viewable lines of each note in the notes list The default position of the slider is all the way down and corresponds to view all lines the maximum number of lines allowed Moving the slider up decreases the number of viewable lines The minimum number is one line Font Size Control right vertical slider This control sets the font size for the text in the notes list The default position is the middle of the slider and corresponds to the font size set in the Notes Panel options Sliding up reduces the font size to a minimum of 10 points smaller than the default font size Sliding down increases the font size to a maximum of 10 points greater than the default font size The keyboard commands for decreasing and increasing the NaviDoc font size are CTRL and CTRL Bookmarks Panel The Bookmarks Panel in the NaviDoc replaces the Bookmark feature in earlier versions of Movie Magic Screenwriter The Bookmarks Panel is used to add remove modify and navigate to bookmarks in your document The Bookmarks Panel can be displayed by clicking on the Bookmarks tab in the NaviDoc The keyboard command for showing the Bookmarks Panel is CTRL 4 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 171 12 9 1 Dialogue E Outline Scenes Notes a arks 1 mot 3 0 3 GG 1 B moro l 9003 00 10 3 3G a 03 fo nog o ae In a plane i Add Bookmark HED Ed f f Remove E GEORGE BIG SCENE on phone What
79. Tn Previous Act Scene Break To End of Document Co Ta Beginning of Document C2 Tn Specific Page To Specific Scene S e Insert Element lInserts a new element at the current cursor position based on your choice from the element list Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 317 Act Break Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Label Mote Shot Title Transition Sequence Scene Beat e Cut Element Cuts the entire current element in the document e Add Forced Page Break Starts a new page at the current cursor position e Remove Forced Page Removes a Forced Page Break immediately before or after the cursor position e Add Hard Return Goes to a new line but stays in the same element e Add Dialogue Paragraph lf in the Dialogue element starts a new paragraph of dialogue Otherwise does nothing e Find ss Displays the Search amp Replace window 157 with the Replace parameters grayed out Enter the text to Search for and define the search parameters e Find Next Searches for next instance that meets the same find criteria e Replace Available only after a successful Find command Replaces the current instance found text with the replacement text e Replace 8 Find Next Displays the Search amp Replace menu Enter the text to Search for the text to Replace it with and define the Search amp Replace parameters e Replace All
80. To Cut To Select All Select Special Insert Element Cut Element Add Forced Page Break Remove Forced Page Break Add Hard Return Add Dialogue Paragraph Find Find Next Replace Replace amp Find Next Replace All Change Character Name e Undo Takes a step back undoing the last text edit performed This option is grayed out unselectable if Screenwriter cannot Undo the changes e Redo Restores what you just undid Only available immediately after you ve performed an Undo prior to making any more changes e Cut Removes selected text from the document placing it on the clipboard e Copy Copies selected text leaving it in the document but also placing it on the clipboard e Paste Places the contents of the clipboard into the document at the cursor position e Paste into Current Element This menu item is ONLY available if you already have Cut or Copied text from a single Movie Magic Screenwriter element or are pasting from an external document It allows you to paste that text into a different element type and have it become part of that element You might use this for example if you wrote a parenthetical like turning to John and pulling out a gun and you decide you want to move that to an Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 315 action element Simply cut the parenthetical element as you would normally then use the Paste into Current Element to paste it into a blank action li
81. To correct a mis recognized Element place the cursor anywhere in the element Click on the Current Element Window in the center of the Top Toolbar and select the desired Element If the imported script was in TV format you may have to reset the script s formats See 356 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 5 17 5 1 Choosing a Script Format for more details You ll also need to put back in the forced Page Breaks between scenes and re enter the Act Break and Scene Label Unfortunately due to a lack of standardization in TV formats the import function is unable to recognize all possible permutations NOTE Although the Import function is highly accurate we recommend you check all imported scripts for errors before printing multiple copies Running SmartCheck helps though even it can t catch all errors Exporting Documents Exporting to other script writing or word processing programs is a matter of saving a document in a different format A document exported from Screenwriter is designed to be an editable copy not an exact duplicate It will not have exactly the same margins page breaks or even number of pages as it does in Screenwriter Neither will it have MOREs or CONTINUEDs However it will retain all of the text in your document and will be in general script format Export To export open Screenwriter and open the document you want to export 1 Under the File menu select Export To 2 Select a file ty
82. Trouble Shooting iPartner for more technical details iPartner M major features include e The ability to allow you to view and edit a document on your partner s computer and vice versa e The ability to communicate with your partner through a typing in a chat window e The ability to speak and hear your partner requires compatible sound card and microphone only available on Mac to Mac or PC to PC connections e The ability to transfer documents back and forth e The ability to synchronize documents 14 1 1 Connecting to Partner Select the iPartner V command from the Tools menu to use this powerful tool to collaborate with a writing partner over the internet When you run iPartner you ll see the following screen which displays your unique IP Address and Port Number Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 207 Each computer connected to the Internet has an IP address which is used by other computers to know where to send messages Your computer s IP address I5 192 168 3 116 For your computer to be able to communicate with your partner s either 1 he or she needs to enter in your IP address or 2 you need to enter his or ETT her IP address Enter Partner s IP C Let Partner Do It Which do you want to do Troubleshooting Port Number 2200 HH Cancel 3 IP Address In order to connect with your partner one of you will need to know the other s IP If you have a Static fix
83. Type in a new character name Do not worry about the case Screenwriter matches the case wherever it replaces the old name with the new name e Search Backwards When checked Screenwriter starts the search and replace at the current cursor position and moves back towards the beginning of the document Unchecked it searches and replaces character names on its way to the end of the document e From Cursor Position Begins the character name search and replace at the cursor position e Entire Document Begins the character name search and replace at the beginning of the document Thesaurus ocreenwriter s Thesaurus finds synonyms and related words for any word you select 1 Select a word 2 Under the Tools menu select Thesaurus CMD J 3 The Thesaurus window opens with the selected word in the Head Word field Below is a scrollable list of like words 4 Double click on the word you prefer and it appears in the Head Word field along with its alternative words Click on Replace to put the word in the Head Word field in your document in place of your original word You can also type a word in the Head Word field and click on the Synonyms button to look up like words The More and More gt gt buttons will become available if there are more Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 159 words than can fit in the window 600 Thesaurus Werb Werb beholds grasps observes comprehends witnesses understands
84. Year American with dashes 3 15 2009 e Day Month Year Standard International Format 15 3 2009 e Day Month Year Standard International with dashes 15 3 2009 Put In Act Break As Selects a format for Act Break when it appears in the Header and or Footer Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Numbers 1 2 3 e Letters A B C e Words One Two Three e WORDS ONE TWO THREE e Roman Numerals I Il Ill Put In Scene Label As Selects a format for Scene Label when it appears in the Header and or Footer Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Numbers 1 2 3 e Letters A B C Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 197 13 3 5 13 3 6 13 3 7 13 3 8 e Words One Two Three e WORDS ONE TWO THREE e Roman Numerals I Il Ill Print Headers On Determines on which pages you want the Header and Footer Text to print Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Not Page One Header Text will be printed on every page except Page One This is the accepted standard for Screenplays e Every Page Header Text will be printed on every page including Page One e Every Page Except first Page of Scene Header Text will not be printed on the first page of a new Scene or Act Used in some TV shows as the Act Break Scene Label is already displayed Align Headers Footers Items in Header and Footer Text
85. a List Menu of Time of Day DAY with Location NIGHT etc Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 231 End of Action Character Name Add another Action Element Add a Dialogue Element If the next element is Dialogue or Parenthetical it moves to the beginning of that element End of Dialogue Add an Action Element Middle of Dialogue Element Parenthetical Break the Dialogue and insert an Action Add a Dialogue Element if the next element is Dialogue it moves to the beginning of that element If Return in Dialog takes you to Character is checked on the Editing page of the Options menu under the Tools menu a Character Name element will be inserted instead If QuickType is not enabled these popup lists can be displayed manually by pressing the appropriate Control key combination If you Press While in CTRL S Any element Blank Scene Heading Scene Heading with Initial Text Scene Heading with Initial Text and Location CTRL O CTRL O Any element Blank Shot element CTRL ENTER SHIFT CTRL C Action or Dialogue element Any element TAB Any element QuickType will Add a Scene Heading element Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT EXT etc Display a List Menu of all unique Locations already in the document Display a List Menu of Time of Day DAY NIGHT etc Add a Shot element Display a List Menu of Shots
86. a Non Speaking Character as being in the Scene even when he s not though the name appears in the Action element Override this error by tagging the name to be ignored Put the cursor immediately before the first letter of the name and press CTRL Control hyphen Each Group on New Page lIf checked starts a new page for each new group Print Tagged Items lf checked prints or exports all tagged items along with the other breakdown information Breakdown Tagging Breakdown Tagging allows you to mark or tag items in your script cast members extras makeup props stunts vehicles etc and assign them to certain Breakdown categories ocreenwriter can output them to either printed Breakdown Sheets or to an export file that can be read directly into Movie Magic Scheduling or EP Scheduling Breakdown Sheets give you breakdown information for each scene categorized for transfer to individual production strips Tagging Mode To start tagging script items for breakdown you need to turn Tagging Mode on e Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Tagging Mode e A checkmark displays next to Tagging Mode indicating that it s on Selecting Tagging Mode also makes Tagging Codes visible e To exit Tagging Mode click on it again from the menu The checkmark disappears and Tagging Codes are no longer visible Tagging Items With Tagging Mode on select a text item to be tagged an overcoat for example by d
87. a fix that the program has just made it will simply ignore this one case without prompting you Beep on Unknown Words Y Beep on Unknown Words Beep Sound Cone Highlight Unknown Words Beep on Unknown Words f checked alerts you to any suspected typos that Auto Correct is unable to correct for you The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work Highlight Unknown Words lf this is checked the spelling checker draws red underlines beneath words in the current element it does not know This option will only be available if the option Spell Check as you Type and Edit has already been enabled With this option NOT enabled when the real time spell checking routines find a word that it cannot correct and does not recognize it will NOT give you a visual alert Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 245 Beep Sound Use this popup menu to choose a sound that is played when you type a word that is not in the dictionary The default is None 15 7 5 AutoCapitalize Auto Lapitalize Y Auto Capitalize Sentences Auto Capitalize Character Names Y Except immediately following Shots All Caps Y Correct Double Capitals e g PRoblem v Treat as a Sentence End in dialogue for the purposes of auto capitalization amp spacing vi Correct Capitalization 5pacing when Run Manually Y Ignore Capitalization when Checking Words e Sentences lf che
88. adjusted by clicking and dragging There are margin settings for the left right columns of four element types e Character Left and Right edges of the selected column for Character Name elements e Dialogue Left and Right edges of the selected column for Dialogue elements e Parenthetical l eft and Right edges of the selected column for Parenthetical elements e Other Left and Right edges of the selected column for all other element types such as Action Scene Heading Outline and Shot elements Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 135 10 26 10 26 1 10 26 2 Cheating Cheating involves overriding the default settings as defined in Format Element Styles Cheating can affect a the single element page or document to which you apply it Cheating is used to change the look of a document One reason for doing this is to try to fool the professional script reader who expects a screenplay to time out to one minute of screen time per script page As an example if your script is a long 125 pages you can cheat the line spacing margins etc to have it print out closer to the standard maximum length of 120 pages Another use of cheating would be to stretch the text on a page to fill up the extra blank white space left by a long Dialogue element you don t want broken by a page break e Cheat an Element 135 e Cheat Right Margins e Cheat Page Breaks 135 e Cheat a Page 136 e Cheat the Whole Script 13s
89. and 2 spaces Dialogue Immediately following the Character Name after the colon and two spaces and on the same line The text should wrap normally without any special indentation Example KAREN Oh my love you have returned to me Parenthetical Part of the dialogue on the same line but text is enclosed in parentheses with a space before and after as appropriate Example KAREN Oh my love you have returned to me sotto At last Transition Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Transition text must end in TO Transition text should be surrounded by two carets like the following Sia 0h A Ob Shot Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Shot text should be surrounded by two square brackets like the following ANGLE ON SIGN Centered Title Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Centered Titles should be surrounded by two equal signs like the following No Trespassing Formatted as ALL CAPS Entered as an Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 111 9 4 9 5 Action paragraph with one blank line before and one blank line after it Notes should be surrounded by two angle brackets like the following Make sure we keep the ages consistent gt gt Forced Page
90. appear at the top bottom of every page when a scene is continuing Scene continueds should not be used in a spec script but rather are used in shooting scripts in production EXAMPLE ACT ONE A 84 Movie Magic Screenwriter FADE IN INT MANHATTAN HIGHRISE DAY D NA QN TE L Q E QUEA TE LAYLA Q ALK A A SHAKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLhES ON THE COFFEE TABLE AMIR BURSTS THROUGH THE FRONT DOOR HE IS ALL SMILES TINA Don t move SHUSHING HIM WITH HER HAND I ve been working on this all CGAY sss AMIR GINGERLY APPROACHES HER JAMIE PIPES IN FROM THE KITCHEN JAMIE O 5 Don t even bother Amir AMIR TAKES A BREATH IN TO SPEAK TINA GLARES UP AT HIM WITH A SCOLDING FINGER AMIR V O ECHOEY THOUGHTS She always does this to me TINA QUIETLY Why do you always do this to me TINA SITS DOWN TINA CONT D IC s not faltf MORE CONT D A MORE is placed at the bottom of a page when dialogue continues across a page break They are perfectly acceptable to use but some writers prefer a cleaner page and turn them off Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 85 EXAMPLE AMIR 4 0 She always does this to me and I don t know why AMIR iV O CONT D It s always the same thing Sitcom format Step by step Basics Load the Template 1 Click on File gt New from Template and choose Sitcom or Il from the Blank Templates folder 2 You should now be looking at a b
91. as they were BEFORE a save command is performed We recommend you do NOT consider these files backup files since they are temporary and can be overwritten as you continue to save your document RECOMMENDATION MAKE SEPARATE BACKUPS OF YOUR WORK Use these BK files as emergency file retrievals only e Retain up to previous version of a document This option sets the number of previous version files of a document Screenwriter keeps around The number is from 1 to 100 Each bk file is a complete copy of the document file The default number of versions retained is 5 That means Screenwriter stores up to five additional copies of each document you work on Setting the number higher can begin to take up a lot of disk space e Place previous version files in This option controls where the previous versions of your document are saved e A subfolder named Previous Versions Screenwriter places the bk files for all documents in a folder called Previous Versions e The same folder as the document Screenwriter places the bk files for the document being edited in the same folder as the document e Create a new previous version file This option controls when the previous version files are created e Only once per editing session A bk file is created the first time the document is saved during a single editing session If the document is closed and reopened ocreenwriter considers it a new editing session and another bk file is creat
92. becomes highlighted 3 Press RETURN The Character Name is entered and a Dialogue element is created To enter an existing Character Name by first letter 1 Type the first letter of the character s name A Pop up list of Character Names starting with that letter displays e Character Names i icd S PA EAEE a RARA qii E BOUNCER 2 Type enough letters until the name you want is highlighted and press RETURN The Character Name is entered and a Dialogue element is created 3 To enter a Character Extension such as O S off screen or V O voice over press Shift 9 left parenthesis instead of RETURN The Character Name is entered and a Character Extension Pop up List displays 120 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 8 1 10 8 2 No Extension Add as Text Mever Mind NOTE To alternate between the Last Two Character Names used press SHIFT TAB For example Paul had a speech then Maya Pressing SHIFT TAB enters the character name Paul again and creates a dialogue element for him After writing his speech pressing SHIFT TAB again would enter the character name Maya and create a dialogue element for her Inserting Character Names Character Names can be entered while in any element in the document 1 Press Control C A Pop Up List of Character Names displays 2 Select the name you want using the up and down arrows 3 Press Return The name ts inserted into the document Character
93. blank elements e Character Names with no dialogue e A Character with two speeches in a row with no intervening text such as an Action element Any errors found are displayed onscreen for your attention or if you prefer are automatically fixed by SmartCheck Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 241 Preferences 4 Editing Files 5martCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline los SmartCheck Options vi Automatically Run SmartCheck before Printing v Beep on Found Formatting Error Delete WITHOUT prompting Single Starting Blank Space Completely Blank Elements Character Names without Dialoque Second Character Names when he she speaks twice in a row with nothing between the two speeches Vi Combine OMITTED Scene Headings Separated Only by Page Breaks v Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks f Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT match Cancel 19 6 1 Automatically Run SmartCheck Before Printing If checked Screenwriter checks your document for errors each time you print In the Print window the Run SmartCheck before this Print Job box is also checked you can print without running SmartCheck by unchecking the box turning it off temporarily Unchecked no document checking is performed unless you manually run SmartCheck 15 6 2 Beep When Formatting Is Found If checked SmartChec
94. can be aligned flush with the right margin flush with the left margin or a combination of the two Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Flush Left at Margin Aligns Header and Footer Text flush with the Left margin using the default Left margin selected in Document Layout Enter a new Left margin for Header and Footer Text only if desired Accepts values in 1 10 increments between 0 3 and 8 0 e Flush Right at Margin Aligns Header and Footer Text flush with the Right margin using the default Right margin selected in Document Layout Enter a new Right margin for Header Text only if desired This is Screenwriter s default for Header and Footer Text alignment Accepts values in 1 10 increments between 0 3 and 8 0 To have some items align flush left and others align flush right insert a Flush Right code between them For example Act W Page would place Act 2 flush left and Page 3 flush right on the same line Blank Lines following Header Select the number of blank lines to insert between the Header Text and the page s first line of documenttext or Top Scene Continued Default is 1 blank line Preview Click this button to see a Print Preview of the current page showing your Header and Footer Text Click on the appropriate button for e Print Disabled when previewing from the Header Footer window Normally it sends the onscreen page to the printer formatted exactly as it looks but at 100 size
95. can be cheated by moving the right and left ruler markers Unchecked the Ruler does not display CLOSE SHOT Wheelbarrow full of junk being dumped onto pile JOSEPH S VOICE SCFr ap drives Show Format Codes If checked displays the hidden format codes embedded in the text of your document by Screenwriter for such things as text styles Bold Italic etc text color and other formatting codes In normal use you won t need to be aware of these codes Unchecked the format codes are hidden and do not display onscreen 224 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 1 3 T CLOSE SHOT WHEELBARROW FULL OF JUNK BEING DUMPED ONTO T PILE Format Codes e B b Bold start and end respectively e I i ltalics start and end e U u Underline start and end e S s Strikethrough start and end e L l B Blue text start and end e R r Red text start and end e G g Green text start and end e U1 thru U7 u1 thru u7 User Defined color text start and end e S section symbol Hard Return e pipe symbol Hard Dash e tilde Soft Dash this symbol is also inserted before a word in a document if you have told the program to ignore the word for auto correction Zoom Screen Text View gt Zoom Screen Text Displays the Zoom Screen dialog window allowing you to alter how large the document text displays onscreen Movie M
96. cem d o Ud ee e esee te bee d n tc pe UELLE 121 o M Nn ETE 121 Parentihelical orca uei ttu EEEE E D O uo 122 TA o tU eM EI tus 123 MOL Morc I M HR RO 123 ME s sasud cun Md Ai E Ti E EE n E M 124 PCE CA caper a ec e Ld ist Amm MM M LE 124 Prologue POX p EE 124 NOWUACU suc uiid da ce E MM n M M M ML A EM EE 124 Sae NC Me TEC TE 124 gero gie m 124 IEW OCENE mesas sde As OO OOL OON P QL SEDE DOCE PISUT 125 NOTES unns b a 125 AIC SDBNIOIS eiua oda ttc duse PC REL MU P MEE P MM D EU DE MEUSE RE 125 TIPS ANO DN 126 CLE OW A Ole osa OI die EII NOAA CO AER Os 126 PECADO A ope MM dM o M MEE 126 NOIE OPIION err L r et 127 Switch Elements 0o uite o to EE I Coca tut o c v A AO ede HERD OL LC da e Ure LA toe qu ii eoa 128 Moving Between Elements 5 tec en Snpra QE ce Qoo dak eee eoe Pare Cer or enia Fia CEP IE coisa TECH sua RR YR wn csc anes COE nsa aA PEIUS Vo REO CS 129 Character Name in Dialogue or Action 1 1 eeeeeeeeeee eene e eene nennen nnn n nun nenne anas asas assa assa su ns s sena sanas nn nns 130 Add Forced Page Break canino Eee ehe obo ce sas ha s n case eds Deci e un ad Re even wc ceca dius D eI ode T EYE Cue v eva E Seu RR MERE 131 Remove a Forced Page Break iio ceno ier eerie e a E a eee asilo 131 o O 131 alaen Bo a MM c
97. cursor position to the end of the document e Entire Document Spell checks all text in the document When Spell Check finds a word it doesn t recognize displays the Found Unknown Word window This shows the unknown word and offers a list of suggested alternatives Option Buttons down the right side are AU mp TET TOT CT y Word Eo Replace Suggestions 2 feller lions She F 1 Learn NN E poc Add Word To nt President s d Setup Options d Select Language Walt till Martha hears about this e Replace lf you find the correct spelling in the Suggestion window click on it and it appears in the Word window replacing the unknown spelling Click the Replace button to replace it in your document e Auto Correct Adds the unknown word and its correct spelling to the User Dictionary which will be Auto Corrected as you type in the future if the same typo is made Auto Correct must be turned on to enable Typo correction e Learn Remember this spelling for future use by adding the word to the current User Dictionary unless you specify otherwise All documents that use that User Dictionary will recognize the word 154 Movie Magic Screenwriter 11 10 2 e Skip Once Skip over this appearance of the word but stop at the next one e Ignore All Skip over this word and all future occurrences Ignores the word in all documents
98. dabs at it with her handkerchief GEORGE What s the matter Merry Christmas Vi MACU CT Alasen hei Mode fy le _ Outline Shuffle Each card represents one scene Across the top of each card are two boxes the leftmost box contains the Scene Number while the rightmost box contains the Scene Heading Beneath is the scene text comprised of Action and Character Names and Dialogue if you ve entered them in your document Index Card Toolbar Cards O Os 8s Ou PERSE vera Across the bottom of the screen is the Index Card toolbar with the following options Number of Index Cards on Screen os Scroll by Row Column Horizontal Index Cards Vertical Index Cards 10s Add an Index Card 09 109 Cancel Print Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 109 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 9 3 Number of Index Cards on screne Cards a Os Ba Ol You can change the number of the Index Cards displayed on screen To select the number of cards that appear on screen click on one of the buttons located on the left side of the Toolbar You can display Four Six Nine or Twelve Index Cards at a time This is for display purposes only and does not affect how the index cards print Horizontal Index Cards To display your Index Cards horizontally reading by row from left to right click the Horizontal button on the Toolbar Vertical Index Cards To display
99. displays in the Item To be Tagged field If you didn t select an item type the name of the item in the field here In the Tag Item as section select the radio button of the Category to which to assign the item If you want to be prompted each time Screenwriter finds the item check the Prompt on each Tagging box Although you can tag an item more than once in a scene as Global Tagging does it s not necessary an item only shows up once per scene in the breakdowns or in Movie Magic Scheduling or EP Scheduling Click OK to tag the item globally Cancel to exit without tagging Ignore Selection for Breakdowns If your breakdown is recognizing an item in a scene as being tagged when you don t want it to you can mark the text so it is ignored by breakdowns While in Tagging Mode select the item by double clicking on it A list of Breakdown Categories displays Click on Ignore Selection for Breakdowns Untag All Items To remove breakdown tagging codes from all items in your entire document select Untag All Items Under the Production menu select Production gt Breakdown gt Untag All Items Click the YES button CONTINUE button on Mac to Untag all items No Cancel button on Mac to exit without making changes 298 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 7 7 Edit Breakdown Categories If you use different Breakdown Categories than the ones Screenwriter supplies or would like to add ones of your own des
100. documents with unsaved changes only if you have added something to your document If you remove portions of your document and never add anything to it the program will not prompt you to save Saving Portions of a Document While you re rewriting you may want to cut a scene from your document but not discard it completely Screenwriter lets you save portions of your document to a new file 1 Select the text 2 Under the Edit menu select either Copy To or Cut To Copy To Copies the selected text leaving it in your document and saving it in a new file e New File Creates a new file puts the selected information within it and allows you to name the file before the program saves it Screenwriter keeps the original document open To retrieve the new file you must go to File Open Existing File Allows you to copy the selected text to a document that already exists Choosing this option brings up a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the file that you would like this text to be pasted to Select the file and click open Screenwriter pastes the text to the end of the document and closes the file Your current document will remain open ocrap File Creates a new file with the same name as your current document but at the end will have scrap You can find this document by going into the Window menu At the bottom of this menu it lists all the open documents Simply click on your scrap file and the document will dis
101. else Sir can I get you anything else UNSHAVEN MAN palming the amulet NO DAT BER The Unshaven Man sits Coffee no longer steaming still Untoucbeo DISSOLVER TUS EXT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE NIGHT The Unshaven Man leans against his beat up Chevy Nova caressing the amulet in his fingers Other Formatting Elements There are three other formatting elements worth mentioning e Character Extensions 71 e CONT D Character Name 72 e MORE and CONT D 7 Character Extensions These are extensions that are used generally to tell the reader whether or not a character is speaking in the scene and cannot be seen or whether their speech is a narration thoughts over the phone etc Formatting e Placed on the same line but directly after the Character Name e Surrounded by parentheses e ALL CAPS There are two extensions that are usually used O S Off Screen Denotes a character that can be heard but is off camera EXAMPLE EXT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE NIGHT The Unshaven Man leans against his beat up Chevy Nova caressing the amulet in his fingers 72 Movie Magic Screenwriter WAITRESS 0 5 Sir you forgot your wallet The Unshaven Man jumps to his feet pockets the amulet in his Jacket V O Voice Over Denotes a character s narration thoughts or dialogue heard in the soundtrack that is not taking place in the actual scene EXAMPLE EXT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE NIGH
102. have their script elements defined by their margins others by codes or Hard Returns If a script file is being imported incorrectly due to its margins not being what Screenwriter expects checking this feature may allow a more accurate import Action is in Parentheticals Check this if your import file has the Action Element in parentheses such as certain TV or Stage Play scripts Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Check this if the import file has Page Breaks and you want to keep them exactly the same in the resulting ocreenwriter document 5 Click on OK to import the file 6 Under Screenwriter s File menu Save your imported file under a new name If your script does not import successfully try again with different options checked You may have to experiment with these options to get the best results Cut and Paste Import Use this method if none of the other methods imports your document successfully To import a document from another Mac OS X program on the same computer as Screenwriter 1 Open the other Mac OS X program and open the file you want to import to Screenwriter Under that program s Edit menu Select All or select all the text in the file using another method Under the Edit menu select Copy Once the Copy command is complete the text will be on the Clipboard Don t cut or copy anything else Open Screenwriter 354 Movie Magic Screenwriter 5 Un
103. hidden Unchecking Display Notes in Script automatically unchecks Print Notes in Script Print Notes in Document lIf checked Notes are treated as part of the script when printing changing the Page Breaks accordingly Checking Print Notes in Script automatically checks Display Notes in Script Unchecked Notes do not print or increase the script length Centered Title Centered Title has no element specific options Page Breaks Break Action 0 d 2 Do Not Break Action Sentence Ends Only fe Sentence Ends Preferred oh z a o Maximum Lines on Page Minimum Action Lines on a Page 3 Break Dialogue 5 0 0 0 0 EK Q Do Not Break Dialogue Sentence Ends Only fe Sentence Ends Preferred g 78 z Maximum Lines on Page E Minimum Dialogue Lines on a Page 7 4 Y Break After a Single Sentence Break two One line Sentences E Allow Transition as lst line on Page Allow Transition on CONTINUED line Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line Count More Line in Page Breaking Starting Page Number 1 4 wif e i Start 1st Forced Page on Line 270 Movie Magic Screenwriter Break Action Break Action O Do Not Break Action F3 Sentence Ends Only Gat Sentence Ends Preterred E Maximum Lines on Page Minimum Action Lines on a Page 2 E Do Not Break Action lf checked an Action element is never split by a page break Unchecked Action
104. in the Scene Labels section Notes A Note or script note provides you with a place in the document to jot down an idea for a scene or a comment on the story or to put writing you have cut but are not sure about discarding See the section of the NaviDoc Note Panel for additional information on organizing your notes Notes are separate from the body text of your document and don t affect the page breaks or document length They can be displayed onscreen or hidden They can be printed separately with page references or printed in the regular body of the document in which case they would affect the page breaks and document length e Add a Note 125 e Type a Note 125 e Hide Show a Note 126 e Print a Note 126 e Note Options 127 Add a Note To add a Note position the cursor in the element you want a script note to follow Press CTRL N on the keyboard Or click on the Right Toolbar button with a musical Note icon El A Note is added where the cursor is located 126 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 15 2 Type a Note 10 15 3 10 15 4 Type and format text in a Note as you would in any other element To force a new line or put in a blank line press SHIFT RETURN Hide Show a Note Notes can be individually displayed onscreen or hidden In the left margin next to the Note is a triangle that indicates the note s status When a Note displays the triangle points downward y END OF MON
105. inserted into a script with Locked Scene Headings Choose this option if you want a new Scene Heading that s inserted between two existing Scene Headings to be numbered with the following scene s number rather than the preceding scene s number With this option selected when you insert a new scene between scenes 1 and 2 it would be scene 2A The next scene would be scene 2B and so on Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 283 16 4 5 16 4 6 Multi Lock Production gt Multi Lock This menu command is grayed out unless you are in a script that already has Locked Scene Headings and or Locked Pages in which case selecting this item will take you to a sub menu with the following options 1 Scenes 23 This option will be grayed out unless the script already has Locked Scene Headings in which case selecting it will turn on off the Multi Locking of Scenes 2 Pages 284 This option will be grayed out unless the script already has Locked Pages in which case selecting it will turn on off the Multi Locking of Pages NOTE Multi Locking is Movie Magic Screenwriter variable second locking level used to preserve A Scene and A Page Numbering when new scene headings or pages are inserted before or between existing A Scenes or A Pages respectively See the online help under Multi Locking for more details Multi Lock Scenes To use Multi Lock Scenes you need to click on its tab Multilock AfterA Sceme O O Y
106. left up to the director A Note about Formatting It is important that your screenplay follows the generally accepted format However don t worry about the minutia Should use CONT Ds after character names or not Will my script be thrown away if there are MOREs on the bottom when dialogue breaks across the page etc A script would more likely to be passed up because of bad writing than because of the use or non use of CONT Ds after the character names Hemember you can always configure the formatting to your personal writing style See Customizing Screenwriter gt Script Format Options 259 Title Page The title Cover page of a screenplay typically uses Courier or Courier New 12pt The title of the screenplay the Written by line and the author s name should be centered vertically and horizontally on the page as well as double spaced e The title is usually in ALL CAPS It can be enclosed in quotes underlined or bolded if desired but it is not necessary e The next line can say An original screenplay by Written by or by e The author s name should be in Initial Caps e The contact information is generally in the lower left corner single spaced and left justified Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 65 FOLLOW IH MY FOOTSTEPS An original screenplay by Joe E Smithee Joe E Smitthee 123 Main St Somewhere CA 99999 018 555 1234 Joscesmitheefsomeemall com FADE IN A s
107. list in the Notes Panel and an outline list in the Outline Panel Opening and Closing the NaviDoc There are several ways to show and hide the NaviDoc e Select the NaviDoc command from the View menu e Press CTRL ZERO e Click on the NaviDoc icon located in the View toolbar located at the bottom left of the document window Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 161 12 2 12 3 e Double click or Click and Drag the NaviDoc Splitter 6 INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND She reaches up and kisses F _17 INT GEORGES OFFICE DAY George opens the door for I 18 INT OUTER OFFICE DAY p INT OUTER OFFICE DAY Gus DOORWAY TO UNCLE BILLYS O CLOSE SHOT As George and 20 INT OUTER OFFICE DAY a they are being watched by C an EXT MAIN STREET BEDFORD FALLS cone aa examiner who is Double click or drag the NaviDoc to the right to open Above INT OUTER OFFICE DAY CLOSE SHOT As George and Violet come through the door the bank examiner HG is still waiting to go to work on t Double click or drag the NaviDoc splitter to the left to close Above Resizing the NaviDoc Panel Click and drag the NaviDoc splitter to change the width of the NaviDoc panel The NaviDoc has a minimum size but no maximum Dragging the NaviDoc splitter to the left beyond the minimum closes the NaviDoc panel ICE DAY E AS oper cU BILLY s o DES Mars Eat j TL is odi de m
108. may be broken over the two pages Sentence Ends Only lf checked Action is broken at the end of a sentence only Sentence Ends Preferred lf checked Action is broken at the end of a sentence if one exists in the 3 lines before the end of where the page break falls If no sentence end is found in the last 3 lines Action may be broken in the middle of a sentence Maximum Lines on Page lf checked Action may be broken in the middle of a sentence in order to fit the maximum number of lines on a page Minimum Action Lines on a Page Tells Screenwriter not to break an Action element unless there are at least this number of Action lines both before and after the page break The lower the number entered the less blank white space at the bottom of a page Accepts a number between 1 and 10 with 2 as the default Not used when Sentence Ends Only is selected Break Dialogue C3 Sentence Ends Only fe Sentence Ends Preferred oh J y Maximum Lines on Page Minimum Dialogue Lines on a Page 2 a v Break After a Single Sentence Break two One line Sentences Do Not Break Dialogue lf checked a Dialogue element is never split by a page break Unchecked Dialogue may be broken over the two pages Sentence Ends Only lf checked Dialogue is broken at the end of a sentence or between Dialogue and Parenthetical only Sentence Ends Preferred lf checked Dialogue is broken at the end of a sentence if one exists in the 3 lines
109. menu where you can select a different user dictionary for the currently displayed document e Select Language Shows options for changing your Spell Checking to a different language Use of this feature requires the installation of an optional Foreign Language Dictionary e Edit User Dictionary Takes you to Select Language then to a menu to choose a User Dictionary to edit Add delete or edit words to be used by SpellCheck or Auto Correct e Speak Selection Movie Magic Screenwriter has the ability to actually read your document aloud using the Macintosh s built in text to speech engine This menu item reads the selected text aloud using the voices that are assigned to the document e Assign Voices Clicking on this feature opens a window that allows you to assign voices to elements of the document Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 329 17 1 11 Production Menu Unlock the Script Multi lock Start Mext Revision Set Revision Draft Color Apply Revision Mark M Remove Revision Mark lt M Fix or Flex Auto Revision Remove Override Breakdowns TV Breakdowns Animation Locking Watermark Setup e Lock The Script Displays the Lock the Script menu allowing you to change all document Locking options in one place Default setting is to Lock all options Uncheck the items you don t want locked Only available in a document without Locked Pages e Unlock The Script Displays the Un
110. oaa eode esu doen eakas iaaa 300 Animalon Producton eese P Dn 301 Multiple Revision Marks unas ies 301 Locking Gurrent Revision Marks ors eaei E ea io 301 ASSIGNING Numbers o SpeBCh65 uieu eme dic 302 Animation Hecording SCIONS coda 302 Printing Animation Recording Scripts 3 ani eee to loses ede ies dioses Dose ram ceci ee ada dU aa aa Bana MEQUE 303 Changing the Animation Recording Script layout sess 304 Displaying Numbered Dial UE ociosa ida ideo 304 Locking Dialogue INUEDDSFIPI 3 32 AA sme IU VEDO VT E Nd 304 Multi Locking Dialogue Numbering pterea aa p E aa a e nnne nnne nnn innare raa n nsn nn nnns 304 Dniocking Dialogue N urmberipig ooo 2 deti eto uo Desat iio 304 Overriding Diglogue NUMBERING EE ETE EOD 304 A EEEE EE E E EE EEEE E 305 AEn 310 MENUS Nor c 310 a A S 311 PUG MS ed dida 312 A see 314 MEW Men H 318 Normal NT cT TEUER 320 RUP age disse ia a a etu utto as EM glee ME 320 Format WOT e P 321 Search MO e 324 ipei Ne ERE 324 eU NEUE 324 WEBS MENU c RP 325 11 Movie Magic Screenwriter jene
111. of current line p End of current line UP ARROW ainia Previous Line DOWN ARROW eeeeeee Next Line PAGE UP Previous Screen PAGE DOWN T Next Screen NOTE Keyboard commands can be altered in the Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Keyboard 146 Movie Magic Screenwriter window Selecting Text Screenwriter uses the standard Mac OS X methods of text selection Menu Selection Place the cursor on the word to be selected Under the Edit menu choose from Select All Selects the entire document Select Special Displays options for selecting by e Word Selects the word where the cursor is located e Sentence Selects the entire sentence where the cursor is located e Element Selects the entire element where the cursor is located e Group Selects a group of adjacent elements including the one where the cursor is located for example Character Name plus Parenthetical plus Dialogue e Page Selects the entire page where the cursor is located e Scene Selects the entire scene where the cursor is located e Scene Range Displays a list of your script s Scene Headings Click on or drag the cursor over the ones you want to select and click on OK e Extend Selection Displays an Extend Block menu with options for extending your selection backwards or forwards in the document from the Current Cursor Position Mouse Selection Screenwriter has a va
112. only able to provide technical support on the export side of this procedure Unfortunately we have no control over how another company s programs deal with importing Cut and Paste Exporting You can export from Screenwriter to another Mac OS X program on the same computer using Cut and Paste 1 Open the Mac OS X program you want to export to Open a file to export to or open a new file 358 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 6 2 Open Screenwriter and open the document you want to export from 3 Using the mouse select the text to export 4 Under the Edit menu select Copy 5 Go to the other Mac OS X program 6 Under the Edit menu select Paste All of Screenwriter s formatting may not transfer but you should at least be able to export all the text Be warned that not all Mac OS X programs can handle Cut and Paste correctly NOTE For this method to work the option Share Clipboard with Other Mac OS X Programs must be checked To check uncheck it go to the Misc page of Options under the Tools menu Format Codes The following Format Codes are embedded in the text of your document by Screenwriter To display them e Under the View menu select Show Format Codes If your document is going into Production and you perform Breakdown Tagging on it Tagging Codes are placed around each word you tag See the Production Features chapter for more details m o m fm fr AO Movie Magic Scree
113. or NIGHT The Time of Day is separated from the Location commonly by one hyphen although a dash double hyphen is also acceptable EXAMPLES INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY Action description This is the description of the action that is taking place in the scene Formatting e Flush with the left margin 1 5 e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page and staggered e Sentence case e Single spaced within the paragraph and double spaced between paragraphs EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner 1s full to capacity as is typical on a Saturday The UNSHAVEN MAN sits at the counter staring into his coffee C p NOTE The first instance of a character that is mentioned in Action is in ALL CAPS all subsequent occurrences are Initial Caps 68 Movie Magic Screenwriter Character Name Character Name This element shows which character is about to speak Formatting e Left margin is roughly 3 7 from the left edge of the page e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page e Left justified not centered e ALL CAPS e here is one blank line above each new Character Name e he first instance of the character name mentioned in Action is ALL CAPS EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner is full to capacity The UNSHAVEN MAN sits at the counter Staring at the gold amulet in front
114. previous cheating you ve done Element Page Document Unmark as Non Printing 324 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 1 6 17 1 7 17 1 8 Search Menu Find Menu Removed All Find commands are now in the Edit si menu Mark One Characters Dialogue command is now in the Format menu Goto Menu Top Bottom Page Scene Previous Scene Heading Next Scene Heading Next A Page Next Forced Page Break Next Speech By Next Note Next Current Revision Mark Next Strikethrough or Colored Text tr Last Position de Y e Top Takes you to the Top of the document e Bottom Takes you to the End of the document e Page Takes you to a specific Page Number or Scene Number e Scene Displays a Scene Heading list allowing you to select the one to go to e Previous Scene Heading Takes you to the previous Scene Heading in the document e Next Scene Heading Takes you to the next Scene Heading in the document e Next A Page Takes you to the next A Page Only available in locked scripts Otherwise it s grayed out Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu e Next Forced Page Break In a Television or Stage Play format script takes you to the next Act Break or Scene Break e Next Speech By Displays a Character Name list taking you to the next speech by the character you select Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command w
115. program to learn it OR alternatively put the cursor at the beginning of the word and press lt CTRL DASH gt which will put in a hidden code to tell the program not to autocorrect this word Q Cut and paste is slow on my machine Can speed it up at all A Yes Go to the Tools menu select Options then click on the Misc Page and uncheck Share Clipboard with Other Windows Programs This will speed up cut and pasting by approximately 3396 but will make it so that you cannot cut text in Screenwriter and paste it into another Windows program Q have Screenwriter for Windows on two different computers and when load exactly the same script on both of them the page breaks are slightly different what s going on A The computers have different printers selected and since Screenwriter bases the page breaks on the selected printer s page size and printing resolution different printers can produce different results Simply select the same printer driver on both machines even if one or the other is not hooked up to that printer and then they will match Q want to move my scenes around in a locked production script is there an easy way to do it A Switch to Index Card View mode and shuffle your scenes as desired Q Our locked production script was broken into two parts how do we merge it back together without creating unnecessary A scenes and A pages A Open the first part of your script place your cursor at the place whe
116. radio button In the Select Names window click on a character s name to print his her dialogue CHILDREN S VOICES CLARENCE COP Or push the Select All button to select all of the characters Click OK to go to the Print window with selected options Cancel to go back without 304 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 11 2 16 11 3 16 11 4 16 11 5 16 11 6 16 11 7 Changing the Animation Recording Script layout Animation dialogue preferences are found under Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Anim Dialog in the program Go to Animation Dialog Preferences s for more on this topic Displaying Numbered Dialogue To Display and Print the dialogue speech numbering in the script as well as in the Animation Recording Script report Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Print Dialog Numbering in Script A checkmark displays next to Print Dialog Numbering in Script To turn the display of Numbering off click on it again Locking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be locked numbering new speeches as A Speeches while reordered speeches maintain their original numbers You might want to do if you re using these numbers to relate to story boards or cells Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Lock Dialogue Numbering This causes a number for each speech to be displayed onscreen to the right of the Character Name in angle brackets e g lt
117. replacing the text in the document e Change Character Name ss Displays a Search amp Replace menu modified for Character Names only The Search for box contains a list of available Character Names to choose from Choose one enter the new Name in the Replace with box and define the Search amp Replace parameters Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 157 11 11 1 Find and Replace Window Whole Words Only o Search Backwards Find with Same Capitalization as Search Text ONLY mm ES p a From Cursor Position E Entire Document Replace with Keep Capitalization of Original Word Invoking the Find command opens the Find amp Replace window This window may be shown in a reduced mode by clicking on the character above the Find button nd n PEE ENEE Replace APR p Replace amp Find 1 Replace All The expanded version of this window has several options e Find What Enter the text to be found e Whole Words Only When checked Screenwriter only searches for instances of the word and does NOT find partial matches Uncheck this option to find partial matches e g if you search for the Screenwriter will also find words such as theater and rather e Search Backwards Searches from the current point in the document toward the beginning of the document Unchecked Screenwriter always searches moving toward the end of the document Find with Same Ca
118. right margin Unchecked Transition text is aligned flush with the left margin S Transitions are FLUSH RIGHT Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 267 Act Breaks Put Act Break text in Parenthesis Y Center Act Break Don t use Act Break for a New Scene in the Same Act Starting Number 1 a e la vj End of Show Follows Act 0 C ACT A C ACT 1 NUMBERS PU ura fe ACT ONE C 3 ACT I ROMAN Ma Put Act Break in Parenthesis lf checked puts Parentheses around the Act Break text as is required in some TV Sitcom formats Center Act Break lf checked all Act Break text is centered horizontally between the Act Break margins Unchecked Act Break text starts at the Act Break left margin Don t use Act Break for a New Scene in the Same Act e g Put in ONLY on first Scene of an Act lf checked puts Act Scene at the beginning of the first scene in an Act only Subsequent scenes have the Scene information only Unchecked each scene in an Act has the full Act Scene information NOTE The Put in ONLY on 1st Scene of Act setting does not update existing Act Scene Text this will stay the way you entered it unless you manually change it It only changes the appearance of future Act Scene Text you create after changing the setting To change existing Act Scene Text use the Search amp Replace command Starting Number Allows you to enter an Act Number
119. saved as part of the document file itself and don t need to be saved separately You can create a new template with your preferred settings by doing the following 1 Open the document with your preferred settings and format 2 Under the File menu select Save As Template 3 Enter a new filename if necessary Click on OK to save the format NOTE If you wish to change the type of document that gets created e g Screenplay Stage Play Novel etc when using File New using Default Template simply replace overwrite Default def when saving your template It is not recommended to overwrite any of the other existing templates Restoring an Overwritten Template There are two ways to restore a previously defined format you may have overwritten e Uninstall and then reinstall Screenwriter This restores all the pre set template formats to their Screenwriter defaults Reinstall Screenwriter by doing the following Open the appropriate Example file and save its format over the template that was overwritten 1 Click on File Open 106 Movie Magic Screenwriter 2 Open the Sample Files folder 3 In the Sample Files folder select the sample file that contains the format of the template that was overwritten and click Open 4 Click on File Save As Template 5 Select the template def file that was accidentally overwritten 6 Click on Save 7 A prompt should appear asking to replace the exis
120. soon as you type them The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work e Prompt on Multiple Words during Auto Correction Check this if you want to be asked what to do when a misspelled word can be corrected in more than one way If checked it gives you a choice of words when the typo could have two or more correct spellings If unchecked Auto Correct makes the decision for you The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work e Maximum Sets the maximum word length of typos to auto correct If on a slower computer set this to a lower number Screenwriter uses a default word length of 25 letters e Auto Correct Sound Sets the sound used when an auto correction is made The default setting is None e Query when you fix Auto Corrected Words With this option enabled if the real time spell check erroneously fixes a word by inverting two of its letters changing the capitalization or spacing and then you immediately go back and change it back to what it was before the program fixed it will prompt you with a message asking you if it should learn this word as you have restored it or whether it should simply ignore this one instance This option will only be available if the option Spell Check as you Type and Edit has already been enabled With this option NOT enabled assuming you have Auto Correct Typos enabled in the case where you restore
121. text displaying it as normal e Blue Style Removes blue highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e Green Style Removes green highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e User Defined Removes User Defined highlighting from revised text displaying it as normal e Remove Scene w o OMITTED Removes the Scene Heading that the cursor is in without creating an OMITTED Scene Heading to indicate something was deleted May cause Scene Headings after the one removed to be renumbered Override Provides specialized control over instances of production features in the document Page s Header or Color Page Break Type Element s Numbering e Page s Header Draft Color Allows you to override the header of the page the cursor s on Displays the Header Setup screen for editing of the header text Only available in a Locked Script e Page Break Type Allows you to override the type of page break directly before the cursor converting it to your preference Only available in a Locked Script e Element s Numbering Allows you to override the numbering of the Scene Header that the cursor s currently in renumbering it to your preference Only available in a Locked Script Breakdown Shows options for tagging breakdown items to be printed on Breakdown Sheets or exported to Movie Magic Scheduling Tagging Mode Edit Categories Tag Item Globally Untag All Items Movie Magic Scheduling Exp
122. the User List and exit editing or Cancel to discard changes 7 Save the changes to the document s User Lists by saving the document file 8 Now you can load the items you ve added to this document s User List into another document See Loading User Lists 139 above Saving Lists as the Default Lists for all New Documents To save User Lists you ve made changes to as the default User Lists for new documents 1 Under the Format menu select User Lists 2 Make changes to your User Lists as described in the sections above 3 Click the Save as Defaults For all New Documents checkbox Y Save as Default tor all New Scripts The new defaults do not affect any existing documents To apply the new defaults to User Lists of existing documents load them from a new document that contains them See Loading User Lists 139 above Default User Lists When you install Screenwriter all User Lists except for Character Names Scene Body Text and Substitution Text have default items which are used for all new and imported documents Character Names Empty Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 141 ocene Heading Text INT EXT P O V FULL SHOT scene Body Text Empty Locations Shot Text BACK TO SCENE ANGLE ON Time of Day MORNING The ampersand amp tells DAY Screenwriter which letter to h j underline when it displays AFTERNOON the Time of Day menu but EVENI
123. the delete if prompted NOTE while you can rename it you cannot delete the Default note category because there must be at least one Adding and Removing Notes in the Document Adding Notes in the Document 1 Click on File gt Open and open the Sample Screenplay file in the Sample Files folder 2 In the Outline panel click on Scene 3 INT CAVERN NIGHT 3 In that scene find the sentence The dark figure doesn t move staying in the shadows But his voice is strained 4 Click at the beginning of that sentence 5 Press SHIFT CTRL N to add a new note 6 Type in Find a different way to describe the Dark Figure s voice You can also add notes in the following ways e Top Menus NaviDoc New Note Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 61 Naviboc Qutline Scenes X Notes e Notes Panel Add Note Element button Add Mote Element T e Top Toolbar Insert Element button If you do not see that button on the top toolbar see Customize Toolbar 227 m Default Note A Note Category 1 Y Note Category 2 e Right Toolbar Note button If you do not see the Right Toolbar click on View gt Right Element Buttons E gt 4 7 Click on the Add Note Element on the Notes panel 8 Choose the Default Note Category 9 Type in This is another note Removing Notes from the Document There are two ways to delete a note in the document Delete Note button on the Not
124. the left if it is not already open 2 Click on the Scene called Neal slips in the kitchen 3 Hold down the CMD key on the keyboard 4 Click on the Scene called Fiona gets the hot seat Notice that it only selects those specific nonadjacent outline elements NOTE you cannot select outline elements of different styles e g Act amp Scene Sequence amp Scene etc Moving Outline Elements Open the tutorial file 1 Click on File gt New from Template 54 Movie Magic Screenwriter 2 Double click the Tutorials folder and open the file called Moving Outline Elements If an outline element has child elements the child elements will normally move with the parent For example if you have a Sequence parent that contains three Scenes children moving the Sequence will take the three Scenes with it To move selected outline elements click and drag them up or down to a new location in the Outline panel If the Outline is long you can hold the mouse near the top or bottom of the list while dragging an element in order to scroll the list 1 Click and hold the left mouse button down on the Sequence in the First Act 2 Still holding the mouse button down drag the Sequence down into the Second Act 3 Click down on the Sequence you just moved and while still holding the mouse button down drag it to the bottom of the list Notice the list starts to scroll which allows you move
125. the number of words in the document e Name Bank 22 Displays the Name Bank screen where you can select names for your characters Alphabetically displays lists of Female and Male first names and Family surnames e Spell Check Checks the spelling of the document and has a submenu with several options e Word Checks the spelling of the Word that the cursor is currently in e Selection Checks the spelling of the highlighted test selection 328 Movie Magic Screenwriter Element Checks the spelling of the Element that the cursor is currently in e Page Checks the spelling of the current Page e Forwards Checks the spelling from the cursor position to the end of the document e Entire Document Checks the spelling of all text in the document Word Selection Element Page Forwards Entire Document e Correct Current Word Checks the spelling of the Word that the cursor is currently in and gives you options to handle it without bringing up the Spell Check window including suggestions Add to Dictionary Ignore for This Session well we ll we Il wells welled weal e Pause AutoCorrection Pauses the real time Spell Checking or AutoCorrection features if they re on When paused there will be a check mark next to this menu item e Clear Ignore List Clears from memory all the words that you ve told Spell Check to Ignore this writing session e Change Dictionary Displays a
126. this button When prompted click Yes to remove the color No to cancel Edit Color Name Click this button to change the name of the currently selected revision color Edit How Color Displays This changes the way a particular draft color will appear on Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 291 16 6 16 6 1 screen Click on a color in the left window and then this button to change the look After the last color is used it should There are two drop down menus The first allows you to choose the method the script will loop once it has been through all the Revision colors e Don t Loop Colors lf you select this option and then try to increment the revision color beyond the last color it will tell you that it cannot The next three options are all used in combination with the First Loop Color Selection to the right of this option in this menu the color BLUE e Loop To DOUBLE If you select this option and then increment the revision color beyond the last color it will call this new color DOUBLE BLUE or whatever color is selected on the First Loop Color Selection and will then start through the list again adding the word DOUBLE before each color in turn then TRIPLE etc e Loop To SECOND This will function exactly the same as Loop to DOUBLE but will use the words SECOND THIRD FOURTH etc e Loop To 2ND This will function exactly the same as Loop to DOUBLE but will use the words 2ND 3RD 4TH etc
127. to save your default settings or Cancel to exit and discard changes Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 193 13 2 Document Layout Document Layout gives you control over how your document text displays onscreen and prints on the page Changing margins and line spacing can increase or decrease the white space on your pages shortening or lengthening your document s page count This practice is commonly known as cheating Cheating your text by an amount that drastically changes the look of the page is not recommended It will be obvious to experienced readers that your document doesn t conform to the standard format they expect which times out to 1 minute of screen time per page For screenplays that times out to one 1 minute of screen time per page Choices you make here apply to the currently open document You can also set them as the default for new documents Under the Format menu select Document Layout The Setup Document Layout screen displays Document Layout 1 All Margin Values are in units of inches Line Lok E P z z Spacing values are in percentage points ET Wii i R Cat ARS SE in tal pony m1 AS HT mi Fir wb dar Mr a m hLaig mm hmy ok hilu yey ped ale a El e d der Top Margin i 03 ma unmopur c Er E 14 Su Bottom Margin 0 8 Binding Adjustment To Text Line Spacing 10 Blank Line Spacing Gk 1 A cir tue dona melee m Pad M Windows
128. used to break up a master scene by emphasizing something specific showing the passing of time or indicating another location within the main scene Formatting e Flush with the left margin 1 5 e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page and staggered 70 Movie Magic Screenwriter e ALL CAPS e One blank line double spaced above each new Shot e Never at the bottom of a page EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner is full to capacity The UNSHAVEN MAN sits at the counter Staring at the gold amulet in front of him steaming coffee untouched WAITRESS Anything else Sir can I get you anything else UNSHAVEN MAN palming the amulet NO PLE The Unshaven Man sits Coffee no longer steaming still untouched Transition Transition This element describes the shift between one scene and the next Since it is implied that one scene cuts to the next these are generally avoided unless absolutely necessary to convey clarity or emphasis to the reader Formatting e Flush right e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page e ALL CAPS e One blank line double spaced above EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner is full to capacity The UNSHAVEN MAN sits at the counter Staring at the gold amulet in front of him steaming coffee untouched Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help T1 WAITRESS Anything
129. what you want 96 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 10 5 6 10 6 6 10 7 6 11 Opening a Document automatically at Startup Screenwriter can be preset to automatically do one of four things each time it starts up by clicking on one of the following radio buttons in the Files tab under Screenwriter gt Preferences menu e Create a new document Opens a new file with the default Screenplay format e Display the File Open dialog Displays a standard Open File menu set to your default documents subdirectory e Restore the last document Opens in the last document you saved in your previous Screenwriter session e Restore the last workspace Opens all documents you had open at the time you Exited your previous Screenwriter session Opening a Timed Backup Screenwriter makes an emergency backup of the currently displayed document at timed intervals This is in addition to the automatic BK backup file created when you save a document and is saved separately To open a Timed Backup file 1 Under the File menu select Open 2 Change the File Type from Screenwriter documents to Timed Backup 3 Select from the list of available TMB files 4 Click on OK to open the file To keep a copy of the TMB version save it under a different name for example if the filename is SAVE2 TMB save it as lt FILENAME gt SCW Options for Loading Element Styles Options for Loading Element Styles When loading el
130. width of its elements Adjustable in increments of 1 10 of an inch from 0 5 to 5 0 inches Text Line Spacing Sets the amount of white space between consecutive lines of text in the same paragraph Entering a value of less than 100 for example 95 can fit 2 or 3 extra lines of text on each page and make your document perhaps 2 or 3 pages shorter Adjustable in single percentage points from 8596 to 115 Blank Line Spacing Sets the size of the blank line spacing that Screenwriter places between elements This can be set slightly lower than Text Line Spacing and still look acceptable Below 90 it becomes noticeable to the reader Adjustable in single percentage points from 85 to 115 Macintosh Compatibility Mode Used for moving a document back and forth between Movie Magic Screenwriter for PC and Movie Magic Screenwriter for Macintosh This feature ensures that you cannot use cheating functions that are not compatible across the two platforms Approximate of Lines on Page As you make changes to the Margins and Line Spacing items above this number recalculates the number of lines that can fit on your page It assumes you re using Courier 12 point font and will be inaccurate if you mix fonts or sizes Current Total Page Count As you make changes to the Margins and Line Spacing items above this number recalculates the number of pages in your document It assumes you re using Courier 12 point font and will be inaccurate if
131. window ready to be printed Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts lf checked prints dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially 200 Movie Magic Screenwriter Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only lf checked prints dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially but only Revised dialogue speeches which have Asterisks in their right margin Select Names Click on one or more Character Names in this window to print their dialogue Click on a name again to de select it Select All Click on this button to select all Character Names in your document Clear Selected Click on this button to de select all Character Names you have selected Click on OK to save your Dialogue selection and return to the Print menu or Cancel to discard your selection e Character List lf selected prints an alphabetical list of all Character Names in the document e Scene List lf selected prints a list of numbered scene headings in script order e Production Breakdowns f selected displays the Production Breakdown Print menu when you click on the OK button See the Production Breakdown Print menu section below e Notes lIf selected prints all Notes with the page numbers they appear on When you click on the OK button a Notes Print menu displays Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Prints a separate Notes report of all notes listed in se
132. window that the insertion caret the blinking editing marker can go before forcing the text to be scrolled vertically The higher the number the more lines of text is visible above the insertion caret f Tab in Dialogue goes to a Parenthetical ri Drag and Drop should break Elements in Middle Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical lf checked QuickType creates a new 234 Movie Magic Screenwriter Parenthetical element when you press TAB in a Dialogue element To go to a Character Name element instead press TAB again Unchecked pressing TAB creates a new Character Name element Drag and Drop should break elements in the Middle lf checked dragging and dropping items into the middle of text splits the text element and inserts the dropped material with it s original element designation Unchecked it inserts the item after the current element 19 4 Startup Files Options Tools gt Options gt Startup Files i Dr Fe F Text Entry Editing F QuickType _ Startup Files Smartcheck W Spelling Miscellaneou Document Settings Default Document Folder C Documents and Settingsichris_huntleyi My Documents Screenwriter Documents Backup Folder Cu Program Filesiwrite Brothers Inci Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 Restore the Main Window s Size Timed Backup Frequency 4 Minutes F Password Protect Documents When opening a document start at last saved position Re register File Type Associations When S
133. you check for that session until you Exit Screenwriter or Clear the Ignore List e Suggest lf none of the suggested spellings for your unknown word are correct type a different spelling in the Word box and Click the Suggest button to have it checked e Add Words to This field allows you to change the User Dictionary The standard generic dictionary is USERDICT LXA All Learned and Auto Corrected words will be added to the dictionary that is displayed in this field Note If the spell check is set to use a language other than American English then the default User Dictionary will be changed appropriately e Setup Options Click this button to go to the Spelling options window where you can setup how the Spell Check functions e Select Language Click this button to select among the available language dictionaries Auto Correct Typos As you are writing Spell Check can correct the most commonly made typos for you For example teh is corrected to the wnat becomes want etc This saves you the time of going back and manually correcting typos and makes any Spell Check you run go faster NOTE The options below only pertain to Auto Correction For descriptions of all the Spelling options See Spelling Options To turn Auto Correct on 1 Under the Screenwriter menu select Preferences 2 Click the Spelling button 3 Check the Spell Check as you Type amp Edit box this must be enabled for Auto Correct
134. you mix fonts or sizes Stretch Short Pages to Fill Screenwriter s rules for page breaking as set on the Page Break screen of Format Element Styles can result in pages with more white space at the bottom known as short pages Check this box to have Screenwriter stretch the text on short pages to make them look more like regular pages e Short by a min of lines Enter the minimum number of lines a page must be short before it will be stretched Accepts values between 1 and 10 with a default of 3 e Stretch by a max of lines Enter the maximum number of lines to stretch a page by Accepts values between 1 and 10 with a default of 3 Save as Defaults for New Documents If checked all new documents will have these Document Layout settings as the default Document Font Size You can adjust the size of the printed text from 8596 to 115 The initial size of text is chosen in the Format Element Styles window Changing the size will effect how many lines fit on the page Header and Footer To print the same text across the top of each page such as Page Numbers Dates Act Scene Text use Header lines 1 and 2 To print the same text across the bottom of each page use the Footer line Under the Format menu select Header and Footer The Header and Footer screen displays Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 195 Header and Footer Header 1 Header 2 Footer Codes Po Act B
135. your Index Cards vertically reading by column from top to bottom click the Vertical button on the Toolbar Add an Index Card Add A new blank Index Card can be added by clicking on the Add button on the Bottom Status Bar e n Shuffle Mode a New card is Inserted before the index card displayed at the upper left corner of the screen e n Outline Mode a New card is inserted before the currently selected index card or the card containing the cursor Write an Index Card To write and edit the Index Cards you need to be in Outline Mode If it s not already selected select it by clicking on the Outline button at the bottom right of the Toolbar Using the mouse click on an Index Card Click on the top right box of the card to enter Scene Heading information Type INT or EXT the Location and the Time of Day You don t have to enter the full Scene Heading text You can enter any text you find useful in outlining your story such as The big showdown scene e To enter text in the main body of the card click in the card body and type Movie Magic Screenwriter e To be recognized as elements in your document text needs to be entered in Index Card mode obeying the following guidelines e To move to another Index Card press TAB Script Element Return in Index Card as Action Normal paragraph with one blank line before and after it Character Name Formatted as ALL CAPS and followed by a colon
136. your Notes Creating and Deleting Note Categories Creating Note Categories Screenwriter allows you to create custom note categories to which you can assign any meaning or color You can have up to 26 categories Default 25 Custom total 1 Click on File gt Open and open the Sample Screenplay file located in the Samples Files folder 2 Open the Notes panel CTRL 3 Alternatively you can click on NaviDoc gt Notes The default note category is always created with every document 60 Movie Magic Screenwriter 3 To add a new category click on the Default Note Category pop up menu and choose New Category Color Color Category 2 is added with a new color and is in edit mode so you can change the name 4 Type in Theme for the name of the new category and press RETURN to confirm C1 Let s add another category This time click on the Add button Color Category 3 is added with a new color Type in Plot for the name of the new category and press RETURN to confirm Add another category Click on the Add button Type in Sub plof for the name of the category and press RETURN to confirm c 0 N O Add one final category called Character Click on the Add button Deleting Note Categories Deleting a note category is very easy 1 Select the Character category created on the last step above 2 Click on the Delete button 3 Confirm
137. 1 On the keyboard press Option n 2 Then hit n to tell the program which letter to put the accent over To put in a French c 1 Hit Option c For other accents make sure to consult KeyCaps or the Keyboard Viewer Spell Check Screenwriter s built in Spell Check system allows you to check the spelling of your document by e Word e Element e Page e Forwards from the cursor position e Entire document Spell Check can also e Auto Correct common Typos as you write e AutoCapitalize Sentences e AutoCapitalize the Names of Characters e Correct Double Capitals e Spell Check in Foreign Languages e Create User Dictionaries for each document You can customize Spell Check options to suit the way you work Under the Screenwriter menu select Preferences then click on the Spelling tab Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 153 11 10 1 Start Spell Check Spell Check begins checking relative to the cursor position so it is not necessary to select the text in order to check it 1 Position the cursor in the word or Element you d like to check or directly before the word to check 2 Under the Tools Spell Check menu select the checking method to use e Word Spell checks the Word where the cursor is currently located e Element Spell checks the Element where the cursor is currently located e Page Spell checks the current Page where the cursor is located e Forwards Spell checks from the current
138. 6 gt This number will not print unless you select Dialogue on the Print menu and check Dialogue Numbered Laid Out for Animation Recording Scripts above It is displayed for reference to show what s going to print in case you want to override a Dialogue Number Multi Locking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be Multi Locked numbering new speeches as AA Numbers e g 6AA To Multi Lock Dialogue Numbering repeat the method above for Locking the Numbering Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Lock Dialogue Numbering Unlocking Dialogue Numbering Dialogue Numbering can be Unlocked at any point going from AA Numbering to A Numbering or from A Numbering to non locked numbering Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Unlock Dialogue Numbering Overriding Dialogue Numbering Once Dialogue Numbering has been Locked or Multi Locked a single speech s numbering can be manually overridden Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 305 16 12 e Put the cursor anywhere in the Dialogue speech whose numbering you want to adjust e Under the Production menu select Animation Locking then Adjust Dialogue Numbering The Locked Dialogue Numbering screen displays Choose an option e Set this Dialogue s numbering to Normal Changes the current A or AA numbered Dialogue to Normally numbered Dialogue e Set this Dialogue s numbering to A Numbering Changes the current
139. 7 Act Break Act Break This signifies the beginning of an Act Teaser or Tag in an episode Formatting e Centered on the page e ALL CAPS can be underlined depending on the show e Number usually spelled out e g ACT ONE e Should be the first item at the top of the page after forced page break e Never at the bottom of a page Scene Label Scene Label Signifies the beginning of a scene Formatting e Centered on the page e Lettered not numbered letter is in ALL CAPS can include the word SCENE or Scene e g SCENE B or Scene B e Can be underlined depending on the show e Should be the first item at the top of the page after an Act Scene Break forced page break e Never at the bottom of a page e Single blank line above double spaced Scene Heading Scene Heading also called a slugline This signifies the beginning of a new scene and tells the reader where and when it takes place Formatting e Flush with the left margin 1 5 e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page and staggered e ALL CAPS usually underlined e One blank line double spaced above e Never at the bottom of a page There are three components of a standard Scene Heading the Start of Scene Location and the Time of Day 78 Movie Magic Screenwriter Action e Start of Scene A typical Scene Heading begins with INT interior or EXT exterior e Lo
140. ANGLE ON etc Add an Action element Display a List Menu of existing Character Names Add a Character Name element Character Name element Display a List Menu of 232 Movie Magic Screenwriter Character Extensions V O O S etc Dialogue element Add a Parenthetical element CTRL T Any element Add a Transition element CTRL T Blank Transition element Display a List Menu of Transitions CUT TO etc CTRL F 1 Any element Add a Note If Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Editing page of Options under the Tools menu Tab creates a Parenthetical element when in a Dialogue element Use SmartTab If checked this option allows the quick entry of recently used Character Names using the TAB key Press TAB followed by a letter and the last Character Name you used starting with that letter is highlighted in the pop up Character Name pop up list Press ENTER to enter the name in your document For example you have characters named MICHELLE LARRY LISA and LAURA in your document and the current scene features LAURA and MICHELLE When you press TAB then L the first time in this scene the drop down list might have the name LARRY highlighted Type A then U to highlight LAURA then press ENTER to have SmartTab finish entering the name for you Without SmartTab enabled you will have to do that each time you want LAURA With SmartTab enabled the next time you press
141. Add Hard Return e Or press SHIFT RETURN Dual Column Simultaneous Dialogue There may be occasions when you want two characters Dialogue to appear side by side in the script For example when two characters are speaking at the same time with their dialogue overlapping NOTE While Screenwriter can print Dual Column Dialogue lined up correctly it displays it onscreen sequentially The left column paragraph displays then the right column paragraph and so on Example Writing in dual column mode in Screenwriter looks like this on screen GEORGE outraged What do you mean it s gonna snow again Look at the headlines ERHIE I know I know I know I think it s marvelous Dut prints in the document like this GEORGE EPHIE ACE aged I know I know I What do you mean it s know I think it s gonna snow again Look at marvelous the headlines Dual Columns Menu Format gt Dual Columns From the Format menu select the Dual Columns menu and you ll see four choices Left Column eL Right Column R Normal Full Width F Set Column Margins e Left Column Formats the selected element s as the left column of the dual column Hitting RETURN ends the left column formatting e Right Column Formats the selected element s as the right column of the dual column Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 133 10 25 2 10 25 3 Hitting RETURN ends the right column formatting
142. Alt keys for Character Name Entry box unchecked in the Program Options 3 the optional Top Toolbar has several Push buttons that allow quick access to frequently used program functions for editing and file management the Current Element Window with Change Element drop down menu and the Right Left Scroll Bar The Top Toolbar when visible is located just under the Main Menu Bar 3 has an Up Down Scroll bar and Push buttons for Page Up Down and optionally has Element Buttons for element entry with the mouse The Right Toolbar is displayed at the right side of your screen The Status Bar es contains a Hint Line the current Line and Position of your cursor and the current Page Number followed by the Total Number of Pages Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 17 4 New Features in Screenwriter 6 0 The NaviDoc 160 The NaviDoc technology lets you navigate through your document effortlessly and has four panels e The Notes Panel 164 The Notes panel lets you create and sort color coded notes amp note categories e The Bookmarks Panel 170 The Bookmarks panel lets you set bookmarks to jump to any place in your document e The Scenes Panel 173 The Scenes panel lets you navigate and sort your scenes at the click of a button e The Outline Panel 176 The Outline panel lets you add remove and rearrange outline elements e Outlining Features ss Integrated outlining lets yo
143. CE DAY George opens the door for I 18 INT OUTER OFFICE DAY LJ INT OUTER OFFICE DAY 19 INT DS CLOSE SHOT As George and 20 INT OUTER OFFICE DAY Dx they are being watched by C 21EXT MAIN S STREET BEDFORD FA FALLS Ro examiner who is If the NaviDoc is closed the Spies will be adang the left side of the window INT OUTER OFFICE DAY CLOSE SHOT As George and Violet come through the door the bank examiner uio is still waiting to qo to work on t e Dragging the splitter to the left past the minimum width will close the NaviDoc e Dragging the splitter to the right will open the NaviDoc or expand its width if it is already Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 47 5 2 2 open Menus You can open and close the NaviDoc via the menus by clicking on View NaviDoc Keyboard You can open close the NaviDoc by pressing CTRL 40 on the keyboard To open a specific panel use one of the key commands below Outline Panel CTRL 1 scenes Panel CTRL 2 Notes Panel CTRL 3 Bookmarks Panel CTRL 4 Common Controls There are certain controls that are common to two or more panels Preferences cH This control appears on the Outline Scenes and Notes panels Clicking this will open the preferences for the NaviDoc NOTE when in the Outline panel this button opens the Outline preferences specifically Sync EV on This control appears on all four panels Outline Scenes Notes
144. DELETE key to correct mistakes 1 Add Fade In e Before typing anything press RETURN e To start your script with FADE IN click on the Yes button or press RETURN ig Put In FADE IN The cursor drops down to a new blank line of Action FADE IH 2 Add Scene Heading Screenwriter knows you need a Scene Heading next and pops up a list of available options to start the Scene Heading 32 Movie Magic Screenwriter FADE IN Make this an Qutline Element No Initial Text End of Act Start Mew Act Make this a Shot Make this a Transition Mevermind Shortcut keys are shown as the underlined letter on the list e Type the letter INT is entered for you correctly formatted in UPPER CASE with the proper spacing FADE IN INT 3 Add Location Next you need to type in a location e Type rick s room Notice that Screenwriter automatically uppercases the text even if you write it in lower case FADE IN INT RICK S ROOM 4 Add Time of Day e Press RETURN ocene Headings normally end with the time of day so Screenwriter pops up a list of available Times of Day Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 33 CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER Never Mind e Type the letter d One dash with proper spacing and the word DAY are entered for you With the Scene Heading complete the cursor drops down to a new blank line of Action FADE IN INT RICK S ROOM
145. Enable QuickType Entry Y Auto Pop Up Locations Ww Auto Pop Up Time of Day Y Auto Pop Up List of Character Names Enable Quick Entry 230 When checked QuickType is enabled QuickType lets you speed text entry by using many different keyboard shortcuts 230 Unchecked QuickType is disabled e Auto Pop Up Locations lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Unique Locations List after you enter Scene Heading Initial Text e g INT Unchecked you need to press RETURN to display the list e Auto Pop Up Time of Day lf checked QuickType automatically pops up the Time of Day List after you enter Location text e g LAURA S APARTMENT from a pop up Locations List Unchecked you need to press RETURN to display the list e Auto Pop Up List of Character Names lf checked pops up a List of all Character Names in the document when pressing RETURN is the first activity in a Character Name element Enable QuickType Entry Enable QuickType Text Entry If checked this allows the automatic display of pop up lists of Character Names Locations Times of Day etc If you Type QuickType will FADE IN Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu or any Transition INT EXT etc If you Press RETURN QuickType will while in Display Scene Heading Initial Text menu INT EXT etc Scene Heading Display a List Menu of all unique Locations without Location already in the document Scene Heading Display
146. HIFT and SHIFT OPTION only modifiers The Voice Commands only work if you have the Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter option checked in the Misc Preferences 247 tab and require proper setup of voice recognition software to work s Press OK to save your edits Press Cancel to exit without saving your keyboard shortcut edits Animation Dialog Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Anim Dialog Select the Anim Dialog preferences to setup the layout of your Animation Recording Scripts Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 255 These options change the way the a Recording Script prints without affecting the document Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard pa pd MaviDoc Outline Ja Animation Dialogue Printing Character Name Position fe Above Dialogue Print Around Numbering _ Ta Left of Dialogue Dialogue Capitalization z Substitute Font Use Capitalization in 5cript less 15tone Serif C Use Double Spacing Always Capitalize Dialoque _Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches E Print Script Notes fe Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before Only Notes Before Selected Dialogue Print Notes Directly Above Speeches _ Print Boxes Around Notes OIG A biel ABATE ha A Cancel 15 12 1 Speech Number Speech Numbering On Right Margin of Page On Le
147. Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help for Mac OS X Version Y by Write Brothers Inc es J VN ab 3 UM Min ESL a y W my S Tm A 2 Movie Magic Screenwriter Table of Contents Foreword Part Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help A c N BASIC OU ME TO Minute Tunas Opemihe Progr Misas das HOWEVER a e dd q A AOS idas be SAA LOCATON ERR NET NEN AV AOE THONG Ol Days iat nis ras tebe olt nb Ent ua bue ne cd IDO First One O NACION uo codage ote easet ctu em etas i dictu dove bets C 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 A gt gt gt o o o or or gt gt gt 7 A AZ AZ AZ lt gt Welcome to Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Copyright amp Trademark Notice cccccssssseeeeesscssssseeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeenees Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 esee New Features in Screenwriter 6 0 eee eec eceeeeeeeeuu New Screenwriter 6 0 Icons Mac OSX eeec cec eeeeeeeee cerne eene nennt Screenwriter 6 0 Menu Changes eee e Leeeeeeeee eene eee nenne nana nana naa a annu nene New File Format MMQSW iii Opening Existing Documenis iion oce erts occ c isnt denn nnb rra n ce AEE Saving Doc
148. NG is not put into the document NIGHT LATER CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER Transitions CUT TO DISSOLVE TO FADE OUT Act Scene Text NEWACT Alias for ACT SAMEACT Alias for ACT NEWSCENE Alias for SCENE Prologue Text TEASER PROLOGUE COLD OPENING End of Act Text END OF ACT 142 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 27 7 10 28 10 28 1 END OF SHOW FADE IN Text FADE IN Substitution Text Empty Reloading Default User Lists If after changing any of the User Lists you want to go back to the originally installed Defaults e Under the Format menu select Load User Lists from then Original Defaults Alias Text Alias Text allows you to type an abbreviation of text as few as two letters and have Screenwriter automatically expand it to the full text for you The expanded text is formatted with its correct element format For example you could enter I as the Alias for INT in the Initial Scene Text User List When you type I on a blank line followed by a space or appropriate punctuation Screenwriter expands it to INT for you and formats the element as Scene Heading Or add the name CAROL ANN to the Character Name User List assigning it an Alias of CA When you type ca followed by a space or appropriate punctuation it s expanded to Carol Ann for you Type CA and the same capital
149. Name si occa pern diode aos 158 UII aC ccr 158 12 The INAV UD OC raiser tices ter eters ces ttincedesectentn cca taec cias 160 Opening and Closing the PP 160 Contents 7 Resizing the Na viDoc Panel Ne e A iia 161 Navigation Pointer and the NaviDoc Panel oocccccccccccononoccconnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonononanannnnnnnnnr nr rrrnnnn nana e rre mnnn 161 NavibDoc Keyboard CAM MS ii 162 The NaviDOC Melia tdci 162 NDA wt 163 General NaviDOc Options c Rada 164 NOLES Panel ccc eA ra A OE EER EE EA EE EEN E 164 Notes EIST M 165 Notes COPITOLS Renee an ele ee tee dieu Pa ore en ie NN rT ee P IM MID IM CI MEE 166 Notes Command BUbOLS s tte ties area ioca at e E 166 Notes Categor CONTOS RE 166 Note Category Drop Down List Control ccocoococnononcconononononcnonononnnnonncnnnnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnonrnnananennos 167 Show Hide Category View in NaviDOC ccoooooconnccnoncnnnnnoncononoonnnnnnncnncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnananerinnnanenoos 168 Show Hide Note Categories in DOCUMENL cccccccccececssnseseeeseeeeeeeeceeeseseaeaueessseeeeeeeeeeeeeesessaaeaaasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 168 Pint NOLES o AAA O 169 Notes Opine CONTO m ai 169 Notes Panel OPUS A A A E enoends eabemecsonutenes 169 vy aede pie E10 mn di 170 Note DISPO TOS fact P A A AA AAA AA A A 170 BOOKMATKS Panl necia A A A A A da d
150. Note Element Inserts a note in the document at the location of the cursor in the document and displays the note in the note list of the Notes Panel The popup list determines the note style m Default Note A Note Category 1 Y Note Category 2 The keyboard command for adding a new note is CTRL N Notes Category Controls Note Category 1 ua Note Category 2 ER 1 These controls add and remove note categories as well as determine the note category names text color and background color The top part of the notes category control lists the available note categories The note category commands appear at the bottom of the control Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 167 12 8 5 e Note Category Name and Color Each category name appears on the left with the text color and background color to the right Double click the name of the note category to edit the category name Single click on the text and background color controls to change their colors e Note Category Commands o The Add Category command inserts a new note category at the end of the list of note categories The new category begins with the style settings of the default category and becomes the new default note category style o The Delete Category command permanently removes the selected note category This command is only available when a note category is selected Note Color Clicking this button displays a Color palette Choose a color to display
151. OM CONTINUOUS 13 Add Action e Type the next paragraph of Action JACK 20s and anxious scans a book Style Sheets for Dummies Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 37 INT JACK S ROOM CONTINUOUS JACK 20s and anxious scans a book Style Sheets for Dummies 14 Add Character Name e Press TAB j Notice that JACK is automatically highlighted e Type the letter INT JACK S ROOM CONTINUOUS JACK 208 and anxious scans a book Style Sheets for Dummies F e Press RETURN The Character Name JACK is entered for you THT JACE S ROOM CONTINUOUS JACK 208 and anxious scans a book Style Sheets for Dummies JACK 15 Add Dialogue e Type Jack s dialogue Shoot My contest deadline is next week JACE Shoot My contest deadline is next week 16 Add Character Name e Press TAB 38 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Type the letter r to select the name RICK then type the left parenthesis character SHIFT 9 e Type the letter o RICK O S is entered for you JACKE Shoot My contest deadline is next week RICK Os Ba 17 Add Dialogue e Type Rick s dialogue My program formats all the margins and page breaks for me It can do scene numbering dialogue mores and continueds it even lets me do an outline RICE O 8 My program formats all the margins and page breaks tor me It can do scene numbering dialogue mores a
152. Options This tab controls on which pages the header and footer text and Act continued text appear e Page Numbers This option controls which page numbers appear in the Set Lists e None lIf selected No page numbers are printed e Starting Page lf selected prints the Page Numbers that each Set is used on e Starting amp End lf selected prints the Page Numbers of the start and end of the set use no page numbers starting page number or starting and end page numbers e Prefix for Page Numbers This option controls text that appears in front of the page numbers e g Pg displays page six as Pg 6 e Text Between Each Act This is the text inserted after the end of one act and before the next act e Act Break The act break text has a check box for Bold and a check box for Underlining Checked is ON Unchecked is OFF e Scene Headings The scene heading text has a check box for Bold and a check box for Underlining Checked is ON Unchecked is OFF 336 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Final Text This is the text inserted at the end of the Set List report e Final Text formatting check boxes The final text has a check box for Bold and a check box for Underlining Checked is ON Unchecked is OFF e List Characters in Each Scene When checked the characters are listed with each scene within parentheses Example 10 INT BANK DAY Potter Teller Uncle Billy e In All Caps When checked the charact
153. Outline Styles Top Bottom Page Up Page Down Previous Row Next Row Decrease MaviDoc Font Size Increase MaviDoc Font Size NaviDoc Preferences Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 163 12 06 NaviDoc Options In the Screenwriter menu select Preferences Choose NaviDoc to bring up the options Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline Sync NaviDoc Row with Document Point to Paragraph when Navigating ___________ rm f fa Frame current row with this color BEBE Flash pointer 2 times Quickly P x r Use System Selection color for frame Disappear after flashing Medium fade RowHeight Variable less wasted space _ Fixed faster resizing on slow computers Scenes Panel Font Font Lucida Grande e 42 Text EN Fir Row Lines Gray Odd Row Text Bl oddgowril Even Row Text BE Even Row Fill Notes Panel Font Font Lucida Grande in 12 LANI Row Lines Thick Solid Bookmarks Panel Font Font Lucida Grande pes JJ Text EM Fill Row Lines Thin Solid Cancel s E The NaviDoc Options are divided into four areas e NaviDoc Options 164 These options control the general appearance of the NaviDoc See the General NaviDoc Options section below for details e Scenes Panel Options 175 These options control the general appearance of the
154. Requires you to insert pages one at a time Print without Prompting requires you to insert entire document Requires you to insert the entire document including a Title Page Screenwriter only prints on those pages that have a Note on the following page Select Which Color Notes to Print lf you have more than one color of Note in your script check the colored boxes for the notes you want to print To print Notes as part of the document this will affect the page breaks and document length 1 Click on Format Element Styles 2 Click the Notes button on the right side 3 Check the box labeled Print Notes in Document NOTE Display Notes in Document must be enabled to select this option 4 Click OK 5 Print the document as you would normally under File Print and any Notes will print where they are located in the document 10 15 5 Note Options Formatting options for Notes can be set on the Notes page of the Element Styles command 1 Under the Format menu select Element Styles 2 Click on the Script Notes button on the right hand side Display Notes in Document If checked displays Notes onscreen as you have set their hide show status individually Unchecked all Notes are collapsed to their hidden status Print Notes in Document lf checked Notes are treated as part of the document when printing changing the Page Breaks accordingly Unchecked they do not print or increase the script length Sele
155. Revision Mark Level e Unlock One Rev Mark Level Removes the last Locked Revision Marks and decreases the Revision Mark Level e Lock Dialogue Numbering Locks the Dialogue Numbering so that any new speeches are added as A Numbers If Dialogue is already Locked it will Multi Lock the numbering so new speeches are added as AA Numbers e Unlock Dialogue Numbering Decreases Dialogue Locking from AA Numbering to A Numbering or from A Numbering to Unlocked Dialogue Numbering e Adjust Dialogue Numbering Adjusts overrides the numbering of the Dialogue speech that the cursor is currently in Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 339 17 1 12 Window Menu Minimize Zoom Bring All to Front Cascade Tile Cycle F6 x Wonderful 6 mmsw 1 e Minimize All Minimizes shrinks to icons at the bottom of the window all open document windows e Zoom Expands the active document window to its largest standard size e Bring All to Front Brings all document windows in front of all other visible application windows e Cascade Cascades shrinks and overlays at an offset all open document windows e Tile Tiles shrinks and stacks all open document windows e Cycle Cycles through the open document windows e lt FileName gt Lists the Names of all open document windows with a checkmark by the currently displayed document Select one to make it the active open window 17 1 13 Help Menu Web Re
156. Save As 248 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 8 5 15 8 6 E This option controls what happens when the diskette button on the tool bar is pressed e Acts Like Save This saves the file as if you had chosen File gt Save e Acts Like Save As This brings up the Save As window and lets you save the file under a different name or location After a Search After a Search A fa Bring Document to the Front Leave Collapsed Search Window in Front After a Search e Bring Document to the Front This option brings the document to the front and sends the search window to the back e Leave Collapsed Search Window in Front This option leaves the focus in the search window but collapses it into a smaller and less obtrusive version di s CUT rnc Replace f Replace amp Find Replace All Pagination fe Paginate When l m Idle For 1 0 El seconds Pagination Sound None x F E s No Real time Pagination e Paginate When I m Idle For seconds Lets you specify how long Screenwriter should wait when there s a pause in your typing before automatically repaginating your document If your writing is interrupted by the automatic repaginating increase the pagination delay e No Real time Pagination This option turns off real time pagination e Pagination Sound This option controls the sound Screenwriter makes every time it runs the real time pagination The default for this op
157. Scene Label e Note e Shot e Title Centered 124 e Transition Inserting Elements You can insert Elements in a number of ways e Click on an element in the Current Element pop up menu Act Break Action Character Name Dialoque Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Label Note Shot Title Centered Transition Sequence Scene Beat Create Edit Outline Styles e Click on the element s icon on the Right Toolbar if displayed e Press a Command key shortcut for that element See the Appendix chapter entitled Key Assignments for details 116 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 2 e n certain formats certain text is automatically formatted in certain elements Examples are e int or ext on a blank line of Action will convert it to in a new Scene Heading e fade in on a blank line of Action will automatically capitalize it to FADE IN e any single word followed by to on a blank line of Action will convert it to a Transition and make it uppercase and flush right e newact will insert a Act Break element with the next consecutive numbering e sameact will insert a Act Break element with the current numbering e newscene will insert a Scene Label with the next consecutive numbering e Select the File Insert Element command or clicking on the Insert element button on the Top Toolbar e Click the Add Outline Element pop up menu on the Outline panel in the NaviDoc
158. Scenes Panel in the NaviDoc See the Scenes Panel Options section for details e Notes Panel Options 159 These options control the general appearance of the Notes Panel in the NaviDoc See the Notes Panel Options section for details e Bookmarks Panel Options 172 These options control the general appearance of the Bookmarks Panel in the NaviDoc See the Bookmarks Options section for details 164 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 7 General NaviDoc Options Y Sync NaviDac Row with Document Y Point to Paragraph when Navigating f Frame current row with this color i pr Flash pointer 2 times Quickly ES F E Use System Selection color for frame Disappear after flashing i Medium fade Row Height f Variable less wasted space _ Fixed faster resizing on slow computers e Sync NaviDoc Row with Document This option turns on the Sync Frame to highlight the item in the NaviDoc list corresponding to the current location of the cursor in the document o Frame current row with this color Sets the color of the Sync Frame o Use System Selection color for frame Sets the color of the Sync Frame to the system selection color Point to Paragraph when Navigating This option turns on the flashing pointer showing the location of the cursor in the document after navigating in the NaviDoc o Flash Pointer This option sets the number of times the pointer
159. Script Format Options Script Formats 103 Script Formats Menu Script Note 109 Script Order 202 204 205 292 Script Title 333 Scriptware Tagged Scroll by Row 108 scw 311 312 Search 314 Search amp Replace 175 180 125 138 174 287 19 318 265 282 146 314 339 202 292 259 138 352 356 314 374 Movie Magic Screenwriter Search Again or Search amp Replace Again 314 Search Backwards 15 7 158 Search for 158 Search for Help On 339 Second Character Name 241 Second Dialogue Paragraph 121 Secondary Sort 293 Secondary Sort by 203 Select a screen of text above 346 Select a screen of text above the current carets position 346 Select All 146 314 346 Select Group 346 Select Language 152 327 Select Names 198 Select Scene 346 Select Sentence 346 Select Special 146 314 Select text to the next Page break 346 Select to the Beginning of the Line 346 Select to the end of the Line 346 Select Voice 212 Select Which Color Notes to Print 126 Select Word 346 Selected Pages 198 Selected Scenes 198 Send As Email Attachment 219 Send as E Mail Attachment 19 Send As Email Attachment 311 312 Send Script 208 Sentence 146 Serial Number 305 set 1 4 Set Column Margins 132 134 Set current element to Full Width 342 Set current element to Left Column 342 Set Current Element to Right Column 342 Set Note Color 127 Set Revision Draft Color Order 290 329 Sets curren
160. Select File Print e Select what you wish to print e g Entire Document e Uncheck Run SmartCheck unless you do want to run it e Click OK and click Continue on the Exception error e Fill out all necessary fields and select to whom you wish to distribute the document Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 309 Watermark Printing Script Name Wonderful Draft Date 5 28 08 Description First distribution Requested By Chris Approved By Ellen E Chris Fred Charlie Mildred Print Copies for Print Signature Page Names Ser 5 9 All Names Add Name Setup C 3 Selected Names Cancel e Select any other desired options and click OK e n the Mac print window click OK Screenwriter prints out individual copies for each person in the distribution list personalized with a custom watermark unique to each copy of the document 310 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 Appendices e Menus 310 e Shortcut Key Assignments e Troubleshooting 347 e Importing Scripts 351 e Exporting Scripts 56 e Format Codes sss e Files Installed sse e Utility Programs 17 4 Menus File Edit View Format Goto Waviboc Tools Production Window Help The main menu bar has ten menu topics in it Click on the menu topic in the bulleted list below to see more about that topic e File Menu 312 e Edit Menu 3141 e View Menu ss e Format Menu 227 e Goto Menu 224 e NaviD
161. Select the Outline style in the list 2 Next to the name of the Outline style set how the Outline style displays in the NaviDoc and in the document e Print enabled or disabled controls whether the element will print when the document is printed e Frame type of line drawn around that outline element in the document None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid Groove e Text color e Background color 3 At the top of the window you can change the following formatting parameters for the selected Outline style e Left and Right margins in inches e Justified text e Line Spacing of lines before and within the Outline element e Style of text ALL CAPS Bold Italicized Underline e Font Setting up Outline structure The Outline style levels can be configured by dragging and dropping them into the appropriate place in the hierarchy or using the Up Down Left and Right buttons to move or promote demote them If Scene Headings are included in the outline the lowest level at which an element can be set is a child of a Scene Heading All outline styles that are children of Scene Headings are at the same level siblings Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 51 Creating an Outline 1 Create a new document by clicking File New using Default Template The default template already has common outline styles set up for you Act Sequence Scene and Beat 2 If itis not open already open the Outlin
162. Sitcom SITCOM FORMAT This tutorial gives an overview of an industry standard sitcom script including format conventions usage and step by step instructions e Industry Standards and Conventions 75 e The different Elements of a Sitcom 7s e Sitcom Format Step by Step Basics ss Industry standards and conventions The following guidelines are for a generic sitcom script The first thing to remember is EVERY SHOW HAS ITS OWN SPECIFIC FORMAT That means industry standards vary from show to show studio to studio The margins and settings in this tutorial are overall guidelines for a sitcom If you want to write a spec sitcom script in the format of a particular show it is advised to load the TV Template for that show see Loading a Template 1 or obtain a copy of that show s script and adjust the format accordingly NOTE many script available are SHOOTING scripts that were used in the production process so compensate accordingly for a spec script no Scene Heading numbers or continueds etc The sitcom format is arranged differently than that of a screenplay The one minute per page rule does not apply because dialogue is double spaced The average length of a sitcom script is about 40 50 pages It usually consists of a Teaser Cold Opening Prologue three Acts and sometimes a Tag or Epilogue 74 Movie Magic Screenwriter To configure the formatting to your personal writing style see Cus
163. T The Unshaven Man leans against his beat up Chevy Nova Deep in thought caressing the amulet in his fingers UNSHAVEN MAN V O If they only knew that this amulet WAITRESS O S Sir you forgot your wallet Ihe Unshaven Man jumps to his feet pockets the amulet in his Jacket CONT D Continueds are used to show that the same character is speaking again usually when two speeches are separated by Action They are perfectly acceptable to use but some writers prefer a cleaner page and turn them off NOTE These continueds should not be confused with scene continueds that can appear at the top bottom of every page when a scene is continuing Scene continueds should not be used in a spec script but rather are used in shooting scripts in production EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner is full to capacity The Unshaven Man sits at the counter Staring at the gold amulet in front of him steaming coffee untouched WAITRESS Anything else She leans in to try and look him in the eyes WAITRESS CONT D Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 73 5 3 2 Sir can I get you anything else MORE CONT D A MORE is placed at the bottom of a page when dialogue continues across a page break They are perfectly acceptable to use but some writers prefer a cleaner page and turn them off EXAMPLE WAITRESS Anything else MORE dE WAITRESS CONT D Sir can I get you anything else
164. TAGE 0 0 EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET George is walking along the When a Note is hidden the triangle points to the right P EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET George is walking along the It is a raw gusty day and the breeze Draped around C Single click on the triangle to change the Note s display status e Single clicking on Hides the note e Single clicking on Shows the note See also Show Hide Categories in NaviDoc s or Show Hide Note Categories 6 in Document Print a Note You can print Notes e As a sequential report e On the reverse sides of the script pages they re facing on a already printed document so the notes are opposite the pages they reference e As part of the document itself To print Notes as a report or on the reverse sides of the pages 1 Under the File Menu select Print 2 A Print menu displays Check the Notes radio button 3 Click OK A Notes Print window displays Print Notes Sequentially with Reference Page Numbers Prints a separate Notes report of all notes listed in sequence with the page numbers they refer to Print Notes on facing pages of script already printed script Prints each Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 127 Note opposite the page it refers to on the back of the previous page Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed Only asks you to insert the page preceding a Note so it can print the note for the following page
165. The second drop down menu allows you to select which color the program should start with when it loops to a DOUBLE or SECOND 2ND color You have the choice between the first and second colors on the Revision Color List Display Page Colors On Screen lf checked displays the Revision Colors in a Sample Text Box to the right of the Colors window Unchecked clicking on a color s Name does not show its corresponding color In 256 color mode on your monitor only 16 colors are available for Revision Draft Colors These may not be enough for a list with extensive Revision Colors Setting your monitor to display in more than 256 colors is recommended if possible Set as Defaults for All New Documents lf checked uses the Revision Draft Colors you set here to be the default colors in all New documents Help Displays this page in the Help file Production Breakdowns Screenwriter can automatically generate and print or export a variety of Production Breakdown sheets To access these reports Print Standard Breakdowns e Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Print Standard Breakdowns The Production Breakdowns print window displays 292 Movie Magic Screenwriter Production Breakdowns Sort Breakdown Primarily by Script Order Interior vs Exterior PT E Location pg _ Time of Day E o C3 Characters All _ Some Movie Magic Scheduling File ane e Script Breakdown Sheets
166. Tutorials Screenwriter 6 has several tutorial designed to get you acquainted with important features of the software Basic Overview Tutorials e Opening the Program so e How to Write 31 e Exporting to PDE s NaviDoc Tutorials e Opening and Closing the NaviDoc ws e Common Controls 47 e Using the Outline Panel s e Using the Scenes Panel se e Using the Notes Panel ss e Using the Bookmarks Panel e2 Template Tutorials 1 Screenplay Templates 64 2 Sitcom Templates 7s In addition to the tutorials in this document more may be found at the Write Brothers technical support website support screenplay com Basic Overview The Basic Overview tutorials include e 10 Minute Tutorial 2 e Opening the Program so e How to Write 31 e Exporting to PDF 4 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 29 5 1 1 10 Minute Tutorial Movie Magic Screenwriter for Macintosh TEN MINUTE TUTORIAL This tutorial gives you the basics necessary to start writing a professionally formatted script within minutes of opening the box Movie Magic Screenwriter also has many other features and is fully customizable to the way you prefer to work 30 Movie Magic Screenwriter FADE IN INT RICK S ROOM DAY RICK 30 and laid b ack reads Variety while installing his new Screenwriter program JACK 0 5 How can I get this word processor to break my script pages co
167. Uncle eru id i NEEDS DIALOG WORK Has Uncle Billy come in yet COUSIN TILLY No he stopped at the bank first GEORGE on phone He s not here right now Harry game of the man waiting in the chair This is Carter the bank examiner come for his annual audit of the books of the Manos ana Loan i E X cnet morem PS ET n E rm E INE ee ee miae ili A A o A A eii AAA PP Dialogue DNA Line 22 wir 7 5 Bookmarks Panel Sync Frame When you select a bookmark in the NaviDoc the document is scrolled to the bookmark in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the bookmark in the NaviDoc displays ONLY when the selection is within the paragraph the bookmark points to in the document NEEDS DIALOG WORK The sync frame disappears if you move the text cursor out of the paragraph in the document pointed to by the bookmark BIG SCENE Cousin Eustace ENTRANCE NEEDS DIALOG WORK Bookmarks List BIG SCENE Cousin Eustace ENTRANCE NEEDS DIALOG WOR The Bookmarks list shows a list of bookmarks you have added to your document Clicking on a bookmark moves you to that point in your document Double click on a bookmark in the list to edit its description 172 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 9 2 12 9 3 Bookmarks Controls Outline Scenes Notes Add Bookmark 4 f Edit y f Remove y 13 There are several controls in the NaviDoc Bookmarks Panel
168. Workspace Opens all documents you had open at the time you Exited your previous Screenwriter session e Automatically check for updates When checked Screenwriter automatically checks for updates daily weekly or monthly Default Document Folder Default Document Folder Users Chris Dacuments Movie Magic Screenwriter Beta Set This option allows you to change the folder that Screenwriter uses as the default for opening saving documents default folder is My Documents Screenwriter Documents When you click on the Set button you ll get a standard OS X navigation dialog e Change the default folder to a different pre existing directory by clicking on items in the directory tree e Create a new folder by pressing the New Folder button e Click on Choose to set your default folder Cancel to keep the existing default 238 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 5 3 Retain Previous Versions v Retain previous versions of documents BK files ry E E Previous versions of a document T Retain upto 5 fe A subfolder named Previous Versions F4 The same folder as the document Create a new previous version file Only once per editing session fe Every time a document is saved When checked these options control where previous versions of your document are automatically stored when you use the File Save command in Screenwriter This option retains versions of the file
169. a 254 Animation Dialog Preferentes A ias 254 Speech NUMBER arrsa 0 5 222 9005098 based A s eO Esta ecu escas a d PEERS ERR ots eect 255 Character ame POSON o desee cuna mers Pes od e oo ceb A E 255 Dialogue S pac eei RN ETE 256 DialO Ques Sata ZAM ON e PPP 256 Blank Lines Before Printed SpCOCHES ccccccccccccecececececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenesenenenenenenenegs 256 PIG SS OMIOU ING LOS AA OA E tens vanes esd atiangvexieVeteatansatoedeuuates E st ie Seaiaten tees easton 257 Misc Animation Dialog PreferenCes cccccssssscccecccseseseeeeecesneeseeeeeseaeaueeceeseseaueeeeesesseaaseeeeeseasaseeeesessnasseeeees 257 NaviDoc Predecesor cados 258 Outline Pr ferenc8S iii A A A ARA A da 259 ledere res 259 Element SUVS unico eai rti to monet bee se taa Uo sert disais edat aea iu deme esti casia lbs lleida idas 260 Options common to all script elements eeeeeiiisessesesseseeeeeeee eene enne enne nennen nono nana na enne nnns 261 Character NAMES ei iS de aii tue oui hood odo aio epe t arat bea a ato ab acts Sead tuc ai ERO did Y Lal 263 De Pm 264 xii c n 264 Scene Headings EN DA DU RO O O A E 265 SHOIS rio dae sae es 266 A a a ao a A 266 TEANSMIONS atera ida 266 hinmz A cm 267 Scene Labels idas 268 NOS e to 269 eio 269 m las Cc
170. abel or Act Break e Put the cursor anywhere in that element e Under the Production menu select Override then Element s Numbering Override Scene Heading Number How Should Number this Scene ES No Numbering Shot Multi Locked A7 fe Locked Numbering 8 Flipped Multi Locked A7 oo i A Numbering 7A y Flipped A Numbering A7 J User Defined 9 EXT STREET DAY A window displays showing your options for renumbering that element Check the radio button of the numbering you d like the scene to have e No Numbering lf checked converts a Scene Heading to a Shot element Scene numbers are removed e Locked lf checked converts a Scene Heading to normal numbering without any A numbering scheme e A Numbering lf checked converts a Scene Heading to A Scene numbering e Flipped A Numbering lf checked converts a Scene Heading to A Scene numbering with the number and A letter reversed e Multi Locked lf checked converts a Scene Heading to a Multi Locked Scene Heading taking its numbering scheme from the scenes before and after it e Flipped Multi Locked lf checked converts a Scene Heading to a Multi Locked Scene Heading taking its numbering scheme from the scenes before and after it but with the number and A letter reversed e User Def
171. able to get a Watermark to print you most likely have the problem The screenwriter program is set to substitute Courier Old in printing because it looks better and has more stroke weight Courier new is used to display onscreen The problem is occurring because the program cannot access Courier old and is substituting something else instead To correct this go to FILE PROGRAM OPTIONS PRINTERS and under substitute font choose Courier New Common Technical Support Questions and Answers Q accidentally learned a wrong word while spell checking how do delete this word from a supplemental dictionary A Go to DOS Command Prompt and switch to Screenwriter for Windows subdirectory type STUTIL to start the editor select the dictionary you want to edit find the word and delete it Q Screenwriter for Windows takes forever to print how do speed it up A Pull down file menu in Screenwriter for Windows select Tools Options click on Printer tab and Substitute for Courier Old font for printing If this doesn t work then try turning off the print manager in the Main Control Panel if this still doesn t work then try a different print driver like HPII for HP4 Q have a laptop computer with a touch pad have noticed that my cursor jumps from one place to another by itself why does this happen A Most likely you accidentally tap on your touch pad which causes the cursor to jump Q decided to change a name of one of the ch
172. ada 170 BOOKINALKS Sd E 171 Bookmarks CORTOS dd li 172 Bookrnarks Pariel Quo ns A A AAA EA 172 SCENES Paneb iia ETT di di dildo 173 E O 174 SOM SCENES CONTO dls a dd 174 Scene Header VIGWACODIFO ems iios ate decd he do ute ere oa tante vie d Iota eee Sete ctu cac de eae ees 175 Scene Element Spacing Controles ia icuncocc iio 175 eager die Moe D 175 scenes Panel OPIO iia oi 175 Scene LIST VIEW CONTI Ss HE 176 OUTING Paneb e 176 QUIM LS A A AAA 177 Quin CONTO Salsas a o di ds 177 Ouilne Levels Conto Rm 178 vid AIR So aiido ERR TERT TR aar T 178 Outline Spacing COMMols sodas sees ER 178 Outline Options Controls iis i teh wha diio oca 179 OUTING Panel OMUONS sese feos Casado A oa roo eae 179 scene Heading Field View COMO liisscs ssscesassenthccasscveceds stands ct rta tuo cero ire 180 vase deine c E 180 Outline View CG ONO Sx o iae si aia i ads dis 181 Gurrent Element Drop Down EISE ii A meen 182 Outline Style Management Control vainas iion ido 182 NaviDoc Outline Styles Formal OPINAS iio AA kx A AS 183 Delete Quili e Style Control s 184 Add Outline Element GORLTOL s e EE a erst dee tn 185 Outline Styles Format ODIOS 2 252 2 trato e cascada 2 acc oa apa epa mod id ie 186 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Move Outline Elements in the OG UNG aie AP 186 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel t
173. ader gets the same Revision Mark as the rest of your document 250 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 9 3 15 9 4 15 9 5 15 9 6 15 9 7 15 9 8 Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to the right of it If checked puts the Header Revision Mark on its own separate line below the Header Unchecked puts the Header Revision Mark on the Header line at the right Don t print Revision Marks on each line If checked and there are enough Revision Marks on the page to warrant Screenwriter putting a Revision Mark on the Header as determined by your setting in After Revision Marks above Current Revision Marks won t print on revised lines The Header Revision Mark prints instead indicating a revised page This avoids having a cluttered look to the page Unchecked Current Revision Marks prints on the Header and on each revised line Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on them If checked puts an asterisk on the Header of added A pages to indicate that they re new and are considered revisions Unchecked new A pages are identifiable by their page numbering scheme only Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED pages If checked a page in a locked script whose entire text has been omitted prints with the legend PAGE OMITTED at its center Unchecked the omitted page won t print Instead the previous page prints numbered as a run 119 120 for example M
174. agic Screenwriter 6 Help 225 Zoom Screen Text Normal View INT COMPUTER DAY Where you re fiddling with the screen di rather than doing any real writing P alin 1 1 Fit Width Automatically adjusts text size to fit the document in the window staying within the specified minimum and maximum magnification percentages E r C ir Minimum Maximum 12 Fixed Text Size Use the slider to specify a fixed magnification factor for screen text M Preview Cancel ll l Fit Width This option makes Screenwriter automatically adjust the text size in the document portion of the window as you grow or shrink the document view horizontally including opening closing the NaviDoc Growing or shrinking the document view vertically does not change the displayed font s width e The minimum value controls how small the document text can be reduced as a percentage of the original font size e he maximum value controls how large the document text can be enlarged as a percentage of the original font size Fit Width Automatically adjusts text size to fit the document in the window staying within the specified minimum and maximum magnification percentages 1 a H Minimum 50 Maximum 120 T ua Fixed Text Size This option lets you specify a fixed magnification factor for the document screen text as a percentage of the original font size 226 Movie Magic Screenwriter
175. agic Screenwriter 2 Click on File gt Export to gt Adobe Acrobat PDF pdf 3 An Export dialog appears with the File name field filled in automatically with lt the name of your document gt pdf Change this if desired By default Screenwriter saves to the Movie Magic Screenwriter folder inside of your Documents folder If you wish change this to another folder on your computer e g Desktop 5 Click Save 6 The print dialog box should come up with Entire Document automatically selected If you wish select something other than Entire Document e g Selected Pages Selected Scenes etc You can also select any of the other PDF export options which include Export Which Notes This allows you to choose which notes get annotated in the PDF file None Visible Notes Only or All Notes Create Production Sides in this PDF file This option creates reduces sized pages two copies printed twice side by side in Landscape orientation for distribution Automatically display bookmarks when PDF opens in Acrobat Reader This option controls whether or not the Scene Heading bookmarks are displayed when the PDF file is opened Export Title Page lf a title page exists for this document under View gt Title Page Publisher checking this box will include it as the first page of the PDF file 7 Click the Export button E mailing a PDF File Use these directions to email a PDF version of your documen
176. akdowns 329 333 TV Template 103 TV Templates 103 Typea Note 125 126 Typeface 261 Typeover 229 Typing Foreign Characters 151 U Umlaut 151 Underline 149 150 195 343 358 Underlined 261 Underlining 150 Underlining and Boldfacing of 333 Underlining Text 150 Undo 149 314 341 Undo Alignment 100 Undo Levels 229 Unhide Elements on Screen 318 Unique Locations List 198 Unknown Words 244 Unlock Dialogue Numbering 304 338 Unlock Headers 288 330 Unlock One Rev Mark Level 338 Unlock The Script 329 Untag All Items 297 332 Untagging Items 297 UP ARROW 145 Up One Element 345 Up one Page 345 Up one Screen 345 Up Down moves rows 179 Uppercase 151 Uppercase Word 343 Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text 352 Use Style Sheets 352 User Defined 103 User Defined Color 330 User Defined Color Highlights 331 User Dictionaries 152 User Dictionary 155 User List Order 205 295 User Lists 124 136 138 139 142 347 User Lists 321 Using Default Template 19 Using Microsoft Windows 87 V V O 120 140 Variable 164 Vertical Index Cards 108 109 View Menu 19 92 93 107 318 Viewable Notes Lines Control 170 Viewable Outline Items Lines Control 181 Viewable Scene Lines Control 176 181 Vocal Characteristics 212 Voice Association File 212 voice command 254 voice commands 247 W Watermarks 305 Index Web Resources 339 What s This 339 White 274 W
177. all of the keyboard shortcuts Export Exports the current keyboard shortcuts to a keyboard shortcuts kbd file Import Imports kbd keyboard shortcuts files to the current keyboard shortcuts Print Prints the keyboard shortcuts Edit 25 This button lets you add remove and change keyboard shortcuts 254 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 11 2 15 12 Edit Keyboard Preference C Edit 3 Most any command in Screenwriter can have a keyboard shortcut To add remove or change a keyboard shortcut e Double click on a row in the table or e Select a row from the list of commands in the Keyboard Preferences tab by clicking on it and press Edit This opens the Change Shortcuts window Change Shortcuts Shortcuts for Save Alternate Key Voice Command Save changes Hint longer voice commands are easier for the computer to recognize than short ones Cancel Each command can have one primary keyboard shortcut one alternate shortcut and a voice command If a shortcut already exists for the command it displays automatically Click in or tab to the Primary or Alternate shortcut box and press the keyboard shortcut of your choice You may use many combinations of CMD CTRL OPTION and SHIFT modifier keys Screenwriter lets you know if the shortcut key has already be assigned of if it is an invalid choice such as OPTION S
178. an Action element instead press ENTER twice or press CTRL ENTER Unchecked pressing ENTER creates a new Action element Pressing the ENTER key in Note adds a Hard Return lf checked QuickType adds a Hard Return in a Note when you press ENTER ending the line short and taking you to another line Unchecked pressing ENTER in a Note creates a new Action element following the Note Pressing the ENTER Key in Transition takes you to Action With this option enabled when you press ENTER in a transition element then you will be taken to an Action element Pressing the ENTER Key in Action with Hidden Names goes to Dialogue With this option enabled if you press ENTER after an action line that follows a Dialogue line it will automatically put in the same name for you and drop you into dialogue This is because Action in play format is the same as parentheticals but should be broken over page breaks With this option set the ONLY way to put in two lines of action in a row is to press CTRL ENTER to explicitly have it enter action NOTE This option ONLY takes effect when you are in a document that has Action in Parentheticals and has the option Cont d Dialogue shouldn t have Character Names These are typical settings for Play Format Other Editing Preferences P Keep Insertion Caret Above Window Bottom gt l Lines ah LY m Keep Insertion Caret Above Window Bottom Lines Controls the number of lines above the bottom of the
179. and even Animation scripts are the only scripts that actually use this format In addition the justified text will not display on screen but will print and display in Print Preview NOTE The Darken Courier New function will not work when justified is selected It will normally print Courier New instead You can find this function by going into the Tools menu clicking Options and then clicking the Printing button Line Spacing Lines Before and Interline between lines within an element adjustable in units of 1 10th of a line Lines Before 1 0 E Interline 1 n a a All Capitals Bold Italicized and Underlined text formatting check boxes A button to select a Font s Typeface Style and Size I ALL CAPS C Bold salicized Underlined Size 73 Courier 12pts 262 Movie Magic Screenwriter Allow Words that are five or more letters long to extend 1 or 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin lf checked allows a right margin slop for smoother looking right margins in all elements Unchecked maintains strict right margins ppl Allow words that are five or more letters long to extend 1 or 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin BUTTONS E 1 Use Current Font for All Elements Revert Cancel a F Use Current Font for All Elements Applies the font type and size but not formatting such as bold italic etc to your choice of al
180. and Bookmarks It determines whether or not the NaviDoc and the document are synchronized and whether or not the Sync Frame displays Show Hide Scene Heading fields Y Scene Number E Y Int Ext We Time of Day 48 Movie Magic Screenwriter 5 2 3 This control appears on the Outline amp Scenes panels It allows control over what parts of the Scene Heading are displayed INT EXT Location and Time of Day Show Spacing between Elements ON OFF This control appears on the Outline amp Scenes panels It controls whether or not the natural spacing between elements is shown in the NaviDoc Set Number of Scene Lines 5 lines This control appears on the Outline amp Scenes panels and is the slider to the right of the dashed scale line It controls how many lines of the scene are showing in a Scene Heading row of the NaviDoc Outline Panel The Outline Panel tutorials include e Outline Panel Controls e e Setting up Outline Hierarchy and styles 49 e Creating an Outline s e Selecting Multiple Elements ss e Moving Outline Elements ss e Copying Outline Elements 54 e Promoting and Demoting Elements s Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 49 Outline Panel Controls There are some controls specific to the Outline Panel Include Exclude Outline Styles Y Include All Outline Levels Exclude All Outline Levels Y Act Break Sequen
181. and notes in the NaviDoc view This control does not affect the document view Outline elements and notes may be expanded or collapsed individually by clicking on their tree view control plus box or minus box in the outline list Outline Spacing Control ON OFF This control shows spacing between elements When ON it puts double spacing between Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 179 scene elements in the Outline Panel When OFF it puts single spacing between scene elements in the Outline Panel Note The effects of this control are visible only when multiple Scene Lines are visible See Outline View Controls e 12 11 6 Outline Options Control ie This control opens the Outline options window where options for the Outline Panel are found 12 11 7 Outline Panel Options Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline Docum ent and Outline Elements Expand Collapse together aA Clicking in an Outline Element in document reveals that element in the Outline Panel Expand Collapse independently f Use this font for all Outline Items instead of styles Font Lucida Grande Same color as Note in script Single color based on Outline Style z ral Use Sounds for Outline Drag amp Drop ___ iv Up Down moves rows Start Drag Sound jy Left Promotes row Right Demotes row Draggin
182. aracters in my script that have just written where can find change character name feature A Use Search amp Replace under Search menu to change character names Q Can I edit my pop up character name list so that character that rarely speak do not clutter the menu A Select Hide Names in Pop Up List under Format menu Q accidentally put in a forced page break how do get rid of it A Put your cursor under the forced page break and press Back Space key or select Remove Forced Page under Edit menu Q In a locked script have deleted several pages in a row Now Movie Magic Screenwriter prints blank pages Is there a way to consolidate all the blank pages on one with the appropriate indication in the header A First ensure that the option PRINT SEPARATE FULL PAGE OMITTED PAGES on Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 349 the revision page of the Tools Options Menu is not checked and then delete all the text including the word OMITTED from the pages that you don t want to print Non printing omitted page sign will appear page numbering will change accordingly Q The program is correcting a word that I m typing in What can do about that A Simply pause the AutoCorrection by going to the SPELL menu and choosing Pause Autocorrection and type in the word as desired and uncheck Pause Autocorrection If it is a word that you ll be using elsewhere you may want to run the spell check and tell the
183. ark Element following Complete Deletion If checked puts a Revision Mark on the following element when an element with Current Revision Marks is completely deleted Unchecked there is no indication of where that deleted revised element used to be Auto Update Locked Headers on Revision If checked automatically changes an individual Locked header to the Current revision header when a new revision mark appears on its page Unchecked Locked headers are not updated automatically When printing Screenwriter prompts you to Update the Headers of all pages with revisions on them to the Current header They can also be updated manually by issuing either a Fix Headers or Remove Current Revision Marks command Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 251 15 10 Printer Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Printing Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions l Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline Print Bottom Continueds Print Colored Text At Fixed Distance from Battom of Paper In Color but grey on a black and white printer amp Floating at Fixed Distance from Text C Ignoring Color black text Production Sides Gray Background on Unselected Text Fi Iv x Dut Unselected Text IM Ask User for PDF Options Print Using Fractional Widths 15 10 1 Print Bottom Continueds Print Bottom Continueds O At Fixed Distance from Bottom of Paper F3 Float
184. ark is selected 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click to confirm delete if prompted Editing Bookmarks Editing Bookmark Name 1 Open the Sample Screenplay file 2 Open the Bookmarks panel CTRL 44 3 Click on any line of text and press CTRL B to add a bookmark 4 To edit the name of the bookmark make sure it is selected in the NaviDoc and click the Edit button Alternatively you can double click the bookmark to put it in edit mode Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 63 5 Type in a new name for the bookmark 6 When you are finished click the Done button or press RETURN to confirm the name Navigating the Document 5 3 There are several ways to navigate through the NaviDoc and your document using the Bookmarks panel Mouse Clicking on a row in the Bookmarks panel will take you to that place in the document If enabled the flash pointer will point to that element in the document The Sync button is on by default so the NaviDoc will scroll as you navigate Keyboard You can move through the NaviDoc using the keyboard You can move through the NaviDoc using the keyboard Top of NaviDoc CTRL HOME Bottom of NaviDoc CTRL END Scroll up one screen CTRL PAGEUP Scroll down one screen CTRL PAGEDOWN Previous Row CTRL UP ARROW Next Row CTRL DOWN ARROW Since these key commands actually select the previous next row the document will be moved to that element as well Menus You can al
185. arks A checkmark displays next to Marks on the menu to indicate that Auto Revision Marks are enabled Removing All Current Revision Marks To remove all Current Revision Marks e Click on Production Remove Current Revision Marks NOTE There are additional Revision Mark settings on both the Locked Scripts page of the Format gt Element Styles window and on the Revisions section of the Tools gt Options window Locked Scripts Options You can customize Screenwriter s Locked Script Options to work the way you work Under the Format menu select Element Styles The Editing Script Formats screen displays Click on the Locked Scripts button You ll see the following window 280 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 4 1 Unlocked C Locked Multilocked Scene Omitted Text OMITTED Omitted Thru Text THRU Omitted And Text AND Page Numbers A Scene Numbering Scheme Normal 1A Flipped Al 8 Use the Following Scenes Number Multilock After A Scene Use Alternate Scene Numbering Revision Mark Text Revision Mark Right Margin 0 3 4 LONGO CM _ Locked Letter Skip List_ Locked Scene Headings To use Scene Heading Locking you need to click on its tab Unlocked C Locked Multilocked e Unlocked Normal Adding or deleting Scene Headings causes scenes to renumber automatically in sequential order This does not affect page breaks e Locked Adding o
186. as Auto Recognition Text window for Substitution Text has three additional options Alias AEC Text E MM M e P7 i T am e mum mom mom mom mm a COA CO council on WO a lr ad Ma laa Mo ae a raf a daa ow s m a a a eu Ma a ha A E C D E F G H l P ua aar Ma E g 8a x dp a Lowe Pr A Auto E As Entered C ALL CAPS o z r sz A Auto Capitalization matches the way you type the Alias Text e f you type coa it expands to council on aging e f you type in Coa it expands to Council On Aging e If you type in COA it expands to COUNCIL ON AGING E As Entered Capitalization matches the Substitution Text exactly as it appears in the 144 Movie Magic Screenwriter User List unless you re in an element defined as all caps in which case it is put in all caps C ALL CAPS Capitalization is ALL CAPS Character Name Capitalization for Character Name Alias Text uses the Auto capitalization method Auto Capitalization matches the way you type the Alias Text e f you type coa it expands to council on aging e f you type in Coa it expands to Council On Aging e If you type in COA it expands to COUNCIL ON AGING Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 145 11 Text Editing There is usually more than one way of performing any text selecti
187. ault set of icons at the larger size e Minimal Large lcons Selecting this sets the Toolbar to a reduced set of large icons e All Toolbar Icons Includes all Toolbar icons in the Top Toolbar Note Since the Toolbar does not wrap most of the icons are available by clicking on the icon on the far right of the Toolbar and selecting from the popup menu of icons For example B Bold lj underline f Italics xe Co Preferences P Customize 15 2 1 Customize Toolbar This command gives you complete control over what appears in the top toolbar All you have to do is drag the icons to and from the toolbar It s that simple 228 Movie Magic Screenwriter Drag your favorite items into the toolbar Mew Bold Cut CAP Cap Word Blue Element Styles Show Icon Only HH Wi Use Small Size Tight Scene Hs Open U Underline Copy aA Uppercase Green c Preferences m Save Italic Lowercase Red Ruler Print 5 Strikethru ee p s Cut Element Ab Initial Caps Black Ed Flexible Space UY eR Find Find Next Ei E Preview Send N if Mormal Undo LE LII E E E Insert Element Promote C b i Cap Bold Left Column 3 v Extra Colors Check Spelling Space Half Space a b Replace waa Document Layout u Redo Pam Demote um Right Column ABC i Pause Auto Correction Separator egy Wo
188. before the end of where the page break falls If no sentence end is found in the last 3 lines Dialogue may be broken in the middle of a sentence Maximum Lines on Page lf checked Dialogue may be broken in the middle of a sentence in order to fit the maximum number of lines on a page Minimum Dialogue Lines on a Page Tells Screenwriter not to break a Dialogue element unless there are at least this number of Dialogue lines both before and after the page break Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 271 The lower the number entered the less blank white space at the bottom of a page Accepts a number between 1 and 10 with 2 as the default Not used when Sentence Ends Only is selected Break After a Single Sentence lf checked elements may be broken after a single sentence that only takes up one line does not word wrap For Dialogue elements this option only applies to a single sentence directly following the Character Name element Dialogue elements following Parentheticals or second paragraphs of Dialogue may be broken after a single sentence even if this option is not checked Break two One line Sentences lf checked elements consisting of only two one line sentences may be broken Unchecked the element is not broken Transitions B Allow Transition as lst line on Page Allow Transition on CONTINUED line Allow Transition as 1st Line on Page lf checked a new page is allowed to start with a Transition eleme
189. beginning of that element End of Dialogue Add an Action Element Middle of Dialogue Break the Dialogue and insert an Action Element Parenthetical Add a Dialogue Element if the next element is Dialogue it moves to the beginning of that element f Return in Dialog takes you to Character is checked on the Editing page of the Screenwriter Preferences window a Character Name element will be inserted instead If QuickType is not enabled these popup lists can be displayed manually by pressing the appropriate Control key combination If you Press While in QuickType will 130 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 18 CTRL S Any element CTRL I Any element CTRL E Any element CTRL O CTRL O Any element Blank Shot element CMD RETURN Any element SHIFT CMD C Action or Dialogue element TAB Any element SHIFT 9 SHIFT 9 Dialogue element SHIFT CMD T Any element Add a Scene Heading element Add a Scene Heading element beginning with INT Add a Scene Heading element beginning with EXT Add a Shot element Display a List Menu of Shots ANGLE ON etc Add an Action element Display a List Menu of existing Character Names Add a Character Name element Character Name element Display a List Menu of Character Extensions V O O S etc Add a Parenthetical element Add a Transition element SHIFT CMD T Blank Transition element Disp
190. ble Capitals e g Problem Corrects words that start with two capital letters instead of one such as Scheduling e Auto Capitalize Sentences Capitalizes the first letter in all Sentences in Dialogue Action and Notes Except Immediately Following Shots Shots also known as secondary Sluglines can be used to emphasize an object or person with the following Action giving more detail To have the combined Shot and Action read as one sentence with the Action sentence not capitalized check this box Auto Space Sentences to Spaces Ensures that every sentence has a consistent number of spaces after the period Set the value from 1 to 9 If you hit the space bar once the program will automatically put the set amount of spaces To prevent auto spacing a particular sentence enter Hard Spaces after the period instead of regular spaces Enter a Hard Space by pressing CTRL ALT SPACE e Treat as a Sentence End in Dialogue Treats a right parenthesis in Dialogue as a sentence end in order to format the next sentence correctly 6 Click on OK to return to your document User Dictionaries The User Dictionary Editor allows you to add remove or change words in any of your User Dictionaries It can be selected under Tools Edit User Dictionary Next you re asked to Select User Dictionary User Dictionary files in American English end with the extension Ixa Userdict Ixa is the default dictionary Select a dictionary and
191. card The User Dictionary Editor does not distinguish between UPPERCASE and lowercase adding all words as lowercase Edit In the list of Dictionary words on the left select the word you want to edit Click on the Edit Word button The edit window opens to allow you to edit the entry Make the desired changes then click on Click OK to save the changes Cancel to discard Click on OK to save and close the Dictionary Cancel to discard changes and exit Find and Replace Text There are six commands in the Edit menu for finding and replacing text The first five commands have options controlled in the Find amp Replace window s The last command opens the Change Character Name window ss e Find 157 Displays the Search amp Replace window with the Replace parameters grayed out Enter the text to Search for and define the search parameters e Find Next s Searches for next instance that meets the same find criteria e Replace s Available only after a successful Find command Replaces the current instance found text with the replacement text e Replace amp Find Next s Displays the Search amp Replace menu Enter the text to Search for the text to Replace it with and define the Search amp Replace parameters e Replace All 157 Available only after a successful Find command Replaces ALL instances of the found text with the replacement text This command does NOT ask for confirmation while
192. cation This signifies where the scene actually takes place e g MANHATTAN HIGHRISE e Time of Day Shows what time the scene takes place typically DAY or NIGHT The Time of Day is separated from the Location commonly by one hyphen although a dash double hyphen is also acceptable EXAMPLES INLILHMAHHALLAN RNIGHRLZE DAL INT MANHATTAN HIGHRISE DAY Action description This is the description of the action that is taking place in the scene Generally more sparce than screenplay since sitcoms are dialogue driven Some sitcoms place the Action in parentheses as in the Sitcom II template Formatting e Flush with the left margin 1 5 e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page and staggered e ALL CAPS e Single spaced within the paragraph and double spaced between paragraphs EXAMPLES Sitcom ACT ONE A FADE IN INE CMANB ATDTAN HIGERTLSE DAY NA QN TE L Q OUCH E LAXLLIN Q ALE A SHARKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLES ON THE COFFEE TABLE Ds D AM LE SUR SIS IHSOUGH IAE FRONT DOOR HE Lo ALL SMILES NOTE Certain items are underlined in Action The first instance of a character s name Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 79 character entrances and exits sounds or effects Sitcom Il ACT ONE A PADE UN INT MANHATTAN HIGHRISE DAY D IINA SITS ON TH DGE OF THE COUCH PLAYING SO AIR N SHAKY TOWER OF PIECES WOBBLES ON THE COFFEE TABLE
193. cations Creating spoken commands to insert text or graphics Creating spoken commands to open items can t hear my computer speak My computer doesn t recognize spoken commands or is slow to respond Naming spoken commands Providing access to speech recognition for a restricted user account Seeing the commands you can speak Speaking Address Books names to control other applications Spoken commands don t work with my application The speech feedback window doesn t appear The Speech Recognition pane is empty Turning spoken commands on or off Using spoken commands to control your computer Using the speech feedback window Clicking the small down arrow at the bottom of the OSX floating microphone window that appears once voice commands are enabled in Screenwriter lets you o pen a window named Speech Commands that lists the available commands Here s what it looks like in all its glory Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 219 eoe 6 Screen mmsw 3 Ey Y lar xo B c Dee B x O O O Speech Commands UTE EUER nup pM Pc Mp EF Md Go to previous scene as y X s Elx Ti 94 INT HELMER S STUDY NIGHT Commands a Y Screenwriter Delete Add Outline Element v HELMER and NORA stand in the center of the study Go to bottom TR No Outline item Selected 2 RA Go to next note an NO Torvald it hurts me terribl to Go to next scene Go to page CLOSE SHOT OF NORA been so kind to me But I can t Go to p
194. ce Scene Label Scene Heading Beat Y il Scene F i 5cript Notes Tl 4 Create Edit Outline Styles This drop down button controls which outline style rows are visible in the Outline panel Collapse All Expand All E3 Py Expand x Collapse When clicked this button expands or collapses all rows in the Outline panel NOTE f there is a mixed state of rows some collapsed some expanded it will expand all the rows Setting up Outline hierarchy and styles The Default def template used to create a new file automatically already contains commonly used outline elements for a screenplay Sequence and Beat e To add remove or change Outline styles open up the Format gt Element Styles CMD E window and choose Outline from the list of buttons on the right Adding an Outline style 1 Click on the button 2 This will create a style called New Style that will be placed above the Scene Heading level which is where outline elements are commonly used 3 To change the name of the style double click on the name New Style type in the new name and press RETURN 50 Movie Magic Screenwriter Deleting an Outline style 1 Select the style you wish to delete 2 Click on the Delete Outline Style button 3 If prompted click Yes to confirm The style will be removed and any existing elements using that style will be converted to Notes Editing an Outline style 1
195. cene heading a format used frequently in sitcom production There are two sub options under the Scene Character Lists menu item e Generate Displays the Scene Character List Generation menu e Remove Removes any previously generated Scene Character Lists 338 Movie Magic Screenwriter NOTE When you have generated lists each time you go to the Print menu it will normally ask you if you want to regenerate your lists Select YES when you ve added removed characters from any scenes otherwise you can select NO If you don t want it to prompt you in this manner then uncheck the option Prompt to Regenerate Lists before Printing which is found on the Scene Character List Generation menu Animation Locking Shows you options for Animation Production Features X Print Dialogue Numbering in Script Setup Numbering Layout Lock Current Rev Marks Unlock One Rev Mark Level Lock Dialogue Numbering Unlock Dialogue Numbering Adjust Dialogue Numbering e Print Numbering in Script sos If checked Displays and Prints the dialogue speech numbering in the script as well as in the Animation Recording Script report A checkmark displays next to Print Numbering in Script To turn the display of Numbering off click on it again e Setup Numbering Layout This setup window allows you to control the way Animation Dialogue is printed e Lock Current Rev Marks Locks the Current Revision Marks and increases the
196. cessing document that can be opened in any word processor such as Microsoft Word WordPerfect etc or imported into Final Draft However this will not retain the same page breaks as they appear in Screenwriter Compose Message In This control allows the choice of email programs in which to write and send the email message with the attachment NOTE This option requires the chosen email application to be installed properly before using it to compose and send the message Name Bank Movie Magic Screenwriter s Name Bank feature is a collection of 3 900 Male Names 4 950 Female Names and 22 000 Family Names designed to help you find interesting and unique names for your characters To Run the Name Bank e Click on Tools s27 gt Name Bank and you will see a window similar to the one below Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 221 The Name Bank Favorites Male Names Female Names Family Names Sal Personal Favorites Saleem i Salem Salim Salmon Salomo Salomon Salomone Salvador Salvatore Salvidor Sam Sammie Sammy Sampson Angelo Cooper Killian Mac Michael Quinton Highlight any name s you want to add to your favorites list and then click the move button with the gt above J K L M N O Q R 5 U V W X Y Z Name to Insert Angelo Eold ALL CAPS Insert Name into Script Close Name Bank 222 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15
197. ch p JOSEPH S VOICE al On V J Day he wept and prayed again T FRANKLIN S VOICE Se Joseph now show him what happened FN today a JOSEPH S VOICE ol Yes sir Se MORE a d CONTINUED NE EU Dialogue Line 56 Pg 10168 E 6 9 1 Main Menu Bar The top most bar is the Main Menu Bar s10 which gives you access to all of the Pull Down menus Screenwriter File Edit View Format Goto NaviDoc Tools Production Window Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 93 6 9 2 6 9 3 6 9 4 Top Toolbar Beneath that is the Top Toolbar with Speed Buttons for frequently used tasks To see what any Speed Button does move the mouse cursor arrow over it A hint explaining its function appears immediately underneath the button Another explanation often giving the NOTE You can customize the Top Toolbar by going to View Display Options Toolbar Customize Toolbar You can also access the Customize Toolbar Panel by right clicking on the Top Toolbar to bring up it s Context menu Right Toolbar At the right of the main editing window is the C Right Toolbar A Right Toolbar icon button inserts an element at the cursor position p To Show or Hide the Right Toolbar go to View gt Display Options gt Toolbars gt Show Right Toolbars To change the way the Right Toolbar displays J go to Display Options under the View menu O Bottom Status Bar Across th
198. cked capitalizes the first letter in all Sentences in Dialogue Action and Notes Except immediately Following Shots Shots also known as secondary Sluglines can be used to emphasize an object or person with the following Action giving more detail To have the combined Shot and Action read as one sentence with the Action sentence not capitalized check this box Character Names lf checked capitalizes the first letter of all Character Names in Dialogue Action and Notes To be capitalized by Auto Correct a character name must either have been used previously in the document or exist in the Character Name User List When using names such as Mark or Art in your document Auto Correct also capitalizes the words mark and art To avoid this Pause Autocorrection under the Spell menu Type the word with your desired capitalization move past the word then resume Auto Correct by clicking on Pause Autocorrection again All Caps Makes Character Names ALL CAPS wherever they appear Correct Double Capitals e g Problem lf checked when Spell Check is run from the opell menu it auto corrects Sentence spacing and capitalization without prompting you first This way sentence spacing and capitalization will be corrected even if Auto Correct is off e Treat as a Sentence End in dialogue for the purposes of auto capitalization amp spacing lf checked treats a right parenthesis in Dialogue as a sentence
199. click on OK The User Dictionary Editor screen displays If opening a User Dictionary for the first time the file is empty and ready for you to add words Buttons below the Dictionary list show your options Import Add words from a plain text file Each entry has to be on its own line Export Exports the dictionary being edited to a text file Each item on the list is exported on its own line Delete In the Dictionary list select the word you want to Delete Click on the Delete button The Word is removed from the list Add Opens a new window to allow you to add a new word to the Dictionary list Type the 156 Movie Magic Screenwriter 11 11 word the way you want it spelled Note if you enter an incorrect spelling here Spell Check uses it In effect you are telling Spell Check that this is the correct spelling Click on the Add Word button and the word you entered appears in the Dictionary window on the left To allow Screenwriter to Auto Correct a word as you re typing in a document enter the incorrect spelling in the Word field and correct spelling in the Replacement field For example to Auto Correct Dramatica when it s spelled as Darmatica type in Darmatica in the Word field and Dramatica in the Replacement field Note the Auto Correct feature must be turned on for this to have any effect on your typing See Auto Correct Typos 15 Click OK to save the changes Cancel to dis
200. creating a new document from a template instructional Notes or sample text will be inserted into the new document These can be removed if desired Choose a template and press the OPEN button to create a new document using the chosen template styles Select Cancel to exit without creating a new document Loading a Template To load the formatting of a template into an existing document under the Format menu select Load Styles From and choose one of the following Template Screenwriter Document 104 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Template Clicking this displays a window where you can select from the provided templates Blank Templates Choosing one of these templates will load only the margins and formatting settings but will not include any sample text or instructions Instructional Templates Choosing one of these templates will load the margins and formatting settings and include instructional Notes and possibly some sample text TV Templates Choosing one of these templates will load the margins and formatting settings for that TV show and any sample text NOTE when loading an Instructional or TV Template into an open document that contains text the instructional Notes or sample text will not be inserted in order to preserve the existing document e Screenwriter Document Clicking this displays a window where you can select an existing Screenwriter 6 0 MMSW or pre 6 0 SCW document
201. creenplay typically begins with the line FADE IN which is in ALL CAPS and flush with the left margin Margins Screenplays should have a top and bottom margin of 1 0 although the bottom margin will vary from page to page because of the specific page breaking rules handled automatically by Screenwriter The left and right margins are specific to each element and are also handled automatically by the program Font As of this writing the industry standard font for screenplays is Courier 12 pt This includes any form of Courier such as Courier New since it is a mono spaced font and takes up 10 66 Movie Magic Screenwriter characters per inch on the page when at 12 pt Do not use a proportional font like Times New Roman or Arial Header Footer A spec script should only have the page number followed by a period in the upper right corner of each page except page one Screenplays do not use a footer Line Spacing Elements are separated by one blank line double spaced with the exception being a Character Name Parenthetical Dialogue group which is single spaced Page Breaks Certain elements should never appear by themselves at the bottom of the page such as Scene Headings and Shots Screenwriter automatically handles proper page breaking including MOREs and CONT Ds for dialogue so you as a writer do not have to think about it as you are trying to get your ideas onto the page The different elements of a Screen
202. creenwriter starts Retain previous versions of documents BK Files A z E Create a new document Retain up En previous versions of a document Display the File Open dialog Place previous version Files in CO Restore the last document A subfolder named Previous Versions Restore the last workspace O i m The same Folder as the document 0 Documents and Settings chris_h Previous Versions Create a new previous version File CO Only once per editing session Every time a document is saved 15 4 1 Document Settings Document Settings Default Document Folder C Documents and Settingschris_huntleyiMy Documents Screenwriter Documents Backup Folder C Program Files Write Brothers Inci Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 Restore the Main Window s Size Timed Backup Frequency Minutes C Password Protect Documents When opening a document start at last saved position Re register File Type Associations e Default Document Folder e Backup Folder Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 235 e Restore the Main Window s Size 235 e Password Protect Documents e When opening a document start at the last saved position e Timed Backup Frequency e Re register File Type Associations Restore the Main Window s Size When checked this option opens Screenwriter s main window to the size it was when last running Unchecked the main window opens to the default size 15 4 2 Retain Previous Ver
203. cript under File gt Save As Give it a different name to reflect the Date and its status as the next Revision Color draft e g MyScript BLUE 2 Make changes to the script adding and deleting text as necessary that will appear in the next draft Save the file as you go Because the script is locked Screenwriter does the following e Automatically puts Revision Marks on lines you make changes to e Puts appropriate OMITTED text in the place of omitted Scenes and Pages e Keeps existing Page and Scene numbers the same while adding new ones as A Pages and A Scenes 3 Update the Title Page Under the View menu select Title Page Publisher Manually change the Running List adding the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes 4 Check the Header Text to make sure it accurately reflects the current Date and Revision Draft Color 5 Save the script using the Save command Issue Revised Pages 1 Print the Revised Pages only e Under the File menu select Print e Click on the radio button for the displayed Revision Color or click on the radio button for Asterisked Pages if you re not using Revision Colors Screenwriter prints only the pages with Revision Marks and any A Pages immediately following them 2 Distribute the revised pages Start Next Revision 1 Under the Production menu select Start Next Revision From now on Screenwriter automatically takes you through the steps to get to the
204. ct the color for Notes to be displayed in the document Click this button to display a Color palette Choose a color to display Notes with or create a Custom color Click OK to accept your choice Cancel to exit without changing color You are prompted to convert all Notes to the new color Click on Yes to change all the notes No to change only one Note 128 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 16 vi Display Notes in Script vA Print Notes in Script If you check PRINT SCRIPT NOTES IN SCRIPT then the notes WILL take up space and your script will become correspondingly longer Select the Color for Script Notes to EE be displayed in the script 3 Click OK to save your changes Cancel to discard them See Element Styles 20l in the Customizing Screenwriter chapter for more details Switch Elements There are several ways to convert an element from one type to another for example Action to Note e Current Element pop up menu e Current Outline Style pop up menu Outline elements only e Change Element Type under the Format menu e Right click context menu Current Element pop up menu 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the Element to be changed Or select a portion of the element to change 2 Click on the Current Element pop up menu on the Top Toolbar to display the list of elements Or press F4 on the keyboard 3 Select the element type to switch to by clicking on it Current Outline Style pop up m
205. curity Cancel ii AU Category Group Titles Click into a title area to change the title for the category group 300 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 9 that appears for that box on the breakdown sheets Title are ALL CAPS only Category Group Titles Click into a title area to change the title for the category group that appears for that box on the breakdown sheets Title are ALL CAPS only Category Items Each box on the breakdown sheet contains one or more production breakdown categories Click and drag the category items into the desired category group on the breakdown sheet NOTE There must be at least one category in each box Click OK to confirm changes Cancel to discard changes Export to Movie Magic Scheduling ocreenwriter can export all your tagged breakdown items for every scene to a Screenwriter Export file with the file extension SEX This file can be imported directly into Movie Magic Scheduling EP Scheduling and Gorilla by Jungle Software where breakdown information is automatically transferred to Breakdown Sheets and Production Strips enabling you to easily organize a production schedule and print strips for the Production Board To export Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Movie Magic Scheduling Export Production Breakdown Scenes Production Company Prod Title Mo Wonderful 6 mmsw EXT STREET NIGHT 2 EXT DUMP DAY 3 EXT HOUSE NIGHT
206. current document It is useful for creating backup copies of your working document Save All Open Documents Saves all open files without prompting you for file names except for unsaved untitled files Automatically overwrites any previously saved versions of files with the same name Import Allows you to open files in non Screenwriter formats e g text RIF Final Draft Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 313 etc for purposes of importing e Export to sse Saves the document in Movie Magic Screenwriter older scw format as well as non Screenwriter file format for use in other software programs such as Adobe Acrobat Microsoft Word HTML for internet publishing and others e Save As Template 5 Saves the current open document and its settings as a template def file e Send As Email Attachment 2 Transmits the open document to a recipient via email Use this feature to send MMSW files to other Screenwriter users or PDF and RTF files to non Screenwriter users e Page Setup Displays a window where you can select a printer and change printing options e Print Preview Displays a WYSIWYG preview of how the current page of the document will print e Print ss Displays a window where you can select what to print 314 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 1 3 Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Paste into Current Element Clear Paste From Copy
207. d Previous Versions Screenwriter places the bk files for all documents in a folder called Previous Versions e The same folder as the document Screenwriter places the bk files for the 236 Movie Magic Screenwriter document being edited in the same folder as the document e C Documents and Settings Previous Versions This option lets you pick the subfolder in which to save the previous versions Click on the Change button to change the folder e Create a new previous version file This option controls when the previous version files are created e Only once per editing session A bk file is created the first time the document is saved during a single editing session If the document is closed and reopened Screenwriter considers it a new editing session and another bk file is created if the document is saved while in the new editing session e Every time a document is saved Screenwriter creates a bk file every time a document is saved 15 5 Files Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Files Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline When Screenwriter starts it should Leave you in a Blank Document T z Automatically check for updates Monthly J Display Open File Dialog E Retrieve Last Document you worked on li Restore Last Workspace Opening and Saving Documents
208. d pages are indicated also Each time a set of revised pages is distributed they re copied on a different color of paper to instantly distinguish them from other revisions Screenwriter can automatically generate all A Pages A Scenes and revision marks for you and gives you a lot of flexibility over how you d like your revisions to appear To begin generating revised pages you must first Lock the Page Breaks of the script Otherwise any addition or deletion to the script would change the page numbers of the pages following it and everyone would no longer have the same text on the same pages Subsequent pages are added as A Pages Deleted pages become Omitted pages Similarly Scene Headings and numbers can be locked so that everyone s referring to the same scene New scenes become A Scenes Deleted scenes become Omitted scenes NOTE If you place the mouse on Page Panel in a locked script it displays a pop up window with the total number of page how many pages were revised and the applicable percentage 274 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 2 The Production Cycle The Production Cycle involves the following steps e Issue the Shooting Script 274 then e Lock the Script 275 e Perform Revisions 277 e Issue Revised Pages 277 e Start Next Revision 277 Lock the script again e Perform Next Revisions e ssue Next Revised Pages and so on Here s how 16 21 Shooting Script Before is
209. date and page number e Change the Revision Draft Color order if desired Screenwriter uses the following industry standard Revision Draft Color order 276 Movie Magic Screenwriter Edit Revision Draft Colors WHITE BLUE PINK YELLOW GREEN GOLDENROD SALMON CHERRY BUFF TAN CNew Color CPelete Color estacas n Current color WHITE 223 A Display Page Colors On Screen After the last color is used it should fd Save as Defaults for All New Scripts Cancel Loop to Double PS White Blue Pink Yellow Green Goldenrod Salmon Cherry Buff Tan After you have locked this the White shooting script for the first time Blue will be set as the next revision color Click on OK to accept your changes or the defaults and Lock the Script A prompt displays telling you that you re ready to print the White draft and then start making Revisions that will appear in the Blue draft Click on OK to continue Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 277 16 2 2 16 2 3 16 2 4 5 Next update the Title Page Under the View menu select Title Page Publisher Create a text box and start the Running List with the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes 6 Save the script under File Save 7 Print the White draft Shooting Script Under the File menu select Print Copy and distribute the script to all concerned parties Perform Revisions 1 Save the s
210. dentation 266 Action is in Parentheticals 352 Add 109 Add a Note 125 Add an Index Card 108 109 Add as Text 120 Add Bookmark 172 Add Category 166 Add Dialogue Paragraph 314 Add Forced Page Break 131 314 343 Add Hard Return 132 314 343 Add Note Element 166 Add Outline Element 19 190 325 Add Outline Style 185 Add Word 155 Add Words to 152 Adjust Dialogue Numbering 304 338 Adjusted 7 lines 204 294 Adobe Acrobat PDF 356 Advanced Locking Features 286 AFTERNOON 140 Alias Auto Recognition Text 142 143 Alias Text 136 142 Align Headers Footers 197 Align Horizontally 100 Align Vertically 100 AllCaps 154 All OMITTED Scene Headings 331 All or Some Notes 331 Allow Dragging Outline Rows 179 Allow Typeover 93 229 ALT 181 ALT 181 ALT DOWN ARROW 145 162 ALT END 162 ALT ENTER 121 126 132 ALT HOME 162 ALT LEFT ARROW 191 ALT PAGE DOWN 162 ALT PAGE UP 162 ALT RIGHT ARROW 191 ALT UP ARROW 145 162 Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel 175 alternate shortcut 254 Alt Key Character Names 120 ANGLE ON 123 140 Animation Locking 301 304 329 338 Animation Numbering 302 Animation Production 301 Animation Recording Script 303 Animation Recording Scripts 198 302 A Page 288 329 A Pages 250 288 Index 363 Application Icon 18 A Scene 329 A Scene Numbering 282 ASCII 352 Assigning Numbers to Speeches 302 Associate Items with Locations 332 Associate Items with Na
211. der Screenwriter s File menu open a New file Under the Edit menu select Paste Instead of pasting the import text in your new empty document Screenwriter presents the following Text Interpretation menu How Should Interpret This Text fe Import Text in Script Format y Import Text as Action Only v Text Only non RTF Use Stylesheets KA Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Use when line spacing in the source text is inconsistant though it can cause shots to be imported as Character Names Don t use Capitalization Information for Element Identification Use when Character Names may be lower case in the source text Ignore Margins for Element Identification lAction is in Parentheticals Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Use ONLY when the script is already in Production and the page breaks have to match Cancel e To import a script file Import in Script Format should be checked e To import an outline or some other non script text check Import Text as Action Only e Text Only Non RTF Checking this CheckBox if available imports the file slightly faster and may improve the accuracy of the import It also loses any bold italic or underline formatting e Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Causes Screenwriter to normalize inconsistent line spacing and margins In most cases this produces the most accurate import However it may cause
212. different font for the Index Cards than for the document Times New Roman 10 pt is often a good choice as it gets more text on each card than the standard Courier New 12pt e Save As Saves Index Card layouts as separate files automatically adding the extension CRD for you e Open Loads a previously saved Index Card layout e Save as the Default Layout Loads the current settings every time you select Print Index Cards in the future 114 Movie Magic Screenwriter To print all your Index Cards click on the Print All Cards button To print certain cards only 1 Click on the Select Range of Cards to Print button You are returned to Index Card View 2 he cursor changes to an arrow with a box saying Select 1st Card to Print Click on the first card you want to print and it turns a darker gray 3 The cursor text changes to Select last Card to Print Click on the last card you want to print and it also turns darker gray To print one index card only select it as both the 1st and Last card to print The range of cards you selected are sent to the printer Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 10 10 1 Writing a Script 115 Each part of a document is formatted uniquely with different margins capitalization and spacing These are called Elements Screenwriter uses these elements e Act Break e Action e Character Name e Dialogue e Parenthetical e Scene Heading e
213. dir supporthome html Contact Technical Support http support screenplay com redir contactsupport html Sales Contact http support screenplay com redir contactCS html Fax Technical Support 818 843 8364 Phone Technical Support 818 843 7819 8 30 am 5 00 pm PST Write Brothers Inc 138 N Brand Blvd Suite 201 Glendale CA 91203 818 843 6557 14 Movie Magic Screenwriter Welcome to Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Movie Magic Screenwriter is an all in one package for any story you want to write Screenwriter handles script formats for motion pictures theater television novels comic books and more It formats while you write so you can focus on what you are writing not where it goes on the page Screenwriter s massive set of features makes writing and rewriting fast and simple Copyright Notice 15 Things Every Movie Magice Screenwriter User Should Know e New Features in Screenwriter 6 0 17 e Tutorials 2 e Basic Information s Bunnina Movie Madic S tahe e Choosing a Script Format 103 e Writing the Document 5 e Editing a Document e e Saving a Document se e Opening a Document e Printing the Script 1921 e Importing Scripts 351 e The Main Menu Bar s10 e The NaviDoc Panel 160 Advanced Movie Magic Screenwriter Features e Customizing Screenwriter 222 e Outlining in Screenwriter 176 e Using User Lists 136 e Setting Scrip
214. dow You can change the name by simply typing a new name in this window All previous names are remembered and are accessible by clicking on the down arrow to open the popup list Send Script Document Allows you to send the current active document in your program to your partner Your partner will receive a request asking if he wants to accept the document If accepted your partner s computer will begin receiving the document During this time you and your partner will not be able to Chat with each other until your partner receives the document iPartner will then automatically put you in Partner view slave mode see below because the file is now on their computer The document now resides on your partner s computer allowing him to save and print the file Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 209 14 1 3 14 1 4 Show partner This is different then the Send Document feature since it does not actually transfer the document to your partner s computer Instead it opens a window on your partner s computer allowing your partner to view and edit with permission the document Once you click on the Show Partner button it will change to Showing Partner to indicate that your partner is viewing your document At this point you are considered in Master view since the document is on your computer and you control the editing and the viewing of the document When your partner is showing you a document the Show Partn
215. dow the Outline Styles format options allow you to define add and remove outline styles There are also controls for outline style names levels style type and color These Outline Styles format options are divided into two sections e The controls in the upper half of the Outline Styles format options control the appearance of items in the Outline Panel and or the document This includes margins line spacing and character formatting For Document Styles these controls only adjust the appearance of the items in the NaviDoc For Outline Styles these controls adjust the appearance of the items in the NaviDoc and the document e The controls in the lower half of the Outline Element Styles format options control the creation deletion and formatting of the outline styles as they appear in the NaviDoc 12 11 13 NaviDoc Outline Styles Format Options The controls in the lower half of the Outline Styles format options control the creation deletion and formatting of the outline styles as they appear in the NaviDoc and the document 184 Movie Magic Screenwriter ial Act Breaks E Shots Scene Labels Notes v Scene Headings Style Name Print Frame Colors Act Break y Bis Sequence y BE 2 Scene Label v B _ pa 7 B y Scene H eadinq v iN 1 m Best Bm Include these standard styles in Outline View Makes the selected standard document styles part of the NaviDoc outline styles list e New Outline Style Button C
216. drags card 3 over card 1 Card 3 becomes 1 card 1 becomes 2 and the other cards renumber to match OHM THE COMPUTER SCREEN Editable electronic index cards one for each scene of a screenplay Rick drags card 3 over card 1 Card 3 becomes 1 card 1 becomes 2 and the other cards renumber to match 30 Add Contued Dialogue e Press TAB e Type r e Press RETURN RICK CONT D is entered for you as Rick has spoken twice in a row Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 43 Editable electronic index cards one for each scene of a screenplay Rick drags card 3 over card 1 Card 3 becomes 1 card 1 becomes 2 and the other cards renumber to match RICK CONT D e Type Rick s dialogue What do you think of it so far RICK CONT D What do you think of it so far 31 Add Action e Press RETURN e Type the next paragraph of Action No answer RICK CONT D What do you think of it so far No answer 32 Add More Action e Press RETURN e Type the next paragraph of Action Rick turns to see Jack checkbook in hand rushing out the door Rick smiles turns back to his screenwriting Ho answer Rick turns to see Jack checkbook in hand rushing out the door Rick smiles turns back to his screenwriting 33 Fade Out e Press RETURN 44 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Press RETURN again e Type P for Transition A pop up list of Transition text d
217. e 2 put Scene in the Header e Scene Label Inserts the code representing the Scene number for TV shows and Stage Plays To have the number appear as Scene 2 put Scene in the Header 196 Movie Magic Screenwriter 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 3 4 e Date Inserts 95 the code representing the current date 6 7 ru e Rev Color Inserts pages the code representing the Revision Draft Color for revised e Flush Right Inserts the code telling Screenwriter to align the text following it flush with the Right Margin To have some items align flush left and others align flush right insert this code between them for example Act Page would place Act 2 flush left and Page 3 flush right e Underline Insert to start underlining and to end underlining e Bold Insert lt to start underlining and gt to end underlining To enter the character that represents a code in the Header such as the sign to make it say Act 6 enter the code twice as in Act Screenwriter s default is to keep blank spaces in Header Line 2 and print it as a blank line Text you enter in Line 2 replaces the spaces and print accordingly Put in Date As Selects a format for the Date appearing in Header and or Footer Text Click on the appropriate radio button to select e Month Day Year Standard American format 3 15 2009 e Month Day
218. e Click the Add Note Element pop up menu on the Notes panel in the NaviDoc Tab amp Return You can easily go from element to element in Screenwriter by pressing just two keys TAB and RETURN Your fingers need never leave the keyboard unlike using a Control key shortcut or using the mouse enabling you to stay in the flow of writing your document Based on the current Element Screenwriter makes an informed guess as to what you would like to do next It places you in the logical next Element and pops up a menu of possible choices For example if the cursor is located in a blank Character Name element and you press RETURN a list of all the Character Names in your script pops up for your selection For Tab amp Return to work QuickType must be enabled To turn QuickType on 1 Under the Screenwriter menu select Preferences 2 In the Preferences window click on the Editing tab 3 Place a check in the Enable QuickType Entry box QuickType wi Enable QuickType Entry Ww Auto Pop Up Locations Y Auto Pop Up Time of Day Use SmartTab v Running Shot List w Running Transition List iW Auto Pop Up List of Character Names M When parsing Locations only strip known Times The following element instructions use the Tab amp Return method with QuickType enabled Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 117 10 3 10 4 FADE IN If you are writing a document that requires a FADE IN on the first line
219. e Magic Screenwriter 7 4 7 5 7 6 X and Y axis section shows how far from the left X and top Y margins of the page your text box starts These measurements change as you move the text box and are shown in Inches or Centimeters The Grid helps you position text boxes on the page Click on Show Grid to display or hide it Exporting a Title Page When you click save from the main window of Screenwriter the Title Page is saved as part of the document itself so there is no need to save it separately To export the Title Page as a template for use with other documents simply click on the Export button and give it a name A file extension of TPG is automatically added to a Title Page Template file you export Importing a Title Page You can import a title page that is part of another Screenwriter document or was saved as a Title Page Template file Click on the Import button In the Import Title Page window to load an existing Title Page Template select a file ending in TPG and click on it To load a title page that is part of another Screenwriter document click the Import button then change the Files of Type drop down list from Title Page to Screenwriter Documents Select a Screenwriter 6 0 document MMSW or a pre 6 0 document SCW and click OK Printing a Title Page From within Title Page Publisher print the Title Page by clicking the Print button To print from outside Title Page Publisher under the F
220. e Type the next Action paragraph Jack storms into the room a look of disbelief on his face INT RICK S ROOM CONTINUOUS Jack storms into the room a look of disbelief on his face 24 Add Character Name and Dialogue e Press TAB j e Press RETURN e Type e Type Jack s dialogue Show me INT RICK S ROOM CONTINUOUS Jack storms into the room a look of disbelief on his face JACE Show me Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 41 25 Add Character Name e Press TAB e Type r e Press RETURN RICK is entered for you JACEK Show me RICK 26 Add Parenthetical e Type the left parenthesis character SHIFT 9 The cursor appears in a new Parenthetical automatically surrounded by parentheses RICK e Type the word interrupting J ACE Show me RICK interrupting 27 Add Dialogue e Press RETURN e Type Rick s dialogue the Magic Watch this RICK interrupting the Magic Watch this 42 Movie Magic Screenwriter 28 Add Shot e Press RETURN twice e Type h for Make this a Shot A pop up list of Shot text displays BACK TO SCENE Ignore it e Type on the computer screen RICK 1interruptinqg the Magic Watch this ON THE COMPUTER SCREEN 29 Add Action e Press RETURN e Type the next paragraph of Action Editable electronic index cards one for each scene of a screenplay Rick
221. e bottom of the screen is the Bottom Status Bar On its left side is the View toolbar E ea Dialogue 53 Page 3of68 To the right of that is the Element Style identifier which tells you the type of element of the current line Next to that is Line amp Position information telling you where the cursor is located onscreen To the right of that is the Page Number Button which displays Current Page Number information Click on it to pop up the Goto Page menu A box on the Goto Page menu marked Goto Scene Listings appears This displays a list of Scene Headings to go to It can also be displayed by right clicking on the Page Number Button If you re writing a document with Act Breaks and Scene Labels such as a Sitcom or Stage Play this button displays a list of specific Acts Scenes to go to 94 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 9 5 6 10 The View Toolbar The View toolbar is located in the lower left hand corner of the document window This toolbar controls the view of your document s contents and has six view icons The NaviDoc View Icon Shows or hides the NaviDoc 160 panel The NaviDoc view has four panels useful for navigating through the document Outline Scenes Notes and Bookmarks The Title Page Publisher Icon Opens the Title Page Publisher ee for creating the document s title page The Index Card View Icon Opens the Index Card 107 vie
222. e breakdown information is automatically transferred to Breakdown Sheets and Production Strips enabling you to easily organize a production schedule and print strips for the Production Board Gorilla Scheduling sex Screenwriter can export tagged breakdown items to a Screenwriter Export file with the file extension SEX This file can be imported directly into Gorilla Scheduling where breakdown information is automatically transferred to Breakdown Sheets and Production Strips enabling you to easily organize a production schedule and print strips for the Production Board CompanyMOVE Showplanner sex Screenwriter can export tagged breakdown items to a file for CompanyMOVE Showplanner FrameForge 3D Studio txt Used to export to the 3D storyboarding software by Innoventive Software LLC e Avid Editor Format txt Used to export to the video editing software by Avid 3 Enter a new File Name for the exported file Screenwriter automatically adds the correct export file extension according to your chosen export format 4 Click on OK to save the export file Importing a Screenwriter Export script To import a Screenwriter export file into another program check that program s manual for Importing instructions If that does not help call the program s Technical Support number and ask how best to do it The document must have been exported from Screenwriter in a format readable by the other program Write Brothers is
223. e buttons are only be available if both you and your partner are on the same platform Windows to Windows or Mac to Mac connections Speaking TIo enable speaking to your partner click on the microphone and Partner will enable your microphone and send anything you say to your partner via Streaming Audio Listening To enable listening to your partner click on the speaker and Partner will enable your speaker so that you can hear anything your partner says via Streaming Audio iPartner Trouble Shooting Known Issues Go to the online technical support site for known iPartner issues Firewall Configuration Information iPartner can communicate over any of the following TCP port numbers 2200 2136 2184 and 2245 At a minimum the firewall will need to allow outbound connection on at least one of these ports The user can select the port number to use so if you only open one port number let the users know which one has been opened iPartner can also accept incoming connections on these same port numbers Although it is not absolutely necessary to allow incoming connections it will be more convenient for the users to allow incoming connections on these ports The optimal configuration for iPartner would be 212 Movie Magic Screenwriter 14 2 14 2 1 Outgoing and Incoming connections allowed on ports 2200 2136 2184 and 2245 A more secure but still fully functional configuration would be Outgoing and
224. e end of the existing file you select in the Open menu e Scrap File Cuts the selected text and places it at the end of an automatically generated Scrap File which has the same name as your document but which ends with Scrap This file is a great place to put text and scenes you want to remove from your document but might want to go back to later e Select All Selects the entire contents of the currently displayed document e Select Special Shows options for selecting by word sentence element group page scene 316 Movie Magic Screenwriter wnrd Alt F5 Sentence Alt F Element Alt F8 Group Alt F1 Page Alt F11 Scene Alt F12 Scene Range Extend Selection e Scene Range Lets you select a scene range from a list of scene headings Select Range of Scenes for Blocking EAT STREET NIGHT EAT HOUSE NIGHT EAT DUMP DAY INT CHURCH DAY EAT STREET DAY ERAT CHURCH ANOTHER ANGLE DAY EAT BEDFORD FALLS STREET WINTER DAY EAT STREET DAY INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAT a ri Ih T MAR Mm nar e Extend Selection l ets you extend the selection beyond the current cursor position Select how to extend Block Extend Block Selection From Current Cursor Position to O End ofthe current Page Start of the Current Page End of the current Scene C3 Start of the Current Scene CO To next Act Scene Break CO
225. e in the NaviDoc displays always when the selection is anywhere within a scene in the document 7 EXT BEDFORD FALLS STREET 9 INT OUTER OFFICE BUILD 10 FULL SHOT THE OFFICES ARE Scene List NG ANI 174 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 10 1 12 10 2 n INT BANK DAY INT BANK DAY _14 INT POTTER S OFFICE The Scene List displays all items in the document designated as a Scene Heading Clicking on a scene in the scene list scrolls the document to that scene heading When the text selection is within the scene heading of the document the scene heading in the scenes list is outlined and highlighted When the text selection is anywhere else within the scene in the document the scene heading in the scene list is outlined but not highlighted sal Notes Bookmarks NES Bite The Scene Controls affect the display of the scene list in the Scenes Panel These controls do not affect the document Sort Scenes Control Y Sort by Scene Number Sort by Int Ext Sort by Location Sort by Time of day This control changes the display of the scene order in the Scenes Panel based on the parameters chosen Scenes may be sorted by Scene Number Interior Exterior Location or Time of Day Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 175 12 10 3 12 10 4 12 10 5 12 10 6 Scene Header View Control Y Scene Number E 4 Int Ext El v Time
226. e panel by clicking NaviDoc Outline CONTROL 1 You can access the NaviDoc panels via the NaviDoc menu 3 Press RETURN 4 First let S outline the Acts Click Yes or press RETURN to put in a FADE IN The Scene Heading pop up will come up 5 Choose Make this an Outline Element by pressing the o key Also You can use the arrows keys to select an item and press RETURN or just click on the item with the mouse 6 Choose Act to insert a blank Act outline element 7 Type in n the first act introduce the main character and establish their objective 8 Press RETURN to insert another Act element 9 Type in n the second act present the main character s conflict 10 Press RETURN to insert another Act element 11 Type in Hesolve the main character s conflict Now we will type a couple of scenes 12 Click at the very end of the first Act outline element 13 Press RETURN 14 Promoting and Demoting outline elements CTRL LEFT RIGHT ARROWS allows you to change an outline element into a different outline style thus placing it in a different level in the hierarchy Let s make this Act into a Scene by demoting it Press CTRL RIGHT ARROW twice 15 Type in This scene establishes the tone of the first Act 16 PressRETURN three times 17 On the Scene Heading pop up press i for INT 18 Type in SUBURBAN HOME KITCHEN 19 Press RETURN 20 On the Times of Day pop up press d for DAY 21 Press RETURN 22 Type i
227. e s continued Dialogue when it s split by a Page Break For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc 264 Movie Magic Screenwriter Dialogue Put Dialogue on Same Line as Character Name Cont d Dialogue shouldn t have Character Names Cont d Dialogue Shouldn t have Character Select this option to have Movie Magic Screenwriter hide all Character Names to which it applies automatic Cont ds If you have this option selected then these Continued Names will appear in the script in a GRAY color to identify that they will not print and they will be ignored by the pagination routines NOTE The ONLY format in which this is used in the professional world is in play writing and we HIGHLY recommend that you do not use this setting in a screenplay or teleplay Put Dialogue on the same line as Character Names Select this option to have Movie Magic Screenwriter put dialogue on the same line as the Character Names i e Radio Script otyle so that it will look like the following MARK True but despite the fact that you read many plays printed in this format it is not the one used in the professional play writing world NOTE When you are in the Radio Script format Quick Type functions a little differently to accommodate the text flow in this format Typing in a known Character Name on a blank action line and then pressing the colon automatically takes you to Dialogue In aadition pressing
228. e the same first letter type enough letters of the location until the location you want is highlighted and press RETURN The Location is entered for you complete with correct spacing WI ee AO INT OFFICE Next enter a Time of Day Time of Day Enter a Time of Day by pressing RETURN after typing your Location A Pop up list displays with Time of Day options CONTINUOUS MOMENTS LATER Never Mind You can either click on a pop up list item with the mouse or press the Hot Key designated by the underline for that item For example type d for DAY to enter DAY and the correct spacing and dashes before it Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 119 10 7 10 8 Doce AM cee ra INT OFFICE NIGHT The Time of Day is entered and the cursor moves to a new Action element Action The Action element is used for the description of what is happening in a scene e Press RETURN to go to a new paragraph of Action e Press RETURN twice to go to a new Scene Heading element e Press TAB to go to a Character Name element Character Name The Character Name element ALL CAPS denotes which character is speaking To enter a Character Name that s already been used in this script 1 Press RETURN A Pop up list of available Character Names displays Character Names ANNIE ANOTHER MAN BERT BOUNCER CARTER CHARLIE 2 Type the first letter of the character s name you want The name
229. e the word to the left of the caret Jomi DELETE Delete the character to the right of the caret Delete the word to the right of the caret mM Delete to End of Line Modifier key for Preserve Reset SHIFT Cheating on Paste Drag Two different hint alerts explain the behavior of holding down the SHIFT key during a drag or paste operation one for paste drop within the same document one for paste drop into a different document ow oz FORWARD DELETE FORWARD CMD DELETE FORWARD CMD OPTION DELETE 342 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 2 2 Shortcut Keys for Inserting and Manipulating Elements Shortcut Keys for Inserting Manipulating Elements Insert Action Element CONTROL MEN TAB Shift Tab inserts the previously used Character Name Insert Character Name into text I CONTROL OPTION Insert a Scene Heading starting with EXT CONTROL Insert a Scene Heading starting with INT CONTROL Insert Character Element insert a Transition pcowrra t Insert Parenthetical Element When in Dialogue SHIFT Insert Character Extension When in Character Element SHIFT Title Centers the current Element SHIFT Fo Drop down the Element menu oOo ee a ee Set current element to Left Column EM CONTROL uM NECEM Set Current Element to Right Column MEN CONTROL R O Set current element to Full Width CONTROL F Insert Left Parenthesis When in Dialogue SHIFT CONTROL
230. eak Press the FORWARD DELETE key Soft Hyphen A Soft Hyphen can be used to break a word at the end of a line to give the right margin a smoother look If the text is subsequently edited so that the word is no longer broken the soft hyphen is ignored 1 Put the cursor in the word where you want the Soft Hyphen to be inserted 2 Press CTRL Ctrl Dash Hard Dash A Hard Dash is similar to a regular dash except that it keeps the two words either side of it together For example inserting a hard dash between set and up in the word set up ensures that the word won t be broken by the end of a line word wrap feature 1 Put the cursor in the word where you want the Hard Dash to be inserted 2 Press CTRL SHIFT Ctrl Shift Dash Hard Space A Hard Space is similar to a regular space except that it keeps the two words either side of it together For example inserting a Hard Space between Production and Studio in the phrase Production Studio ensures that the word won t be broken by the end of a line word wrap feature e Put the cursor in the phrase where you want the Hard Space to be inserted Or select the regular space between the two words e Press SHIFT CMD SPACE 132 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 24 10 25 10 25 1 Hard Return To end a line short and start a new line e g lyrics or poetry enter a Hard Return at the cursor position e Under the Edit menu select
231. earance of the line that separates the scenes in the scene list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid and Groove e Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel This option controls the appearance of adjacent scenes in the scene list The appearance of adjacent scenes may be the same or they may alternate between two different styles This option controls the font color and background color for both the even and odd rows Scene List View Controls iT These controls determine the font size and lines of visible text for the scenes in the scene list of the Scenes Panel e Font Size Control right vertical slider This control sets the font size for the text in the scene list The default position is the middle of the slider and corresponds to the font size set in the Scenes Panel option Sliding up reduces the font size to a minimum of 10 points smaller than the default font size Sliding down increases the font size to a maximum of 10 points greater than the default font size The keyboard commands for decreasing and increasing the NaviDoc font size are CTRL and CTRL so ff 12 pt i Viewable Scene Lines Control left vertical slider This control sets the number of viewable lines of each scene in the scene list The default position of the slider is all the way up and corresponds to one line viewable the minimum number of lines allowed Moving the slider down increases the number of viewable lines Movi
232. ears on all panels and effects them globally When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 181 the sync frame around that row With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled 12 11 10 Outline View Controls nn These controls determine the font size and lines of visible text for the outline styles in the outline list of the Outline Panel 13 lines Ri Set number of Scene lines left vertical slider This control sets the number of viewable lines of each Scene Heading in the outlines list The default position of the slider is all the way up and corresponds to one line viewable the minimum number of lines allowed Moving the slider down increases the number of viewable lines NOTE The maximum number of lines viewable is determined by the scene content rg Su 5 lines Bid iy Set number of Outline item lines middle vertical slider This control sets the number of viewable lines of each outline element in the outline list The default position of the slider is all the way up and corresponds to one line viewable the minimum number of lines allowed Moving the slider down increases the number of viewable lines a ESO 2 default size k E Scale font
233. ed IP address if connected by network or some high speed Internet connections you can give the IP address to your writing partner and they will be able to use that address anytime they want to connect to you If you are connecting via a Dial up connection meaning your computer calls your Internet Provider every time you wish to connect to the internet your IP will change each time you connect to the Internet This means one of you will need to communicate the other s IP address to the other person every time You can do this by one of the following ways e Calling the person on the telephone e Sending the IP to them in a text message on their mobile phone e Sending the IP via an instant message service such as AOL instant Messenger Yahoo Instant Messenger MSN Messenger Google Talk ICQ etc e E mailing the IP address However this can take as long as a day depending on your e mail provider Enter Partner s IP or Let Partner do it This allows you and your partner to enter each other s IP address for iPartner to make a connection Click Enter Partner s IP if you wish to enter your Partner s IP address to connect or if Let Partner do it if you wish to have your partner enter your IP address Whichever one you choose your partner will need to choose the other one in order for a connection to be made Who ever initiates the connection does not affect how iPartner performs both people will have the same privileges and capabi
234. ed if the document is saved while in the new editing session e Every time a document is saved Screenwriter creates a bk file every time a document is saved Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 239 15 5 4 15 5 5 15 5 6 Automatic Timed Backups Automatic Timed Backups TMB files Timed Backup Frequency 5 a Minutes Timed Backup Sound None ped Screenwriter has a data security function that makes a temporary Timed Backup of your document at regular intervals In an emergency situation such as a power outage you can retrieve the timed backup and use the data The timed backup is a separate process from regular file saving It automatically backs up the file you re working on when its timer activates Always save your documents separately before you exit Screenwriter Make Backups of your documents to another drive or medium such as a floppy disk tape drive CD DVD network server etc e Timed Backup Frequency Set this to between 1 and 60 minutes 15 is the default If you try to set it to O or greater than 60 minutes it changes to 60 minutes when you exit the menu e Timed Backup Sound Use this sound to remind you that the bk file has been created when you save your document The default is set to None Password Protect Documents Password Protection keeps unauthorized people from reading your documents When saving a document you ll be asked to enter a password twice for confirmat
235. ediately before the outline element below the bold line NOTE The Outline Styles options have several options that control how you can move outline elements 12 11 18 Using the NaviDoc Outline Panel to Reassign Outline Element Styles in the Document The NaviDoc Outline Panel scene list may be used to promote and demote outline elements in the list via Drag and Drop When you reassign an outline element s style via drag and drop in the NaviDoc Outline Panel outline list the style of the corresponding material is reassigned in the document The following example promotes a Note outline element to a Sequence o Select the outline item to be promoted or demoted 188 Movie Magic Screenwriter o Click and drag your cursor LEFT promote or RIGHT demote in the list In this example the Note is promoted four levels to Sequence The small tic marks indicating the number of style promotions o Release the mouse button to drop the outline element at the position indicated by the flyover text The item in the document is automatically reassigned to the new style NOTE The Outline Styles options have several options that control how you can move outline elements 12 11 19 A Note About Copying Styles Between Documents The rules for copying outline styles between documents are very simple If the style name of the source Outline Elements copied matches the style name in the destination pasted EXACTLY the des
236. ef Homicide def Just Shoot Me def King of the Hill def Larry Sanders def Law amp Order def Le Femme Nikita def Living Single def Mad About You def Melrose Place def Men Behaving Badly def Millennium def Murphy Brown def My Big Fat Greek Life def Nash Bridges def New York Undercover def News Radio def NYPD Blue def Party of 5 def Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 361 Promised Land def Providence def Queer as Folk def Sabrina def ocrubs def oimpsons def Sliders def omartGuy def South Park def opin City def otar Trek Deep Space 9 def Star Trek Voyager def style and Substance def Suddenly Susan def The Nanny def Touched By an Angel def Veronicas Closet def Walker Texas Ranger def X Files def Xena def Young and Restless def Blank Templates Generic Comic Template def Gosset amp Kayle Comic Sample def Novel Template def Radio Show Template def ocreen def Sitcom1 def Sitcom2 def Spec Script def Stage Play def 362 Movie Magic Screenwriter Index BK files 235 mmsw 23 scw 23 311 312 TPG 102 Preserve Reset Cheating on Paste Drag 341 1Page 197 2Pgs 197 A subfolder named Previous Versions 235 Abobe Acrobat 198 About 339 Accent Aigue 151 Accent Grave 151 Accented Characters 151 ACT 124 140 Act Breaks 267 Act Info 195 Act Information 115 196 Act Scene Info 136 138 140 324 Action 109 115 119 129 130 266 342 Action In
237. el of manual control over Scene and Page Locking should an unusual situation arise Be careful when altering Locking features as some procedures are not reversible Always save a copy of the script before attempting any of the following procedures In a Locked script many Locking options can be changed by selecting Unlock the Script under the Production menu and unchecking the appropriate check boxes Changing the Level of Locking When the script has too many revision marks a production company may decide to send out the entire document with all the numbers reverted to normal numbering To do this with Screenwriter you need to step back undo ing one or more levels of Locking Under the Format menu select Element Styles Click on the Locked Scripts button Select the level of locking lower than currently set For example if you have Multi Locked Scene Numbers but only want Locked Scene Numbers with all the Multi Locked A Scenes 64A1 for example renumbered to be normal A Scenes uncheck Multi Locked Scene Numbers by checking Locked Scene Numbers NOTE If you unlock either a script s Page Breaks or Scene Headings all of the appropriate A Numbering is completely and permanently lost That s why it s important to make backup copies of your scripts at least daily Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 287 16 5 2 Overriding a Scene Number To manually override the number of an individual Scene Heading or Scene L
238. else under Format Edit User Lists End of Act text Load the Template Enter topic text here Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 87 6 1 6 2 Basic Information e Mac OS X s e Selecting Screenwriter Commands sz e Screenwriter Help se e Menus 8s e Push Buttons so e Checkboxes oo e Radio Buttons 1 2T Numerical Input Fields ls e The Editing Screen s1 e Opening a Document 9 e Saving a Document s e Merging Documents ss Using OS X Using Movie Magic Screenwriter and this manual assumes a basic familiarity with Macintosh OS X Teaching or supporting the operating system is beyond the scope of this documentation For help with OS X go to your Apple OS X manual OS X online Help or contact Apple Corporation Here is a link to some General Computer Tutorials for Mac located at Screenplay com http www screenplay com support tutorials index html Selecting Screenwriter Commands There is usually more than one way of performing a function in Screenwriter For ease of use this manual shows you how to select commands using the Mouse and the Main Menu Bar As you become more familiar with Screenwriter you many want to use Keyboard Shortcuts and Toolbar Icons F di Screenwriter File Edit View Format Goto NaviDoc Tools Production Window LRL ir sates 2 cy Mw c oo FR SF Genwe a sve To see what command a Toolbar Icon represents use the mouse to
239. ement is ALT LEFT ARROW e Click on the Demote button Right Arrow to demote move to a lesser level in the hierarchy the outline element by assigning the style below the current style in the Outline Styles table The keyboard command for demoting an outline element is ALT RIGHT ARROW 192 Movie Magic Screenwriter 13 13 1 Printing the Document Before printing a document there needs to be at least one printer specified in the Mac OS X control panel With only one printer connected Mac OS X automatically selects it as the default Page Setup ocreenwriter uses Mac OS X s Page Setup screen to let you choose default settings for all your printing in Screenwriter Under the File menu select Page Setup The Print Setup screen displays with the name of your currently selected printer in the Format for popup list Page Setup Settings Page Attributes Format for Any Printer Paper Size US Letter 8 50 in x 11 00 in Orientation Scale 100 56 Cancel e To select another printer scroll through the list of connected printers in the Format for popup list and click on your choice e Select a Paper Size US Letter is the standard 8 1 2 by 11 paper used for screenplays in the United States International paper size is generally A4 210mm x 297mm e Select a Paper Orientation Portrait is the standard orientation for printing 8 1 2 by 11 screenplay pages e Click on OK
240. ement styles into an existing document you can choose to keep some existing formats or load new formatting from the layout This is done through the Format gt Load Styles from menu Select either e Template Loads styles from a Screenwriter template e From Screenwriter Document Loads styles from any Screenwriter document Saving a Document To save an open file display it onscreen If you have multiple documents open select the file to display by clicking on its name at the bottom of the Window menu A checkmark appears next to its name and it becomes the currently displayed file Under the File menu select a save option Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 97 6 11 1 Close Exits the document without exiting Screenwriter If you have made changes without saving it prompts you to save the file only if you have added something to your document If you remove portions of your document and never add anything to it the program will never ask you to save Save Saves your document under its current name or asks for a new name if you haven t already named the file Save As Goes to the Save As menu You can change the document name its subdirectory or file format Save All Open Documents Saves all files you have open if they have changes that need saving Prompts you for save options for each file if needed Exit Closes all documents and exits Screenwriter Prompts you to save any open
241. en dialogue is split by an Action element e No Automatic Character Continueds lf checked Continued is not added to the Character Name on the second speech e Extension lf checked Continued is placed in parentheses after the Character Name for example KATY CONT D on the second speech e Only when Extensions Match lf checked adds a Continued to the Character Name on the second speech only if both speeches are of the same type e g V O Unchecked adds a Continued even if the first speech was normal Dialogue and the second is V O for example e Parenthetical lf checked Continued is placed in a Parenthetical element beneath the Character Name on the second speech Continued Separator Allows you to enter a character to use to separate a Character Name Extension from a Character Name Continued Default is the semi colon The Set Style option lets you determine how Character Name Extensions and Continueds are separated either by the Separator character or by parentheses Cont d Text Lets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc More Cont d Lets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text to use at the end of a page s broken Dialogue when it s split by a Page Break For example Cont d CONT D Continued CONTINUED etc More Text L ets you enter your choice of Character Name Continued text to use at the beginning of the next pag
242. ena hse it teigutr a les s sara 78 Ghalacter Nai aiio da otro aret iniciales 79 Dialogue NND 80 Parenthetical iaa bis da hve i 80 TEANSLON A ai 81 OtheriFormatting Element RETE ET 82 Gharacie EXtensSiOns METER 83 CONTD ICG haraci r Nam iia di 83 MORE and CONT da a o do de 84 Sitcom format Step by step Basics ccccccccecssscsccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeecesnceccaasesseeeeeeeeeeeecescccacsssseseeeeereeeessenss 85 lac the Template tcs tcc 86 Basic INTORMAUOM t a eveussncesussaewaneveeasassceecanuesastuswesnteetonsascests 87 USING nn aa a eaaa A ERREN aiaa E 87 Selecting Screenwriter CommandsS nn ip Uta deese e EAE XAR e ree Oda e Sosa eens 87 OMENS HEID wwe 88 Men s Nt 88 Pall DOWA MENU eT A aa caue Sanaa 89 Ex DU a o dildo nta cate dace 89 OPUIONS MENU li ea qaveca tangas 89 PUSA BUIOAS cc 90 e Mc rhe 90 rl A EAA EE AE E a KAE OE araa LA CEE AEEA AEA a 91 TEXtor Numerical Input Fields ii i a aa iaa E aiaa a aaa ai eaa E aAa aat 91 A Eaa a aE A E E a 91 NPT VIS GS Mi Soe ack ete 92 OPO ON A setae Deas PP DOT RR TEE MENTO 93 Eight TOOID at un at Sena diate oat UU Umm
243. end in order to format the next sentence correctly Correct Capitalization Spacing when Run Manually lf checked when Spell Check is run from the Spell menu it auto corrects Sentence spacing and capitalization without prompting you first This way sentence spacing and capitalization will be corrected even if Auto Correct is off Ignore Capitalization when Checking Words lf checked allows unusual Capitalization of words and sentences when Spell Checking a document Unchecked Spell Check expects correct Capitalization of sentences proper names etc 246 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 8 Misc Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Misc Preferences Editing Files SmartCheck Spelling Mise Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog MaviDoc Outline bee Miscellaneous Options Cc Y Display Headers Footers On Screen WYSIWYG Chat Sound TweetTweet vi Display Page Break Type on Screen This sound will play if iPartner ER receives a chat message and the us Show Swear Words in Thesaurus chat window is not in front Draw Text Anti Aliased M Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter i F Don t put at end start of broken Action Configure 9 Acts Like Save Bring Document to the Front F3 Acts Like Save As amp Leave Collapsed Search Window in Front Pagination E Js z 1 i Pf y 1 es f i Paginate When l m Idle For 0 6 seco
244. ent Page lf selected prints the page that the cursor is currently on e Forwards lf selected prints from the current page through to the end of the document e Entire Document lf selected prints the entire document If you have created a title page in the Title Page Publisher it is also printed e Selected Text lf checked prints the text block you have selected in your document If no text is selected this option is grayed out and unselectable Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 199 e Selected Pages lf selected prints the Pages you select Enter the page numbers in the same order they appear in the document i e lower numbers first Enter individual page numbers separated by commas 1 3 32 Enter a section of consecutive pages using a dash between the first and last page 45 78 or 89 end Or combine the two methods 1 3 32 45 78 89 end e Selected Scenes lIf selected prints the Scenes you select Enter the scene numbers in the same order they appear in the document i e lower numbers first Enter individual scene numbers separated by commas 1 3 32 Enter a section of consecutive scenes using a dash between the first and last scene 45 78 or 89 end Or combine the two methods 1 3 32 45 78 89 end List Click on this button to see a List Menu of all the scenes in your document with their Scene Headings Select a scene by clicking on tt De select a scene by clicking on it again OK
245. ents with reduced windows overlapping each other The most recently opened document is at the front becoming the currently displayed file Switching between Windows If all the windows are visible on screen switch between them by clicking anywhere on a document s window If the windows are Maximized i e at full screen size then e Select the document to display by clicking on its name at the bottom of the Window menu e Or press CMD where is the number between 1 and 9 that corresponds to the document window to cycle between the open windows Opening a Previously Saved Version When you tell Screenwriter to save a document it makes a backup copy of any previously saved version with the same name The suffix MMSW is changed to BK for the previous version If you need to go back to that previous version load the BK file 1 Under the File menu select Open 2 Change the File Type from Screenwriter Documents to Prev Saved Document 3 Select from the list of available BK files changing the subdirectory drive or file type if necessary 4 Click on OK to open the file Now both versions of the file the old BK and the latest SCW are open Switch between them under the Window menu To keep a copy of the BK version save it under a different name for example if the filename is OSCAR BK save it as OSCAR1 SCW Leaving its name with the suffix BK allows it to be overwritten next time you save which is not
246. enu Outline elements only 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the Element to be changed Or select a portion of the element to change 2 In the Outline panel of the NaviDoc Ctrl 1 click on the Current Outline Style pop up menu 3 Select the Outline element style to switch to by clicking on it from the list Change Element Type menu 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the Element to be changed Or select a portion of the element to change 2 Under the Format menu select Change Element Type Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 129 10 17 3 Select the element type to switch to by clicking on it from the list Moving Between Elements With QuickType enabled pressing Tab or Return in one element either moves you to a new default element or displays a List menu of available options If you Type QuickType will FADE IN Display Scene Heading Initial Text or any Transition menu INT EXT etc If you Press RETURN while QuickType will in Display Scene Heading Initial Text Transition menu INT EXT etc blank Scene Heading Scene Label or End of Act Scene Heading Display a List Menu of all unique without Location Locations already in the script Scene Heading Display a List Menu of Time of Day with Location DAY NIGHT etc End of Action Add another Action Element Character Name Add a Dialogue Element If the next element is Dialogue or Parenthetical it moves to the
247. er button will change to View Partner to indicate that you are viewing your partner s document Since at this point you can only view the document and cannot edit without the Master s permission you are considered in Slave view Editing in Slave view Normally in Slave view you are unable to have any control over what part of the document you are viewing or make changes in it However it is possible for the Master to grant you permission to edit the document While you can edit the document it is important to realize you are viewing a document on another s computer You will not be able to use any of your menu commands function key s or quick entry features such as pop up lists of Character Names or Locations This feature is mainly for the purpose of editing or rewriting existing text in a collaborative type of environment If the Slave needs to do major rewriting it would probably be better to use the Send Document feature so they can have full use of their program You may also experience slow screen refreshes and typing rates since you are actually editing the document on the Master s computer A Slave can request control of the document by simply placing the mouse pointer anywhere over the document and clicking The Master will then receive the following request Attention Your partner wishes to type in the document This can cause problems if you both try to edit at once or if you move around in the document while your par
248. er names listed in each scene are capitalized e Font Let s you select the printing font of the listed characters e Size Let s you select the printing font size of the listed characters e Always Print Set List with Rundown Sheets lf checked prints a list of Sets after printing the Rundown Sheets e Put in Clipboard Rather than Print Sends the report to the clipboard You may then open another program e g a word processor and paste the report into a document from the clipboard e Header This tab displays the text that appears at top of the page Footer Replacement Codes L Header on Every Page Preview Text with Replacements _ Print Now Cancel i il e F Use the buttons to insert variable text in the Header Press the Preview Text with Replacements to preview the substitution text Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 337 First 1 23 07 SETS e Footer Text This tab displays the text that appears at the bottom of the page Options Header Footer Replacement Codes __ Footer on Every Page Preview Text with Replacements Print Now Cancel Use the buttons to insert variable text in the Footer Press the Preview Text with Replacements to preview the substitution text Scene Character Lists Selecting this option will generate lists of all the characters in each scene and puts that list immediately under each s
249. erts a Scene Heading starting with INT 342 Inserts a Transition 342 Inserts Character Extension 342 Inserts Left Parenthesis 342 Inserts Parenthetical 342 INT 129 140 202 int 115 Interactive 103 Interior 202 Interior VS Exterior 202 204 292 iPartner 210 211 327 IP Address 206 Italicized 261 Italics 149 150 343 358 alls Justified 261 K Keep Capitalization of Original Word 157 Keep Element Together 135 342 358 Keep Group Together 342 Key Assignments 87 340 Keyboard 252 Keyboard Commands Icon 18 Keyboard Options 222 Keyboard Selection 146 keyboard shortcut 254 Keyboard Shortcuts 87 La Last Position 324 last saved position 239 Last Workspace 237 LATER 140 Layout Breakdown Sheets 332 Index 369 Learn 153 Leave You ina Blank Script 96 Left 100 265 LEFT ARROW 145 Left Column 1382 342 Left Parenthesis 342 Left Promotes row 179 Left to Right 100 left vertical slider 170 Left Click 146 Letters A B C 196 Line Spacing 135 261 Line Spacing Format 186 Lines Before 135 List 198 List Characters in Each Scene 205 295 335 List Menu 88 89 List Non Speaking Characters 205 Listening 211 Lists 139 Load Script Format 103 Load Styles From 321 Load User Lists from 142 321 Loading Element Styles 96 Loading User Lists 140 Location 118 129 136 202 204 292 Locations 139 140 Locations after INT EXT selection 230 Locations List 198 Lock Current Rev
250. es e New Screenwriter 6 0 Icons Mac OSX Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 has new program document and other file icons Application Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 program Document Icon This is the icon for Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 documents Backup Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 backup files Timed Backup Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 timed backup files Template Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 template files Title Page Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 title page files Keyboard Commands Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 keyboard command settings Dictionary Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 dictionary files Preferences Icon This is the icon for the Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 preferences settings files Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 19 4 2 Screenwriter 6 0 Menu Changes The menus in Screenwriter 6 0 have under gone a major reorganization This was done for two reasons e To accommodate the NaviDoc and other new features in the menus e We felt that many of the menu items were either non intuitively named or placed and benefited from changing them We believe this makes the program easier to use and learn There is a new NaviDoc menu renamed commands and rearrangement
251. es panel or deleting the entire contents of a note in the document 1 Follow the steps above to add a couple of notes to a document 2 Open the Notes panel CTRL 3 if it is not already open 3 Select the first note in the Notes panel by clicking on it 4 Click the Delete Note button The note should be removed from the document 5 In the document side highlight the second note entirely 6 Press DELETE on the keyboard The note should be removed from the document 62 Movie Magic Screenwriter 5 2 6 Bookmarks Panel The Bookmarks Panel tutorials include e Adding and Removing Bookmarks sz e Editing Bookmarks ez e Navigating the Document ss Adding and Removing Bookmarks Bookmarks in Screenwriter serve much the same purpose a physical bookmark would to help you get back to a particular place in the story Click on File Open to open the Screenplay Sample file which is located in the Samples Files folder Adding a Bookmark 1 Switch to the Bookmarks panel CTRL 44 2 Scroll down to page two 3 Click on the dialogue that says Chameleon you there 4 Press CTRL B to make a new bookmark Alternatively you can click on NaviDoc gt New Bookmark or the Add Bookmark button on the Bookmarks panel The name of the bookmark is automatically set to the line of text where the cursor is blinking in the document Deleting a Bookmark 1 Make sure the Chameleon you there bookm
252. ese rra n enun nnn nnn n nnn nnne nnn nnn nnne nnn nn 201 Production Breakdowns Print OPIO Sn a Raid ca 202 oecondary Sort Dy io iceecidS 203 Secondary Sort by Production Breakdown Print Options sesessesesessse sese 204 Miscellaneous Production Breakdown Print Options ssssssesesee eee 205 14 Other Screenwriter Features iii cad 206 IRAnDER MN Ute eee TE 206 Connecting TOR Arner 0 dd co dee te HO A cosa 206 eC Hat ee e EE 208 Editing TA SIA VG i Remi Mm A ds 209 Slave view ecitig oabablliligS qaas Ses vaveued sensed in trderuas reido aca 209 Editirig KEY SIA WRAP T seco pee daret aieo dd e DO 210 Revoking Slave s editing privileges cite Qu repe A A ove FOE eu a Ea vua FER VERRE CU DUE C da ey 211 Ending ING SESSION yuan stacy D Y 211 Using the Voice feature to talk to your Partnel ccseeeececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeaaeasueeeeeeesaeaueeeeeseseaaseeeeseesnaaseees 211 Partner Trouble Shooting Known ISSHBS sioe ea o ad eee d esten eel eerie 211 Firewall Configuration IO Massa 211 O 212 SEUD VOICOD disi besos sa Rede A da liada 212 Speak SE SCHON ket EPI MM E 215 Volce Commands 55 un dete a sca ra aca rece aces capes cect seca gs cs S AI UL IE 215 Setting Up Mac OS X for Voice Recognition ideen arena anaa aa Eia EE a ea AAAA Aaaa ainiaan iait 216 Send As Email Attachment Command sssssnssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnnnnnnnn
253. ete the entire scene Delete the scene heading only Don t ask me again C Cancel j 185 e Delete the entire scene or Delete entire element and it s children This option removes the outline element and everything contained within the element e Delete the scene heading only or Delete the parent element only This option ONLY removes the selected outline item and leaves all other material untouched 12 11 15 Add Outline Element Control Act Break Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Label Note Shoat Title Centered Transition Sequence Scene Beat Create Edit Outline Styles This control inserts a new outline item into the document and the outline list The outline style selected from the list of available styles determines the type of outline item added to the document The NaviDoc menu also has commands for setting outline style assignments The keyboard command for adding elements including outline items is F4 186 Movie Magic Screenwriter Hines Scenes Notes Bookmarks WW Toe Sequence Scene Label scene Scene Heading Beat Script Notes 18 Create Edit Outline Styles 12 11 16 Outline Styles Format Options The upper part of the Outline Styles format options controls how the styles appear in the document _Margins in Inches an n Left 1 8 Right 13 Justified al Ed i Line Spacing in
254. file located in the Sample Files folder 2 Open the Scenes panel CTRL 2 Alternatively you can click on NaviDoc gt Scenes 3 Click on the Show Hide Scene Heading Fields button on the Scenes panel Y Scene Number a 4X Int Ext Hi Y Time of Day 4 Click on the INT EXT option Now the INT EXT s of the scene headings are no longer shown 5 Click on the other options to see how it changes the way scenes are displayed in the ocenes panel Notes Panel The Notes Panel tutorials include e Note Panel Controls se e Creating and Deleting Note Categories so e Adding and Removing Notes in the Document so Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 59 Note Panel Controls There are some controls specific to the Outline Panel Hide Show Note Categories in NaviDoc BE I EE Qs ws QE v Y Show All Categories in NaviDoc Hide All Categories in NaviDoc Y LL Default ScriptNote Y C ScriptNote Category 1 Ho x E ScriptNote Category 2 This controls which Note categories are displayed in the NaviDoc Hide Show Note Categories in Document p T rau m x a O Dn E 4 Y Show All Categories in NaviDoc Hide All Categories in NaviDoc Y LL Default Note Y LL Note Category 1 Y E Note Category 2 This controls which Note categories are displayed in the document Print Notes HA This button brings up the window where you can choose how you want to print
255. flashes o Flash Pointer times This option sets the speed at which the pointer flashes Don t Flash Slowly Quickly and Super Fast o Disappear after Flashing This option sets the speed at which the pointer disappears after flashing When Type or Click Very slow fade Slow fade Medium fade Fast fade Instantly Row Height This option controls whether the items in the NaviDoc list are uniform or variable o Variable less wasted space This option allows varied item heights The maximum height is related to the item text and the number of visible lines allowed whichever is less o Fixed faster resizing on slow computers This option sets a uniform item height dependent on the maximum number of visible lines allowed If an item s text is shorter than the number of visible lines the balance of the space is blank 128 Notes Panel The NaviDoc Notes Panel replaces the Note Commander feature in earlier versions of Movie Magic Screenwriter The Notes Panel is used to add remove modify and navigate to notes in your document It is also used to create and control note categories a new feature The Notes Panel can be displayed by clicking on the Notes tab in the NaviDoc The keyboard command for showing the Notes Panel is CTRL 43 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 165 JOSEPH S VOICE Yes sir END OF MONTAGE CONTINUED George is walking along the sidewalk reading a newspaper It is a ra
256. for all scenes in the document are printed e All Scenes except OMITTEDs If checked breakdowns for all scenes except those deleted and marked with an OMITTED are printed e Setup Breakdown Sheet Clicking on this button displays the Breakdown Sheet Layout screen Category headings on the windows can be renamed by highlighting the name CAST STUNTS etc and typing in your preferred name Categories of tagged items Cast Members Greenery Vehicles etc can be moved between Category windows by dragging and dropping Click on OK to exit and save your changes Cancel to discard changes and exit Secondary Sort by Example Secondary sort order allows you to specify how you want the scenes sorted within the Primary groupings of Interior VS Exterior Location Time of Day or Characters For example Interior VS Exterior as the Primary sort and Script Order as a Secondary sort would give this kind of breakdown EXTERIOR T HOSPITAL gt DAY 2 a SL 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 2 5 67 S 2 1 8 INTERIOR 2 HOSPITAL DAY 2 7 23948 3 EMERGENCY ROOM DAY 2 9 078 6 EMERGENCY ROOM EVENING 525 27E 204 Movie Magic Screenwriter 13 5 3 lI 2 8 With Location as the Secondary sort the same document would breakdown with the locations grouped together alphabetically EXTERIOR 1 HOSPITAL DAY 1 2 1 1 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING 4 5 6798 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 2 d o INTERIOR
257. ft Margin of Page Speech Numbering e On Right Margin of Page Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s right margin e On Left Margin of Page Prints dialogue numbers in the speech s left margin 15 12 2 Character Name Position Character Name Position fe Above Dialogue gt To Left of Dialoque Character Name Position 256 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Above Dialogue Prints the Character Name above the dialogue speech normal position e To Left of Dialogue Prints the Character Name at the left of the dialogue speech 15 12 3 Dialogue Spacing Dialogue Spacing Use Spacing in Script r3 p _ Use Double Spacing Dialogue Spacing e Use Spacing in Script Prints the dialogue using the same spacing as in the original Script e Use Double Spacing Prints with the dialogue double spaced 15 12 4 Dialogue Capitalization Dialogue Capitalization NENNEN fe Use Capitalization in Script Always Capitalize Dialogue Dialogue Capitalization e Use Capitalization in Script Prints the dialogue using the same Capitalization as in the original script e Always Capitalize Dialogue Prints Dialogue speeches in ALL CAPS 15 125 Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches fe Use the Normal Character Name Blank Lines Before Set Blank Lines Before To 1 Blank Lines before Printed Speeches e Use the Normal Character Name Blank Li
258. fter A Page This option only affects the numbering of Page Breaks that are inserted into a script with Multi Locked Page Breaks and fall between two existing A Pages e 2C1 Choose this option if you want a new Page Break added in this case to be numbered as Number Letter Number For example a Page inserted between Page 12A and 12B would be 12A1 the next one would be 12A2 and so on e 2CA Choose this option if you want a new page break added and numbered as Number Letter Letter Multilock After Normal Page Determines how a Multi Lock Page inserted between a Normal Page and an A Page is numbered e 2 A Adds a Dash plus the A Letter after the page number e 2AA Adds the A Letter plus the Multi Lock Letter after the page number e A2 Flips the normal A Page numbering order Revision Mark Revision Mark Text Revision Mark Right Margin 03 4 Revision Mark Text Allows you to enter a character used for printing and displaying all Revision Marks in this document Default Revision Mark Text is an Asterisk Revision Mark Right Margin Specifies the distance of the Revision Mark from the right hand side of the page in 1 10ths of an inch A value of 1 0 would print 1 from the right hand side of the page a value of 0 5 would have them print 1 2 etc Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 285 16 4 9 Use Alternate Scene Numbering Alternate Scene Numbering Method Numbering scheme a C3 Standard
259. g Sound Promote Demate Sound Moved Row Sound Cancel peu e Expanding amp Collapsing Outline Elements These options control the conformity and visibility of the outline list with the document and vice versa e Outline Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the outline list They include the font face font size font color and font background color These options only affect the outline list text if the Use this Font for all Outline Items box is 180 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 11 8 12 11 9 checked When not checked each outline item uses its own document font style Row Lines This option controls the appearance of the line that separates the outline items in the outline list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid and Groove e Note Colors in Outline View This option controls the appearance of notes in the outline list The choices are Same color as Note in document and Single color based on Outline otyle Spaces to indent Outline Levels This option controls the indent distance between outline levels The default is two spaces Reduce Indention for Unused Levels This option controls the overall indent of the outline list based on the visibility of each outline style When checked hidden outline styles do not indent the outline list When unchecked outline styles are indented based on their placement in the outline hierarchy
260. g one of the methods described in Selecting Text 148 148 Movie Magic Screenwriter 11 5 3 11 5 4 2 Click on the Edit menu or right click or Ctrl Click on the selected text 3 Choose Copy 4 Click where you want the text to be inserted 5 Click on the Edit menu or right click or Ctrl Click on the selected text 6 Choose Paste NOTE If you want to insert the text from an element into a different type of element e g Action into Dialogue choose Edit Paste into Current Element Cutting Copying Pasting with the Keyboard To cut copy or paste text with the keyboard 1 Select the text using one of the methods described in Selecting Text Make this a link 2 To Copy the text press CMD C on the keyboard To Cut move the text press CMD X on the keyboard 3 Click where you want the text to be inserted 4 Press CMD V on the keyboard to paste the text NOTE If you want to insert the text from an element into a different type of element e g Action into Dialogue press CMD OPTION V to use the Paste into Current Element command Dragging and Dropping Text can be moved by the Drag N Drop method using the mouse 1 Select the text to move using your preferred selection method See Selecting Text e 2 Using the mouse move the cursor anywhere over the selected text and press the Left mouse button down Hold it down 3 While holding the Left Mouse Button down drag this b
261. gue L 4 Type the Dialogue Press CTRL L 5 Press Tab and type in the next Character Name 6 With the cursor in that element press CTRL R The element is formatted as Character Name R 7 Press RETURN to go to the next element It is a normal Dialogue element 134 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 25 4 8 Type the Dialogue 9 Repeat these Steps until all your Dual Column Dialogue is entered NOTE Dual Columns are only for short pieces of simultaneous dialogue text or short split screen scenes This is not the same as two column A V format used in some documentaries and commercials Currently Movie Magic Screenwriter does not support the two column A V format To change an element from a Dual Column element back to a normal element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the element 2 Under the Format menu select Dual Columns then Normal Full Width Or press CTRL F Dual Column Margins Dual Column margins can be customized to your preference 1 Under the Format menu select Dual Columns then Set Column Margins 2 he Set Column Margins window displays Column Margins Character Names Parentheticals Dialogue Other Elements Cancel e Margins Settings for Element Types The markers on the rulers represent the edges of the columns are measured in inches and can be
262. haracter Names are not read e Read in Character Voice lf selected Character Names are read in their assigned voices Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 213 e Read in Action Voice lf selected Character Names are read in the voice assigned to the Action element Parenthetical Options This area allows you some choices on the way Parentheticals are read in the document e Do not read lf selected the Parentheticals are not read e Read in Character Voice lf selected Parentheticals are read in their assigned Character Name voices e Read in Action Voice lf selected Parentheticals are read in the voice assigned to the Action element Load Voice Association File lf you have assigned voices to a previous document and saved them you can load the voice association file vaf and use it on your current document Save Voice Association File This option allows you to save your current voice allocation settings Clicking this button saves your voice settings to a voice association file vaf The voices that are assigned to this document can now be used for other documents Clear All Clicking this button removes all assigned voices to the elements OK This saves all changes and returns you to your document Cancel This removes all changes and returns you to your document Assign a voice by clicking on an element or Character Name and selecting a voice from the voice popup list r Fred NEN
263. he Alias Text Act Scene Text The Alias for Item A is set to NEWACT When you type NEWACT it starts a new ACT changes the element to ACT BREAK replaces the text with ACT and increases the Act Number The Alias for Item B is set to SAMEACT When you type SAMEACT it changes the element to ACT BREAK replaces the text with ACT but keeps the same Act Number The Alias for Item C is set to NEWSCENE When you type NEWSCENE it changes the element to Scene Label replaces the text with SCENE if appropriate and increases the ocene Number or not depending on whether it follows a New Act and on your settings in the Format Element Styles menu Editing User Lists If you d like Screenwriter to auto format a text item that you type put that text in the User List of the Element it should be formatted as Existing User List text can be changed or deleted Under the Format menu select User Lists You Will see the window below Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 139 10 27 3 10 27 4 Character Names PON FULL amp SHOT Locations Shots Times of Day Transitions Act 5cene Text Proloque Teaser ni ul End of Act FADE IN Substitution Text m Save as Default for all Mew Documents Click on a button in the right column to select a User List to edit Available items for that User List with defaults display Select the text in a lettered Item for example FULL amp
264. he TAB key following a colon in an action line automatically takes you to Dialogue Parentheticals Outdent Parentheticals lf checked wraps parenthetical text so that the second line text lines up under the first line text and not the parenthesis Pushes wrapped text over by one character space Parentheticals are Separate Element lf checked puts Parenthetical text on its own line above the Dialogue and below the Character Name Unchecked puts Parenthetical text on the same line as Dialogue rd Dutdent Parentheticals wal Parentheticals are Separate Elements OUTDENTING is when the left parenthesis is one character to the left of the text of the PARENTHETICAL with the text word wrapping under the first letter rather than under the parenthesis If you do not have PARENTHETICALS AS SEPARATE ELEMENTS checked then parentheticals will be part of the dialogue Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 265 Scene Headings Time of Day Dashes 2 Spaces a ela e Number of 5paces after INT EXT Scene Numbers Left Right mm y Always put Right Number on Line 1 Scene Continued Text Ss Top of Fg CONTINUED Bottom of Pg CONTINUED EES r1 L T Left Margin of Bottom Continued 5 5 Number of Spaces after INT EXT Determines how many character spaces are placed between INT or EXT and the Location when using QuickType popup lists Enter a number between 0 and 9
265. hierarchical document Elements Act or Book Info Scene or Chapter Info Scene or Outline Headings and Shots in the Outline The keyboard command for showing the Outline Panel in the NaviDoc is CTRL 1 Outline Panel Sync Frame When you select an item in the NaviDoc the document is scrolled to that item in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the item in the NaviDoc behaves differently depending on the type of item you select e For standard Document elements Act break scene label scene heading The Sync Frame appears around the item corresponding to the element in the document in which the cursor appears Example If the cursor is in the middle of a scene the Sync Frame still appears around that Scene Heading in the Outline Panel e For Outline Elements Sequences scene label beats notes shots and user defined outline styles The sync frame only displays around the corresponding item in the Outline Panel when the cursor is in that particular Outline Element in the document 190 Movie Magic Screenwriter Outline Tools in the Document View a The Outline Tools in the top toolbar control adding removing reassigning promoting and demoting outline items in the document Scene Heading Adding and Removing Outline Elements in the Document e Press the Add Outline Element button to insert an outline element item into the document You can also add outline elements through the NaviD
266. hole Words Only 157 Window Menu 92 339 Word 146 153 Word Web 32 7 WordPerfect 352 Words One Two Three 196 Workspace 237 Write Brothers 15 WYSIWYG 99 Y Yellow 274 e ar Zoom In 197 Zoom Out 197 Zoom Screen Text 94 224 318 Zoom Screen Text Ilcon 94 Zoomed 99 377 378 Movie Magic Screenwriter Endnotes 2 after index Back Cover
267. iation 212 Publish to Internet 327 Pull Down Menu 88 89 Push Buttons 87 90 Put Act Info in Parenthesis 267 Put Action in Parentheses 266 Put in Clipboard Rather than Print 335 Q Quick Key 93 Quick Keys 148 QuickSelect 89 QuickType 116 136 222 230 Quit Screenwriter 343 R Radio Buttons 8 7 91 Radio Play 103 Read Script 327 Reassign Outline Element Styles 187 Reassigning Outline Items 190 Red 330 Red Highlights 331 Redo 149 314 341 Redraw Screen 339 Reduce Indention for Unused Levels 179 Reference Page Numbers 198 Register with Writer s Guild 327 Reloading Default User Lists 142 Remove 337 Hemove Forced Page 314 Remove Forced Page Break 131 Remove 329 331 Reopen 19 Reopen 311 312 Repaginate Now 327 Replace 153 341 Replace amp Find Next 314 Replace with 157 158 Reset Cheated 321 Reset Cheated Element 347 Resize 109 Resize the Index Cards 108 109 Index 373 Restore Last Workspace 96 Retain up to previous version of a document Retrieve Last Script you worked on 96 Rev Color 195 Reverse order 198 Revised Pages 277 Revision 250 277 Revision Draft Color 274 290 Revision Mark 249 250 278 284 Revision Mark Right Margin 284 Revision Mark Text 284 Revision Marks 249 250 279 301 235 Revisions 249 Revisions Options 222 Rich Text Format 352 356 Right 100 265 RIGHT ARROW 145 Right Click 146 Right Column 132 342 Right Demotes
268. ide Location in Pop Up List Title Page Publisher Edit Script Formats Load Script Formats Save Script Formats Edit User Lists Repaginate Now Run SmartCheck Change Element Type gt Left Change Element Type gt Right Change Element Type gt Set Margins Find Find Next Replace Display Options gt Toolbars gt Scene Pilot Button LOCATION View gt Display Options Toolbars View View View View View View NEW MENU LOCATION NAME Format gt Element Styles Format gt Load Styles From Format gt Make Default for All New Documents Format gt User Lists Tools Tools Dual Columns gt Left Dual Columns gt Right Dual Columns gt Set Margins Edit Edit Edit 22 Movie Magic Screenwriter Replace amp Find Next Replace All Change Character Name Mark one Character s NaviDoc Menu Scenes Bookmarks Outline New Bookmark Add Outline Element Promote Outline Element Demote Outline Element Create Edit Outline Styles Top Bottom Page Up Page Down Previous How Next Row Decrease NaviDoc Font Increase NaviDoc Font Search Search Search Search OLD MENU LOCATION Edit Edit Edit Format NEW MENU LOCATION NAME NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc NaviDoc
269. idth furthest left to furthest right is the value which will be used to center them rather than each one being centered individually e Undo Alignment Cancels the last alignment option selected unless the text boxes in question have been otherwise dragged Align Vertically e Tops Aligns the top of all selected text boxes to the top of the first text box that was selected e Bottoms Aligns the bottom of all selected text boxes to the bottom of the first text box that was selected e Centers Vertically centers all selected text boxes with respect to the vertical center of the first text box that was selected e Top to Bottom Aligns the lower of the two boxes directly against the bottom of the upper of the two boxes This option is ONLY available when you have exactly two text boxes selected e Center on page Centers all selected text boxes with respect to the height of the page If more than one text box is selected then they will be centered as a group that is to say that their total height is the value which will be used to center them rather than each one being centered individually e Undo Alignment Cancels the last alignment option selected unless the text boxes in question have been otherwise dragged The section that tracks where text is placed on the title page is the X and Y axis section It is located in the upper right of the screen When text is being positioned on the title page the 102 Movi
270. ign use the Edit Categories feature Under the Production menu select Breakdown then Edit Categories Edit Tagging Categories Double click on any Category to edit its name or display code Grayed Categories will not display on the pop up list Additional Labor Animal Handler Cast Members Costumes Extras Greenery Livestock Makeup Hair Mechanical FX Hide Show Selected Category i Set to Movie Magic Scheduling Defaults Cancel E The Edit Tagging Categories window displays The categories displayed are the defaults for exporting to Scheduling Three User Definable categories are available for your new categories or you can edit an existing category Cast Members and Scene Description cannot be edited Grayed out categories are Hidden and do not display on the pop up Tagging menu To Hide or Show a category select it by clicking on it and click on the Hide Show Selected Category button Double click on a Category to select it for editing An Edit screen displays In the Category Name field type the new Category name Type an ampersand amp before the letter you d like to appear underlined and selectable as the one key QuickLetter on menus In the Display Code as field type in a unique abbreviation up to 6 letters that displays as the category s Format Code in Tagging Mode Click on Replace OK on Mac to accept your new category Cancel to discard the changes If you make changes and
271. ile menu select Print On the Print menu select pages or scenes to print and check the Print Title Page check box Selecting Entire Document automatically checks the Print Title Page box Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 103 8 8 1 8 2 Templates ocreenwriter has pre set template files for the following formats e Screenplay e Sitcom e 60 TV Shows e Stage Play e Radio Play e Novel e Comic Book including Gosset amp Kayle e Multimedia Interactive As a default template Screenwriter loads the screenplay format each time you open a blank document However you can easily switch to one of the other formats by using the Eormat gt Load Styles From 031 103 commands Create a New Frile from a Template File gt New From Template To create a new document based on a specific template under the File menu select New from Template An open dialog will appear where you can select from one of the following template folders Blank Templates Choosing one of these templates will load only the margins and formatting settings but will not include any sample text or instructions Instructional Templates Choosing one of these templates will load the margins and formatting settings and include instructional Notes and possibly some sample text TV Templates Choosing one of these templates will load the margins and formatting settings for that TV show and any sample text NOTE when
272. ill be cards 1 2 5 12 8 and then 3 4 etc Printing Index Cards To print your Index Cards click the Print button on the bottom Toolbar You will be taken to the following window Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 113 Setup Index Card Printing 3 75 x 2 5 C3 5 x 3 75 Landscape 5 x 3 Laser fe 375x 25 Sparco 1099 g x Define Your Own Portrait Number of Cards Draw Boxes Bold HeadLines Top Btm Margins 959 inches Across 2 en Landscape Lft Rght Margins 95 inches Inter Card Margins 935 inches Font Save As Open Save as the default layout a Print All Cards Select Range of Cards to Print Cancel The three large page icons across the top of the screen are pre defined layouts Select one by clicking on its icon or radio button The layout at the top right of the screen 3 3 4 x 2 1 2 is the default layout Create a new layout by clicking on the Define Your Own button Choose Portrait or Landscape and enter the number of cards Across and Down for your page Several other settings are available e Draw Boxes Prints a box around each Index Card Recommended if you are not printing onto plain paper e Bold Headlines Prints the Scene Heading Line of each card in boldface e Page Margin Settings Allows you to change the Top Bottom Left Right and Inter Card between cards margins e Font Button Allows you to specify a
273. in the direction of the Building and Loan 16 INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAY 17 INT GEORGE S OFFICE DAY 18 INT OUTER OFFICE DAY CLOSE SHOT George coming from room where he has just left the bank examiner GEORGE Just make yourself at home Mr Carter I ll get those books for you He sees Violet Bick standing there GEORGE Oh hello Vi VIOLET George can see you for a second GEORGE Why of course you can Come on in the office here He hears a noise and sees Uncle Billy entering the office CRANE lisela DII ello ena Linens Linte mum than salanbana Cards O4 Os O9 Ou CLOSE SHOT George and Violet George has just finished writing something and is slipping the paper into an envelope GEORGE hands it to her Here you are VIOLET bitterly Character If had any character I d GEORGE It takes a lot of character to leave your home town and start all over again He pulls some money from his pocket and offers it to her VIOLET No George don t GEORGE Here now you re broke aren t you vara ET 11 CLOSE SHOT As George and Violet come through the door they are being watched by Cousin Tilly Cousin Eustace and the bank examiner who is still waiting to go to work on the books GEORGE to Violet Say hello to New York for me VIOLET Yeah yeah sure will GEORGE Now let s hear from you Violet sets the lipstick on George s cheek and
274. ined lf checked displays a box in which to enter the specific number you want the Scene Heading to have Based on the number you enter Screenwriter assigns the appropriate numbering scheme to the Scene Heading NOTE Overriding a Scene Number may change all subsequent Scene Numbering Check the scene numbers of scenes following the one you have overridden and renumber them if necessary 288 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 5 3 16 5 4 Fix or Flex A Pages When Screenwriter adds an A Page or B Page etc to a script it puts it in as a flexible A Page If you later add or delete text before the flexible A Page the A Page adjusts its numbering accordingly just like a normal un locked page After pages have been issued you may want existing A Page numbering to become fixed To do so click on Production gt Fix or Flex gt Fix All A Pages Fix All A Pages Flex All A Pages Fix Lock All Headers Flex All Headers Unlock Headers All Flexible A Pages are converted into Fixed A Pages becoming locked When you add text later the new A Pages generated are Flexible A Pages These can also be locked when necessary e Fix All A Pages Locks all A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Flex All A Pages Unlocks all fixed A Pages Combines any short A Pages that were locked and may combine any Double Locked Pages in the script Only available in a scrip
275. ing a Parenthetical element press CTRL Shift 9 Transition A Transition Indicates the shift from one scene to another in a Spec Script usually isn t necessary since a cut to a new scene is implied by the next Scene Heading With the cursor at the beginning of any blank element type any word followed by to and Screenwriter automatically formats and spaces it correctly ALL CAPS and flush right A new Scene Heading element is created and a Pop up List of Initial Scene Heading Text displays Transitions CUT TO DISSOLVE TO FADE OLT You can also press RETURN in a blank Action element and type t for Make this a I ransition Shot A Shot is used to convey a shot of a particular angle or of a particular object or person typically only used in Production non spec and television scripts At the beginning of any blank element type any Shot Text NOTE until you customize the User Lists the only Shot Text that Screenwriter initially recognizes is ANGLE ON or BACK TO SCENE See User Lists 36 It is automatically formatted as a Shot element Or press RETURN in a blank Action element and type h for Make this a Shot O ANGLE ON BACK TO SCENE PAM SHOT AS GEORGE RUNS BY Select a Shot type from the popup list or type the text for your Shot 124 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 13 10 14 10 14 1 10 14 2 10 14 3 10 14 4 Title You can create a cente
276. ing at Fixed Distance from Text e At Fixed Distance from Bottom of Page If selected the Bottom Scene Continueds print at the same position on each page one line below the page s Bottom Margin e Floating at Fixed Distance from Text If selected the Bottom Scene Continueds are printed two lines below the final line of text on each page This results in the Continueds appearing in different positions on each page 252 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 10 2 15 10 3 15 10 4 15 10 5 15 11 Print Color Text fe In Color but grey on a black and white printer EZ Ignoring Color black text e In Color but grey on a black and white printer If selected prints color highlighted text in color on color printers and with a grayed background on black amp white printers e Ignoring Color black text If selected ignores color highlighted text and prints normally Production Sides v Gray Background on Unselected Text Uu x Qut Unselected Text e Gray Background on Unselected Text lf checked document material NOT selected is printed over a gray background which makes the selected production sides material easier to see Unchecked all material is printed normally e X Out Unselected Text If checked document material NOT selected is printed with a large X across it Unchecked all material is printed normally When printing to PDF prompt user with COPY Wi Ask User for POF Options With th
277. ing is a term used to describe Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 55 changing an element from one level of an outline to a higher or lower level in the outline hierarchy There are a few different ways to promote demote an element Open the tutorial template 1 Click on File New from Template 2 Double click the Tutorials folder and open the file called Promoting amp Demoting Tutorial This tutorial file has three levels available Act Sequence and Scenes Outline Scenes Notes Bookmarks i z 2 mm BA ol i yr BM Tit i Delete Add Outline Element Sequence Scene Create Edit Outline Styles Promoting Demoting via Keyboard 1 Press CTRL DOWN ARROW until the caret is blinking in the Third Act 2 To demote the Act to a Sequence press CTRL RIGHT ARROW Sequence First Act 3 To promote an element press CTRL LEFT ARROW Promoting Demoting via Drag and Drop 1 Open the Outline panel on the left if it is not already open 2 Hold the mouse button down on the first Scene green Notice as you drag it left or right it shows what level in the hierarchy it will become 3 Drag it so that it says Sequence and drop it The outline element is now converted to a Sequence red and has the proper margins 56 Movie Magic Screenwriter 5 2 4 First Act You can use the Promote Demote icons on the Top Toolbar to promote and demote e
278. ing it again Cheat a Page 1 Put the cursor anywhere on the Page to be cheated 2 Under the Format menu select Cheat then Page 3 Increase or Decrease the page length by the number of lines desired from 1 to 10 Cheat the Whole Document 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the document to be cheated 2 Under the Format menu select Cheat then Document 3 You re prompted to remove all previous Line Spacing Cheating Click Yes to remove the existing cheating and start cheating afresh Click No to leave the existing cheating intact and add any new cheating to it 4 The Document Layout window displays Change the document settings for this script as desired Cheat the Page s Header This option is only available in a document with Locked Pages and Locked Headers 1 Put the cursor anywhere on the Page to be cheated 2 Under the Production menu select Override then Page s Header Draft Color 3 The Header Setup screen displays Change the Header settings for that page 4 Click Preview to view the changes OK to save the changes or Cancel to discard the changes User Lists While you write Screenwriter can recognize certain text you have typed as matching an item in one of its User Lists and format it as the appropriate element automatically To use User Lists the QuickType feature and the individual Pop Up lists must be enabled See QuickType in the Customizing Screenwriter section for more information Movie Magic Screenwr
279. ion To open the document you ll have to enter the correct password When checking this option you ll be prompted to type the word YES to confirm your decision to put passwords on all documents When saving an Allow Viewing Printing without Password option lets you make the document viewable and printable to anyone without the password if checked They won t be able to edit or save the document When Opening Existing Documents Show NaviDoc Panel Last Used He v Start at last saved position e Show NaviDoc This option controls the NaviDoc display when documents are opened It has the following options Panel Last Used default Outline Panel Scenes Panel Notes Panel Bookmarks Panel or Hide NaviDoc 240 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 6 Y Panel Last Used Qutline Panel Scenes Panel Notes Panel Bookmarks Panel Hide MaviDac e Start at last saved position lf checked it opens a document exactly as it was onscreen when you last saved it Unchecked it opens at the top of the document SmartCheck Options Screenwriter gt Preferences gt SmartCheck You should always have your document proofread before sending it out to be read preferably by someone else At the very least run SmartCheck before printing your document SmartCheck scans your document for the following common formatting errors e An element that starts with a single blank space a common typing error e Completely
280. ion 179 Speak Selection 347 Speak Silently 212 Speak Text 212 327 Speaking 211 Speaking Characters First 205 295 Speech Commands 216 speech recognition 215 247 speech recognition preferences 216 Speed Buttons 93 Spell Check 152 153 Spell Check as you Type amp Edit 142 Spell Check Element 327 Spell Check Entire Script 327 Spell Check Forward 327 Spell Check Page 327 Spell Check Selection 327 Spell check the current word 347 Spell Check Word 327 Spelling 243 Spelling Options 222 splitter 160 spoken commands 215 Stage Play 103 Standard 6 lines 204 294 Standard American format 196 Standard Breakdowns 201 Start amp End 335 Start New Scene 125 Start Next Revision 277 Starting Only 335 Starting Page Number 271 Startup Files 234 236 Startup Files Options 222 Statistics 198 Status Bar 91 93 Storyboard Linking 329 Strikeout 149 150 Strikeout Codes and or Text 331 Strikethrough 343 Style 261 Style Level 183 StyleName 183 Style View 178 Substitution Text 136 140 143 Suggest 153 Switch Between Open Documents 343 Switch Elements 128 Sync Control 170 172 175 180 Sync Frame 164 173 Sync NaviDoc 164 synonyms 158 System Selection 164 T TAB 116 129 TAG 140 352 Tag ltem Globally 332 Tag Items Globally 297 Tag Text 136 140 Tagged Items 205 295 Tagging 296 Tagging Items 296 Tagging Mode 332 347 Tan 274 Taped Sitcom 103 TEASER 124 140 Technical Su
281. ions for the Notes Panel are found 12 8 10 Notes Panel Options The options for the Notes Panel can be displayed by clicking the NaviDoc Preferences lt show icon gt button in the Notes Panel You can also click on Tools gt Options gt NaviDoc to display them Font Lucida Grande P size 12 LRA Row Lines Thick Solid n 1 E e Notes Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the notes list They include the font face and font size e Row Lines This option controls the appearance of the line that separates the notes in the 170 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 8 11 12 8 12 12 9 notes list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid and Groove This option also controls the color of the Row Lines Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally Synch ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row Synch OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled Note Display Controls These controls determine the font size and lines of visible text for I T the notes in the notes list of the NaviDoc Notes Panel e Viewable Notes Lines Control left vertical slider
282. ions so that they don t appear on the automatic pop up lists of Locations used when entering Scene Headings You would generally use this function to remove locations you aren t going to use again in the document e Hide Elements on Screen Shows options which allow you to hide unhide script Elements Notes by color or type and Non Printing text e Unhide Elements on Screen Turns off the hidden attribute for specific elements such as notes and non printing text Action Character Dialoque Scene Headings All Notes All Non Printing Text Unhide All Unhide Non Printing Text e Running Lists 2 Shows options which allow you to control automatic updating of lists of user defined items such as character names shots and transitions created as you write in the document Recalculate Dynamically Recalculate Now e Zoom Screen Text Displays the Zoom Screen dialog window allowing you to alter how large the document text displays onscreen Default is 9096 320 Movie Magic Screenwriter Normal Displays the document as a continuous flow of text Page breaks are indicated by a dashed line 000 le Wonderful 6 mmsw En Ay if m U A Ata Mec bue Save Print Undo Redo Underline Uppercase Lowercase Cut Element Insert Element Carter as they qo Although I shouldn t wonder when you okay reverse charges on personal long distance calls CONTINUED COUSIN TILLY George sha
283. is command increases the font size of the items in the visible panel The font change does not effect hidden NaviDoc panels The keyboard command for this is CTRL Ctrl Right Bracket NaviDoc Preferences s Opens the NaviDoc tab of the program Options window This is the same as choosing the Tools Options command and selecting the NaviDoc tab Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 327 17 1 10 Tools Menu iPartner Compare Two Scripts Run Smartcheck Repaginate Now Thesaurus Count Words Name Bank Spell Check Correct Current Word Pause Auto Correction Clear Ignore List Change Dictionary Select Language Edit User Dictionary Speak Selection Assign Voices e Partner e This feature allows two people to view and edit the same document over the Internet e Compare Two Documents Compares the differences between two versions of the same document when both are open in separate windows Automatically generates a third document with everything that s been added in Red and everything that s been removed in Strikethrough e Run SmartCheck 2o The SmartCheck feature finds and corrects any common formatting errors you may have made Useful just before printing your document e Repaginate Now Forces a complete repagination screen redraw e Thesaurus amp Displays Synonyms for the word that the cursor is currently in e Count Words Counts
284. is inserted in front of it All 112 Movie Magic Screenwriter 9 6 9 7 other cards shuffle accordingly The Scenes in the document are not renumbered until you exit Index Card View by pressing the Done button Bone Cancel Print ES BERE SI k Na r To go back to your document without moving any Index Cards or scenes in your document click on the Cancel button Shuffle Multiple Index Cards Mode C Outline fe Shuffle 1 Select Shuffle Mode if it s not already selected 2 To shuffle more than one Index Card make sure the first card is displayed onscreen 3 Hold down the SHIFT key Using the mouse click anywhere on the Index Card you want to move The card turns a darker gray and the cursor changes to the Shuffle Cursor a hand holding a card 4 Still holding down the SHIFT key click on the other cards you want to shuffle If you inadvertently select a card that you didn t want to click on it again while still holding down the SHIFT key and it becomes unselected 5 Go to the Index Card you want to move your cards in front of using the Scroll buttons if necessary Click on that card and your shuffled Index Cards is inserted in front of it All other cards shuffle accordingly The shuffled cards are inserted in the same order they were selected For example if you select card 5 then card 12 then card 8 and insert them before card 3 the new shuffled order w
285. is option enabled when you create a PDF Adobe Acrobat file it will ask you whether it should automatically display the Scene Heading Bookmarks and which if any non printing Notes should it include With this option NOT enabled it will automatically use the last PDF Printing Options that you had chosen Print Using Fractional Widths f Print Using Fractional Widths When checked Screenwriter prints using fractional width calculations Most fonts look better when printed using fractional widths but some fonts don t Unchecked Screenwriter prints without using fractional width calculations Keyboard Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Keyboard This page allows you to change Screenwriter s special editing keys From the scrollable lists choose your key preferences Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 253 Preferences Primary Key Alternate Key Voice Command Menu Commands e About Screenwriter File Mew using Default Template New from Template Open Close Save Save changes Save As Save a Copy Save All Open Documents Save all Import Save As Template Send As Email Attachment Page Setup Print Preview Print Clear File History List Edit Undo 15 11 1 das das Preferences Buttons Reset Clear Export i import Print t Edit Reset This button resets the keyboard shortcuts to the shipping defaults Clear This button clears
286. isplays e Type P e Press RETURN FADE OUT is entered for you right justified and in ALL CAPS e Press the Escape key to finish Rick turns to see Jack checkbook in hand rushing out the door Rick smiles turns back to his screenwriting FADE OUT That s It This sample script is finished and you should be ready to start on your own e Here s a shortcut tip Press SHIFT TAB instead of TAB to alternate between the last two speaking character names This is the end of the Ten Minute Tutorial for Macintosh For the most current FAQs Software Updates Documentation and online Tutorials please visit our Support website at hito Awww screenplay com support 5 1 2 Exporting to PDF EXPORTING TO ADOBE ACROBAT PDF This tutorial gives you the step by step instructions for exporting and e mailing your Movie Magic Screenwriter document to an Adobe Acrobat PDF file The steps outlined below will let you create a separate PDF Portable Document File e Email your document to people agents producers writing partners etc who don t have Screenwriter e Universal format that can be taken to a print shop e Good for uploading to most online contests e Keeps the proper margins and page breaks as you see it in Movie Magic Screenwriter Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 45 Steps to Export to PDF export only Use these directions to export a PDF version of your document 1 Open your MMSW document in Movie M
287. iter 6 Help 137 For example typing ext on a blank line tells Screenwriter that you re starting a new Scene Heading It automatically formats your entry as EXT and pops up a Scene Body Text User List showing previous Locations in this document These popup lists or User Lists contain text items that can be entered by typing the first letter or two instead of typing the whole text saving you time and effort Selecting a Location from the Scene Body Text User List enters it in your document and pops up the Time of Day User List Typing the first letter or underlined QuickLetter of a Time of Day enters it in your document and moves the cursor to a new Action element NOTE Transitions are an exception Any text that ends with TO is recognized as a transition whether or not the text is in the Transition User List Screenwriter can also recognize abbreviations for text that you use often Typing the first letter or two of a word tells Screenwriter to enter the full text complete with any element formatting margins etc Entering an abbreviation or Alias Text 42 in an element s User List lets Screenwriter know it should auto format that abbreviation using that element s settings As an example you could assign I as the alias text for the Scene Heading Initial Text INT Typing I on a blank line would tell Screenwriter to expand that abbreviation to INT and format the line as a Scene Heading elemen
288. ithout returning to the menu Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 325 e Next Note Takes you to the next Note Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu e Next Current Revision Mark Takes you to the next Current Revision Mark Pressing SHIFT UP ARROW repeats this GoTo command without returning to the menu e Next Strikethrough or Colored Text Takes you to the next Strikethrough text or Colored text e Last Position Returns the cursor to the last position in the document where you where typing editing 17 1 9 NaviDoc Menu x Outline Scenes Notes Bookmarks New Note New Bookmark Add Outline Element Promote Outline Element Demote Outline Element Create Edit Outline Styles Top Bottom Page Up Page Down Previous Row Next Row Decrease MaviDoc Font Size Increase MaviDoc Font Size NaviDoc Preferences e Outline Shows or hides the Outline panel in the NaviDoc e Scenes 173 Shows or hides the Scenes panel in the NaviDoc e Notes 1s Shows or hides the Notes panel in the NaviDoc e Bookmarks 7 Shows or hides the Bookmarks panel in the NaviDoc e New Note Inserts a new Note at the current cursor position in the document 326 Movie Magic Screenwriter New Bookmark lInserts a new Bookmark at the current cursor position in the document Add Outline Element Inserts a new outline eleme
289. ization is used expanding it to CAROL ANN automatically NOTE To use Aliases for Character Names and Substitution Text you must have the option Spell Check as you Type amp Edit checked To do this go into the Tools menu select Options and click on the Spelling button Creating Alias Text 1 1 Under the Format menu select User Lists The User Lists screen displays User Lists Alias Text 2 Click on the element button of the User List you want to add to A lettered list of items displays To add a new text item type it into a blank box In this example we ll add CAROL ANNE User Lists Alias Text CAO ma re wo es som Rom Mm Gom EEN ES Dore SO EEEREN E RO ES DS RO SR Gm es S ee ee ee EEE EREE D O E es POS POR GO ee Ge am Rm NOR es Gom aem rem om Romo s es Gm Rom om EH A CAROL ANNE B Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 143 3 Click in the Alias box located to the left of the Text box Type the abbreviation for selected User List text using at least 2 characters For this example type in CA as the alias text User Lists CA A CAROL ANNE B p Extensions 4 Click on OK to save your changes to the document s User Lists 10 28 2 Capitalization of Alias Text With two exceptions expanded Alias Text takes its capitalization as defined by the Element it belongs in Substitution Text For capitalization purposes the Ali
290. k beeps each time it finds an error in formatting 15 6 3 Delete WITHOUT prompting These four options specify which formatting errors SmartCheck should fix without prompting for your decision This applies whether SmartCheck is running in manual or automatic mode e Single Starting Blank Space lf checked deletes a single space at the beginning of a line Unchecked this error displays a prompt e Completely Blank Elements lIf checked deletes a line with no text Unchecked this error displays a prompt 242 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 6 4 15 6 5 15 6 6 15 6 7 e Character Names without Dialogue lf checked deletes orphaned Character Names Unchecked this error displays a prompt e Second Character Name when he she speaks twice in a row with nothing between the two speeches lf checked deletes the second Character Name element and joins the two Dialogue elements when it finds two speeches in a row by the same character without an intervening Action or other Element Unchecked this error displays a prompt Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks If checked SmartCheck accepts blank lines with Revision Marks as correct Unchecked it treats such blank lines as Completely Blank Elements Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT match If checked treats the same Character Name speaking twice in a row as correct when their Extensions differ such as V O and O
291. l Capitals e Capitalize Word CTRL W e Cap amp Bold Word CTRL F12 e Lowercase Word SHIFT F12 SHIFT CTRL W When Screenwriter changes the case of existing text it retains correct capitalization for e Sentence beginnings SIS e he personal pronoun e Speaking Characters with Initial Capitals To change the case of selected text 1 Select the text 2 Under the Format menu select Change Case then choose the desired capitalization To change the case of an entire Element 1 Put the cursor anywhere in the appropriate Element 2 Under the Format menu select Change Case then choose the desired capitalization Typing Accented Characters On Mac pressing the Option key plus another key can give you certain accents To find out which keys correspond to which accents you need to open the utility that comes with Mac call KeyCaps or Keyboard Viewer 152 Movie Magic Screenwriter 11 10 In OS 10 2 it can be found under Macintosh HD Applications Utilities KeyCaps In OS 10 3 and above you must enable it under Apple System Preferences International Input Menu Keyboard Viewer Then you will see a flag icon next to the speaker on the top menu bar top right Click that then Show Keyboard Viewer Once KeyCaps or the Keyboard Viewer is open hold down the Option key This will give you a guide to which key combinations make the accents Examples To enter in an Spanish
292. l elements except outline elements outline elements only all elements and the header and footer Use Current Font Use font Courier 12 for All Elements EXCEPT Outline Elements __ Outline Elements Only All Elements Header and Footer Font Cancel as e Reset The Reset button works as an Undo button for the changes you have made to an individual Element lt restores the settings to the way they were before you made changes Use the Reset button before clicking OK to exit the menu and save changes to Script Formats or it will have no effect Save as Defaults for all New Scripts lf checked applies any changes you have made to a script s elements to all new scripts OK Exits and applies Script Format changes you have just made to the script Cancel Exits and discards Script Format changes you have just made to the script Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 263 Character Names B Center Character Names 2 No Automatic Character Continueds fe Extension Only when Extensions Match Parenthetical Style es ror Continued Separator LIII fe xx xx More Text MORE Center Character Names lf checked all Character Names are centered horizontally across the page an unconventional choice Unchecked each Character Name starts at the same left margin position Character Continueds as Allows you to choose one of these options for adding a Continued to a Character Name wh
293. lank document Adding a Teaser Cold Opening Prologue or starting the first act Since you don t want an Act Scene Break before the Teaser or first Act you could type in one of the following aliases teaser cold opening prologue or newact to have the program format it automatically 1 Add a Teaser by typing teaser on the first blank line Screenwriter should format it for you in the middle of the page 2 Press Enter and type d to put in FADE IN from the pop up list Screenwriter will automatically format it in ALL CAPS and bring up the pop up list for a Scene Heading 3 Press Return again to bring up the pop up list and type f to choose FADE IN Screenwriter will automatically format it in ALL CAPS and bring up the pop up list for a Scene Heading Typing a scene 1 Type i for INT 2 For the Location type in manhattan highrise 3 Press RETURN and Screenwriter will pop up the list for Times of Day 86 Movie Magic Screenwriter 4 Press d for DAY 5 Type in the following lines of Action making sure to underline CMD U Tina s introduction Tina sits on the edge of the couch playing solitaire Jenga A shaky tower of pieces wobbles on the coffee table 6 Press RETURN to go to a new blank line of Action Screenwriter double spaces for you 7 Type in the following lines of Action making sure to underline Amir s entrance Amir bursts through the front door He is all smiles
294. later want to return to the original defaults click on the Reset to Defaults button Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 299 16 8 16 8 1 Click on OK to accept your changes or Cancel to discard them Breakdown Sheets The Breakdown Sheet is the report showing all your tagged items in their respective categories with a separate page for each scene If you re doing production strips by hand you ll be transferring the information on each breakdown sheet to a separate strip If you re exporting to Movie Magic Scheduling or EP Scheduling it s preferable to do the breakdown sheets there as you ll also be adding more detailed Crew information Layout Breakdown Sheets To change the page layout of Screenwriter s Breakdown Sheet Under the Production menu select Breakdowns then Layout Breakdown Sheets This window displays each category group box that appears on the breakdown sheets along with the categories that are in them Layout Breakdown sheets Ed E mmm m ee em oma CAST d STUNTS EXTRAS O li il JF i SET DRESSING DRESSING Greenery Set Dressing SPECIAL EFFECTS IAL EFFECTS PROPS i VEHICLES VEHICLESZANIMALS ANIMALS Optical Fa 1 Animal Handler Special Fa Livestack Vehicles WARDROBE MAKEUP MAKEUP HAIR SOUND FX HUSIC li k SPECIAL EQUIPMENT IAL EQUIPMENT PRODUCTION NOTES NOTES Mechanical Fa Additional Labor Special Equipment Misc Notes Se
295. lay a List Menu of CTRL N Any element Transitions CUT TO etc Add a Note If Tab in Dialogue takes you to Parenthetical is checked on the Text Entry Editing page of Program Options under the File menu Tab creates a Parenthetical element when ina Dialogue element Character Name in Dialogue or Action To put an existing Character Name into Dialogue or Action without typing it in again press SHIFT CMD C on the keyboard A pop up list displays with all the existing Character Names Select one and it is entered as text at the cursor position Or if you have assigned that name an Alias type in the alias text and press the space bar It is expanded to the full Character Name at the cursor position See Aliases 42 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 131 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 Add Forced Page Break To end a page short and start a new page enter a Forced Page Break at the cursor position e Under the Edit menu select Add Forced Page Break e Or press SHIFT RETURN Remove a Forced Page Break Remove a Forced Page Break using one of these methods 1 Put the cursor either before or after the forced page break Under the Edit menu select Remove Forced Page Break 2 Or put the cursor at the beginning of the element immediately following the Forced Page Break Press the DELETE key 3 Or put the cursor at the end of the element immediately before the Forced Page Br
296. lements JE Also you can promote and demote via the Promote Demote Outline Element items in the NaviDoc menu Ea EET E Scene Heading Promote Outline Element Aq Demote Outline Element Scenes Panel The Scenes Panel tutorials include e Scenes Panel Controls se e Navigating the Document s Sorting Scenes s e Hide and Show Scene Heading Fields se Scenes Panel Controls There is one control specific to the Scenes panel Sort Scenes in NaviDoc Sort by Scene Number Sort by Int f Ext Sort by Set Sort by Time of day This allows the sorting of scenes NaviDoc only by Scene Number INT EXT Location or Time of Day Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 57 Navigating the Document There are several ways to navigate through the NaviDoc and your document using the ocenes panel Mouse You can use the mouse to scroll the NaviDoc up and down Clicking on a row in the Scenes panel will take you to that place in the document If enabled the flash pointer will point to that element in the document The Sync button is on by default so the NaviDoc will scroll as you navigate Keyboard You can move through the NaviDoc using the keyboard Top of NaviDoc CTRL HOME Bottom of NaviDoc CTRL END Scroll up one screen CTRL PAGEUP Scroll down one screen CTRL PAGEDOWN Previous Row CTRL UP ARROW Next Row CTRL DOWN ARROW Since these key commands actually selec
297. lities Trouble Shooting This button will bring up a text screen with known issues helpful tips as well information on problems with connecting and using iPartner Cancel This will close the iPartner window and return you to your document Connect on port number This is the TCP port that iPartner uses to connect with By default it should be 2200 For more info see Trouble shooting iPartner make this a link to 208 Movie Magic Screenwriter Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help gt Other Screenwriter Features gt iPartner gt iPartner Trouble Shooting Known Issues 14 1 2 The Chat Window Once you and your partner are connected you both will see a Chat Window which generally looks like the following though of course the exact text will vary A A Scriptwriting Chat Handle Send Script Show to Partner Disconnect The top area of the chat window is the message area where you will see messages from your partner and you as well as occasional system messages The bottom area of the chat window is a text entry window where you can type messages to send to your partner The B U N style Buttons between the two windows allow you to change the style of the text you send to BOLD Underline Italics and Normal respectively The small window below the text entry window is where you specify your name as it will appear in your partner s Chat win
298. ll we hang up GEORGE MMC Y y m Full Page Displays the document as it will appear on the printed page Page breaks appear as separate pages with headers and footers displayed Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 321 e Wonderful 6 mmsw ww 4 U HA Aa X gt Save Print Undo Redo Underline Uppercase Lowercase Cut Element Insert Element ME dod aM EE IEEE Although I shouldn t wonder when you okay reverse charges on personal long distance calls CONTINUED COUSIN TILLY shall we hang up GEORGE He wants to talk to Uncle eee Aim a m1 i EEG UN posu LI I Lr xd 4 ru a i E AAA zl hal a CCC 171 5 Format Menu Element Styles Load Styles From Make Default for All New Documents User Lists Load User Lists From Document Layout Header and Footer Font Style Font Color Change Case Change Element Type Mark One Character s Dialogue Dual Columns Normal Word Processor Mode Cheat Reset Cheated e Element Styles Displays a menu where you can change the way elements are formatted in the currently displayed document and set the default formats for New documents 322 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Load Styles From Allows you to reformat your existing document by loading a format from either a template or an existing Screenwriter document Template Screenwriter Document e Make Default fo
299. lock across the page to its new position With the arrow cursor at the place you want the text inserted release the Left Mouse Button The text block moves to the new position WINDOWS ONLY Breaking Elements Screenwriter can handle Drag and Drop text inserted in the middle of an Element in two different ways Choose your preference under Tools gt Options gt Mouse Checking the option Drag n drop should break Elements in middle tells Screenwriter to let Drag and Drop text Break Elements If the cursor is in the middle of an Element when you release the button Screenwriter breaks that Element at the cursor position Dropped text is inserted between the broken Elements Unchecking the option Drag n drop should break Elements in middle tells Screenwriter not to let Drag and Drop text Break Elements Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 149 If you release the Left Mouse Button while the cursor s in the First half of the Element text is dropped Before the Element If you release the Left Mouse Button while the cursor s in the Last half of the Element text is dropped After the Element Deleting Text The following delete commands remove the selected text from your document copying it to the Clipboard To un delete text you have deleted select Edit Undo before selecting any other editing command NOTE Select Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Keyboard to enable or change the Shortcut Keys f
300. locking the Script menu allowing you to change all script Locking options in one place Uncheck Locked items individually to Unlock them Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Multi Lock ss Allows you to keep the existing A Page 2 or A Scene 283 numbering and give new pages or scenes a new unique numbering scheme Only available in a document with Locked Pages or Scenes e Start Next Revision The Start Next Revision Command will start the next revision automatically by doing the following e Remove All Revision Marks e Fix all A Pages e Lock the Header Text e Increment the Revision Draft Color e Run the Title Page Publisher so that you can add the new color to a list e Set Revision Draft Color Order 22 Displays the Revision Draft Color window showing the order in which revision colors will be used the default is the industry standard e Apply Revision Mark Adds a revision marks to the selected lines of text without modifying the text 330 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Remove Revision Mark Removes revision marks from the selected lines of text e Fix or Flex s Advanced control of locked pages e Auto Revision Controls automatic revision annotation and revision page colors e Remove 331 Controls removal of various items in the document e Override Provides specialized control over instances of production features in the docu
301. ment e Breakdown ss Shows options for tagging breakdown items to be printed on Breakdown Sheets or exported to Movie Magic Scheduling e TV Breakdowns s Shows options for TV sitcom production breakdowns including generate rundown sheet generate set list and scene character lists e Animation Locking sss Shows you options for Animation Production Features Fix or Flex Advanced control of locked pages Fix All A Pages Flex All A Pages Fix Lock All Headers Flex All Headers Unlock Headers e Fix AILA Pages 2ss Locks all A Pages Only available in a document with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Flex All A Pages ss Unlocks all fixed A Pages Combines any short A Pages that were locked and may combine any Double Locked Pages in the document Only available in a documentwith Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Fix Lock All Headers Locks the Headers of all pages except Flexible A Pages Only available in a document with Locked Pages e Flex All Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages converting them to the Current Header Only available in a document with Locked Pages e Unlock Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages and turns Header Locking off for this document Only available in a document with Locked Pages Auto Revision Controls automatic revision annotation and revision page colors Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 331
302. mes 332 Asterisk 249 278 Asterisk Headers 250 Asterisked Pages 198 Asterisked Speeches Only 198 Attach Script As 220 Auto Pop Up 230 AutoCapitalize 154 245 AutoCapitalize Sentences 152 AutoCapitalize the Names of Characters 152 AutoCapitalize Sentences 154 Auto Correct 153 243 Auto Correct Typos 154 244 Auto Revision Marks 279 Auto Revision 329 330 Auto Space Sentences 154 Auto Update Locked Headers 250 Avid Editor Format 356 B BACK TO SCENE 123 140 BACKSPACE 149 Backup Directory 238 Backup Icon 18 Basic Information 87 Beep on Unknown Words 154 Beginning of current line 145 beginning of the document 345 beginning of the line 345 Blank Document 237 Blank Elements 241 Blank Lines 197 Block Selection 147 Blocked Text 198 Blue 274 330 Blue Highlights 331 Bold 149 150 195 261 343 358 Bold Headlines 112 Bolding Text 150 Bookmark 1 70 344 Bookmarks 19 325 Bookmarks Controls 172 Bookmarks List 171 Bookmarks Panel 160 170 Bookmarks Panel Options 172 Bottom 19 324 325 Bottoms 100 Box Min Height 333 Box Width 333 Break Action 2 70 Break Dialogue 270 Breakdown Categories 298 Breakdown Sheets 292 299 Breakdown Tagging 296 298 Breakdown 329 332 Breakdowns 201 Breaking Elements 148 Bring Up Online Help 347 Buff 274 BUTTONS 261 C Calculate Eighths 294 Calculate Eighths by 204 Calendar 327 Cap Bold Word 151 Capitalization 143 Capitalize Word 151 343
303. miliar Drag and Drop method and Screenwriter automatically moves the scenes in your script and renumbers them for you When you re satisfied with your index card outline switch from Index Card View to normal Document view All the work you did on the index cards is there an outline ready for you to expand into a script Index Card View To use the Electronic Index Cards you need to enter Index Card View Under the View menu select Index Cards Your document now looks something like the following depending on the number of cards or scenes you ve created 108 Movie Magic Screenwriter 9 2 Index Card View Horizontal Layout 10 FULL SHOT THE OFFICES ARE UNCHANCED STILL GEORGE Extra Extra Read all about it Cousin Tilly and Cousin Eustace are talking on the phone COUSIN EUSTACE George George It s Harry now on long distance from Washington GEORGE Harry What do you know about that COUSIN EUSTACE He reversed the charges It s okay isn t it GEORGE What do you mean it s okay For a hero takes the phone Harry Oh you old seven kinds of a son of a gun Congratulations How s mother standing it She did What do you know to Eustace Mother had lunch with the President s wife CLOSE SHOT deposit slip desk Uncle Billy looks around for 13 INT BANK DAY the money envelope It is not there He looks puzzled thinks hard then a look of concern creeps into his eyes He begins
304. move the cursor over the icon without clicking on it A box of explanatory Hint text displays directly beneath the icon and any Quick Key shortcut displays on the left of the Bottom Status Bar e For a list of Main Menu Bar commands see the Appendix chapter entitled Screenwriter 6 Menus 310 Wonderful 6 mmsw 88 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 3 6 4 e For a list of Keyboard Shortcuts see the Appendix chapter entitled Key Assignments On Line Help When writing your document help with Screenwriter is always available online under the Help menu e Contents Opens the Table of Contents for the help file e Search for Help on Opens the help file s searchable Index e Quick Help Displays a sample script page Get help information about any Element or item by clicking on it EET PtP uae gt Wolz El Dorm paz Iz c Hinedia hee 17 cnp 1 od M tance amp If you make a selection under the Main Menu Bar context sensitive help is available When the menu screen displays click on the Help button It displays helpful information explaining what each selection on that menu does Menus Main Menu Bar s o Screenwriter s Pull Down menus are accessed from the Main Menu Bar s10 at the top of the screen Individual menus may be selected with the mouse Screenwriter File Edit View Format Goto NaviD
305. mple as 001 Setting up Watermark Select Production Watermark Setup to open the watermark setup window Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 307 Watermark Setup Font 15tone Serif SIZE Style Print Gray Sample Darkness 49 degrees Distrib List F Sar gt Angle 20 e A 9 09 09 Serial Letter Spacing 100 Signature Page Header Text Print Name in fe Watermark f Lower Right Comer Dont Print Default to having PRINT SIGNATURE PAGE Checked l Cancel Require that User Fills Out REQUESTED BY field when Printing fir Require that User Fills Qut APPROVED EY field when Printing e n the Text field type in the text of the watermark e n the Distrib List field type in a NAME for the distribution list or click on Set if you wish to use a pre existing distribution list e The Set button will turn into Edit e Click the Edit button e Type in the names that you want the distribution list to contain and make sure each name is on its own line 308 Movie Magic Screenwriter Watermark Distribution List e Click OK e In the Serial Number field make up a serial number e g 001 The program will automatically increment the number or letter on the end of the number for each person on the distrib list e Choose any other options on the Watermark Setup page and click OK Printing with the Watermark e
306. n An empty kitchen Somewhere in another part of the house a MAN and WOMAN are screaming at each other Small sobs are coming from somewhere nearby 23 Press RETURN 24 Type in Various scribbled drawings are on the refrigerator mostly in black A half eaten breakfast is on the table A cabinet door under the sink jostles slightly 52 Movie Magic Screenwriter 25 Press RETURN twice 26 On the Scene Heading pop up press i for INT 27 Type in KITCHEN CABINET 28 Press RETURN 29 Press d for DAY 30 Press RETURN 31 Type in TOMMY 8 sits under the sink knees to chest Tears stream down his face dripping off a scar on his left cheek He winces at every burst of anger 32 Now let s label the first two scenes as a Sequence Click at the end of the first Act outline element 33 Press RETURN 34 Change this new Act into a Sequence by demoting it Press CTRL RIGHT ARROW 35 Type in Tommy s childhood trauma You now have the basic skills to start creating your outline in Screenwriter Navigating There are several ways to navigate through the NaviDoc and your document using the Outline panel Mouse You can use the mouse to scroll the NaviDoc up and down Clicking on a row in the Outline panel will take you to that place in the document If enabled the flash pointer will point to that element in the document The Sync button is on by default so the NaviDoc will scroll as you navigate
307. n is in Parentheticals Y Import this text with LOCKED Page breaks Use ONLY when the script is already in Production and the page breaks have to match Cancel e To import a script file Import in Script Format should be checked Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 353 17 4 3 To import an outline or some other non script text check Import Text as Action Only Text Only Non RTF Checking this CheckBox if available imports the file slightly faster and may improve the accuracy of the import It also loses any bold italic or underline formatting If you re importing a file with Embedded Style Sheets in Rich Text Format such as a Final Draft script a Use Style Sheets checkbox displays on the menu Check it for better interpretation of paragraph elements If Screenwriter has difficulty interpreting any style sheet it prompts you to identify it Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Causes Screenwriter to normalize inconsistent line spacing and margins In most cases this produces the most accurate import However it may cause Shots to be misinterpreted as Character Names and vice versa Don t use Capitalization Information for Element identification Some word processors lose Capitalization Information when exporting files Checking this box tells Screenwriter to ignore Capitalization when identifying Elements Ignore Margins for Element identification Some script files
308. n which they appear e Speaking Characters First lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they speak in that scene followed by character with no dialogue e User List Order lf checked lists characters in each scene with those from User Lists first then all others alphabetically e List Non Speaking Characters lf checked lists characters who are mentioned in Action or Dialogue but who have no dialogue of their own Unchecked only characters with dialogue are listed e Each Group on New Page lIf checked starts a new page for each new group e Print Tagged Items lf checked prints or exports all tagged items along with the other breakdown information 206 Movie Magic Screenwriter 14 Other Screenwriter Features Screenwriter has tow specialized features for working with your script They are e Partner 206 e Speak ext 212 e Send As Email Attachment 219 e Document Analysis e Name Bank 220 14 1 iPartner Whether you re across the building or across the world Movie Magic Screenwriter s iPartner M feature lets you and a partner view write edit and chat over the same script as if you were in the same room together iPartner requires a standard internet connection through a non proxy server on both computers and we highly recommend at least a high speed Internet connection or direct network connection although a 56k dial up connection will work See the section
309. ncluding any parentheses to replace the default text with e Btm of Pg lf checked puts the default text CONTINUED below a Scene that continues to another page Enter your preferred text including any parentheses to 266 Movie Magic Screenwriter replace the default text with e Left Margin of Bottom Cont d Lets you choose how far in 1 10 of an inch increments to indent the Bottom Continued from the left edge of the page Shots Shots has no element specific options Action Put Action in Parentheses lf checked puts Parentheses around the Action text as is required in some Stage Play and TV Sitcom formats Action Indentation This option allows you to change the starting indent of Action The setting of 1 is only available when you have the option Put Action in Parenthesis selected and setting it to 1 will automatically select that option for you if it is not already This setting will cause the left parenthesis to be outdented one position so that the first line of action will line up with all subsequent lines When you change this Action Indentation setting you will see a sample action line which will display how action will look with the current parenthetical and indentation settings Put Action in Parenthesis This is a sample Action paragraph with the current indentation settings Transitions Transitions are FLUSH RIGHT If checked Transition text is aligned flush with the
310. nd continueds it even lets me do an outline 18 Add Action e Press RETURN e Type the next Action paragraph Jack leaps from his chair rushes towards the door RICK 0 8 My program formats all the margins and page breaks tor me It can do scene numbering dialogue mores and continueds it even lets me do an outline Jack leaps from his chair rushes towards the door Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 39 19 Add Transition e Press RETURN e Press RETURN again e Type t A pop up list of Transition text displays Transitions CUT TO DISSOLVE TO FADE OUT e Type c e Press RETURN CUT TO is entered for you right justified and ALL CAPS and Screenwriter moves the cursor down to a new line and shows the pop up menu for a new Scene Heading Jack leaps from his chair rushes towards the door CUT TO 20 Add Scene Heading e Type TP INT is entered for you and a list of existing Locations pops up CUT TO JACK S ROOM INT RICK S ROOM 21 Add Location e Type the letter r to narrow down the choices on the pop up list RICK S ROOM e Press RETURN RICK S ROOM is entered for you The Time of Day list pops up 40 Movie Magic Screenwriter CUT TO INT RICK S ROOM MORNIN DAY 22 Add time of Day e Type the letter c CONTINUOUS is entered for you INT RICK S ROOM CONTINUOUS 23 Add Action
311. nds Pagination Sound None Lu F7 3 No Real time Pagination a e Cancel 15 8 1 Miscellaneious Options Miscellaneous Options Display Headers Footers On Screen WYSIWYG Display Page Break Type on Screen Show Swear Words in Thesaurus Draw Text Anti Aliased 4 Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses WE 9 Don t put at end start of broken Action Display Headers Footers On Screen WYSIWYG If checked the onscreen display represents the printed page Shows Headers Footers Page Numbers Top amp Bottom Continueds etc with less screen space for text Unchecked these items print but don t display onscreen Display Page Break Type on Screen If checked displays page break lines with Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 247 15 8 2 15 8 3 15 8 4 descriptive text e g FORCED PAGE as part of the line itself Unchecked the lines display but carry no onscreen description Show Swear Words in Thesaurus With this option enabled the thesaurus will display vernacular swear words as synonyms for words like excrement With this option NOT enabled the thesaurus will not display vernacular swear words as synonyms for words like excrement Draw Text Anti Aliased Check this if you want text drawn anti aliased Note Some fonts may look better anti aliased while others may not Allow Page Breaks at Ellipses lf checked t
312. ne e Clear Deletes selected text removing it from the document but not putting it into the clipboard e Paste from Displays a menu allowing you to select an existing file Its contents are placed into the currently displayed document at the cursor position e Copy to s This menu item is only available if you have selected i e blocked text in your document If this is the case Screenwriter takes you to a sub menu with the following options New File Existing File Scrap File e New File Copies the selected text and saves it as a New file with the name you enter in the Save As menu e Existing File Copies the selected text and places it at the end of the existing file you select in the Open menu e Scrap File Copies the selected text and places it at the end of an automatically generated Scrap File which has the same name as your document but which ends with Scrap This file is a great place to put text and scenes you want to remove from your document but might want to go back to later e Cut to 7 This menu item will only be available if you have selected i e blocked text in your document If this is the case Screenwriter takes you to a sub menu with the following options Cub En Mew File Existing File Scrap File e New File Cuts the selected text and saves it as a New file with the name you enter in the Save As menu e Existing File Cuts the selected text and places it at th
313. ne associated with the moved Scene Heading does not move with it Locked Page Breaks To use Page Break Locking you need to click on its tab fe Unlocked Locked Multilocked Unlocked Normal Adding or deleting enough text to create a new Page Break causes pages to renumber automatically Locked Adding or deleting enough text to create a new Page Break makes the existing page numbers stay the same and generates a new short A Page If you add text to page 38 for example the text flows over to a new page This new short page becomes 38A If the page 38 text flows over to two new pages the second becomes 38B NOTE Screenwriter displays different page breaks differently Normal and A Page Breaks display as a series of dashes e g The descriptive text contained within the page break line refers to the page following it It only displays if Display Page Break Type on Screen is checked under Tools Options Miscellaneous Multi Locked Once you have locked your script and added A Pages you may want to keep the new A Page Numbering and give any new pages a new unique number Checking this option enables you to do so Any new page added between existing A Pages has a number added after it For example a page added after page 94B would be numbered 94B1 the next one 94B2 etc 282 Movie Magic Screenwriter If a new page is added between a normal page and an A Page it is entered using the Multi
314. ne bandsarbeatasineere nana CERE 45 E malling ia PDE File vis ietar yes A a eat eee 45 TOMES T ls lod 46 NAVIDOC gt ais 46 Opening a o Closing the NavlIDOG sott rca era boa rese idad in 46 COMMON DONOSO tO DEED DT 47 CUTIE PANG e Beatles 48 Sia Ol ae RET M 49 Setting up Outline hierarchy and styles eeeesssseseisssssssssseseeeennn nennen enne nnne nn nnn nennen nnns nnns ns 49 GREGG am AAA a 51 Navigating isa ds Hovde iris ck 52 Selecting M ltiple Elements E 53 Moving Outline Elemeris aio rh ERI oli ista Ode re ee 53 GOpying Quilin El SMS M 54 Promoting and Demoting ElemenltS ccccccccoconncnncccconnoncnnncnononnconnnnnnnonnncrnnnnnnonnnrrnnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnnnnnrnnrrnnnnenonaness 54 o A 56 Scenes Panel CONTO sesionar 56 Navigating the DI ai 57 SOMING SCCNES gt A die cdi 57 Hide and Show Scene Heading Fields cccccccccccccececeeneeeeseeceseeeeceeeeeeeseauaasessueeeeeeeeeeeseseeaeauaaaasseseeeeees 58 Notes Palin a 58 Note Pane C OnTOlS AI A 59 Creating and Deleting Note Categorles ooooncccoccnccccccccoooccconannconennnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonrnnrnnnnnnrenennanenoss 59 Adding and Removing Notes in the DoCUMEONT cccoccccnnncccccncnnnnnncnnnnnnn
315. needs to be created and placed underneath the Title Click OK and the Edit Text window disappears placing your text in a text box on the Title Page Moving a Text Box Select the text box by single clicking on it with the mouse To select more than one text box hold down the Shift key and single click on each box You can now move align them it using any of these methods Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 101 e Drag it where you want it to be placed e Press the arrow keys on the keyboard e Click on the Horizontal or Vertical text alignment buttons at on the right side of the Title Page Publisher Align Horizontally e Left Aligns the left edges of all selected text boxes with the left edge of the first text box that was selected e Right Aligns the right edges of all selected text boxes with the right edge of the first text box that was selected e Centers Horizontally centers all selected text boxes with the horizontal center of the first text box that was selected e Left to Right Aligns the right most box directly against the right edge of the left most of the two boxes This option is ONLY available when you have exactly two text boxes selected e Center on page Centers all selected text boxes with respect to the width of the page taking into account the binding margin if checked If more than one text box is selected then they will be centered as a group that is to say that their total w
316. nes Before Prints the dialogue using the same of Blank Lines Before the Character Name as in the original document e Set Blank Lines Before to Allows you to set the number of Blank Lines Before the Character Name from 1 to 5 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 257 15 12 6 Print Script Notes Print Script Notes Only Notes Before Selected Dialogue Print Notes Directly Above Speeches Print Boxes Around Notes Print Notes lf checked prints Notes in the Animation Recording Script with the following options e Only Notes before selected Dialogue Prints Notes only if they appear directly before a dialogue speech e Print Notes directly above Speeches If checked prints Notes on the line immediately above the Character Name Unchecked prints according to the line spacing set in Blank Lines Before Printed Speeches e Print Boxes around Notes lf checked prints Notes as they appear in the original document with boxes around them Unchecked no boxes are printed 15 12 7 Misc Animation Dialog Preferences Print lt gt Around Numbering Print lt gt around Numbering lf checked displays and prints angle brackets around the dialogue numbers to differentiate between them and page numbers scene numbers etc Substitute Font 5tone Serif Substitute Font Ll ets you print the Animation Recording Script using a different font than in the original document 258
317. next revision When you select Start Next Revision Screenwriter e Removes all Revision Marks e Fixes all A Pages 278 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 3 16 3 1 Locks the Header Text e Advances to the next Revision Draft Color e Prompts for a mandatory Save Displays the Title Page Publisher so you can add the next Revision Draft Color to the Running List and change the Date e Click YES to have Screenwriter start the automated process 2 New drafts must be saved Save the script using the Save As command Give it a different name to reflect the Date and its status as the next Revision Color draft e g MyScript PINK e Click on OK to go to the Title Page Publisher Manually change the Running List adding the current Date and Revision Draft Color Click on OK to save the changes 3 Make changes to the script adding and deleting text as necessary Save the file as you go 4 Issue Revised Pages by printing and distributing them 5 Go back to Step 1 of Start Next Revision Repeat the process for each day s revisions 6 That s the Production Cycle completed Revision Marks A Revision Mark is a special character usually an asterisk usually appearing in the right margin of a line It signifies that changes have been made to that line If you follow the Production Cycle sequence described above Screenwriter will automatically handle Revision Marks for you To work with Revision Marks man
318. ng or editing command in Screenwriter For ease of use the method using the Mouse and the Main Menu Bar is emphasized As you become more familiar with Screenwriter you many want to use Keyboard Shortcuts and Toolbar Icons To see what command a Toolbar Icon represents use the mouse to move the cursor over the icon without clicking on it A box of explanatory Hint text displays directly beneath the icon and any Quick Key shortcut displays on the left of the Bottom Status Bar e Fora list of Main Menu Bar commands see the Appendix chapter entitled Screenwriter 6 Menus 10 e For a list of Keyboard Shortcuts see the Appendix chapter entitled Key Assignments Moving the Cursor Use the following keys to move the cursor around the document quickly CMD UP ARROW eeees Previous Element CMD DOWN ARROW Next Element CTRL OPTION UP ARROW Previous Scene or Outline Element CTRL OPTION DOWN ARROW Next Scene or Outline Element GMD Page UD restar Previous Document Page CMD Page Down Next Document Page CMD HOME oseese Goto Top of Document e pzp Goto End of Document CTRL4G eeeeeeere enne Goto Page menu RIGHTARROW Pr Next character LEFT ARROW atico nica Previous character CMD RIGHT ARROW Next Word CMD LEFT ARROW Previous Word A Beginning
319. ng the slide all the way down makes the display equal to the entire scene for each scene 5 lines L Outline Panel The NaviDoc Outline Panel is new to Screenwriter The Outline Panel is used to add remove modify and navigate to outline elements in your document The Outline Panel can be displayed by clicking on the Outline tab in the NaviDoc The keyboard command for showing the Outline Panel in the NaviDoc is CTRL 1 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 177 m Eu i El fm ga Ie E3 4 gt ESE 4 E How OQ me nic HM Ges k ge sati ERE We oU eI e pccpccspc TEMOR gt EIN EXT STREET NIGHT D Delete Add Outline Element CLOSE SHOT George in the uniform of an air raid warden n loser Irure rci SL RE PRE PE ER PS PE is patrolling his beat EN JOSEPH S VOICE Se O IG Air raid Warden as R ee O EXT DUMP DAY CLOSE SHOT Wheelbarrow full of junk being dumped onto pile JOSEPH S VOICE 5Crap drives EXT HOUSE NIGHT CLOSE SHOT man beside lighted window pulls down the shade as George blows his whistle rre TCR 12 11 1 Outline List The Outline List displays all outline elements and notes in the document Clicking on an outline element in the outline list scrolls the document to that outline element Use the mouse NaviDoc menu or keyboard commands to navigate the Outline List 12 11 2 Outline Controls The Outline
320. ng you d try to save me And you see you did and that s how I saved you Parenthetical Parenthetical also called a wryly indicates the way a line of dialogue is delivered or a gesture that does not need its own line of Action typically used sparingly if at all With the cursor anywhere in a Dialogue element press Shift 9 left parenthesis NOTE if Tab in Dialogue goes to a Parenthetical is checked under Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Editing press TAB A Parenthetical element is created at the cursor location If the cursor is at the beginning of a Dialogue element the Parenthetical is placed between the Character Name and the Dialogue BERT dq What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in I knew if I were drowning you d try to save me If the cursor is in the middle of a Dialogue element the Dialogue is broken by the Parenthetical BERT What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in dq I knew if I were drowning you d try to save me Type the Parenthetical text and press RETURN The cursor moves to the Dialogue element following the Parenthetical Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 123 10 11 10 12 BERT What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in whispering IT knew if I were drowning you d try to save me Type a Left Parenthesis in Dialogue as Text To type in Dialogue as text instead of creat
321. nge the Options Clicking the QuickType button allows the master to turn off all Auto Pop up and Running List options This enables the Slave to use the Quick Keys Editing Keys in iPartner e Tab Key Puts in Character Names regardless of where the cursor is in the document e Enter Key Takes you from one element type to another i e pressing ENTER while in Character Name will take you to dialogue while in Transition will take you to Scene Heading etc e Left Parenthesis Key Puts you in a Parenthetical when pressed while in Dialogue This key adds a Character Extension if pressed while in a Character Name e CTRL B Turns Bold on off e CTRL E Puts you into a Scene Heading with EXT and a space already typed in for you e CTRL I Puts you into a Scene Heading with INT and a space already typed in for you e CTRL O If you aren t in a Shot then it puts you into one e CTRL R Forces a refreshing of the screen e CTRL S lIf you aren t in a Scene Heading then it puts you into one e CTRL T If you aren t in a Transition then it puts you into one e CTRL U Turns Underlining on off e CTRL Y Turns Italics on off e CTRL ENTER Puts you into Action e SHIFT ENTER Puts in a Forced Page Break e ALT ENTER Puts in a Hard Return e CTRL Puts in a Soft Hyphen e CTRL SHIFT Puts in a Hard Dash e CTRL SHIFT Puts in a into Dialogue without making it a Parenthetical
322. nnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 219 Atach Documen AS uds EUREN 220 Compose Message M sprene inn E S E 220 CELL P E E E N E E E E E E E E E A A E E E E E 220 15 CUSTOMIZING Screenwriters oos corum aauknua vet 2b aa di 222 A Menu c 223 uU eoe 223 SHOW FORMAL eoo EET a a dia 223 ZOOM SCLECIN eR 224 zi A A 225 FICA TEX SIZ Ce E RM 225 Toolbar Icons Men gem 226 GUSIONINZE TOO a o MN LIE eee es 227 liue meeeet 229 Quick Type Pre lores od eu acd tein e ean dct ii o Mei MM rM EE OTI tds 229 Contents 9 AUTO OO Bo emm 230 Enable GUCk I ype Eny croes a adas 230 UN M E 232 RUANO LISIS sidrene E ET EEE R T taa 232 Pressing ihe ENTER KOV A ais ute E E E CRM SM M ME YD fepe 233 Other Editing Preference Sii An 233 Startup FeS ODIOS iia 234 DOCUMENT OellllgSsiirise st sete sese ter ee das exten iaa 234 Restore the Main Window s SIZE esasen eiea Ere a aE nennen nnne nnn nnns EEE nn rris nenne nnn n rris nna nns 235 Retain Previous Versions ODHOFIS sica ido a lass ned eS qaa xr VE Adee 235 PIGS PrElGRGNGeS A o A In 236 When Screenwriter starts it SNOUIC cccecccecnsecceeccesssssenseneeeeeeeeeeseccccacsseseneaeeneeeeeeeesnceccacsesseeeeeeeeeeseass 237 Detault Document Folde hs A A aaa kaes 237 Relan Previo
323. nnononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnos 60 Bookmarks Panel 225 2 m etd Don asia eai i b a or e iei trasero quaa ioa reet apices Dress Ra 62 Adding and Removing BOOKMARKS da 62 Editing Bookmarks iue Eae ebd e tas orte devatihpa i desetebud edes uu peii dites dete bens 62 Navigating the Mieres qM P EE 63 lil A wet M 63 wie d E A N E R 64 INduSiny Siandards and Conventions nesei raaa a t de eas A ER aaa atiii 64 The different elements of a Screenplay cccccccccconononnnononcnnononononcnnnonononnnnnoncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnannnrrnnnnnnnnnnnannnninnnos 66 wie ameet 66 AGHOIY dii suiuicceeiipiqe eMe Ye LM YE CIL ee 67 Character Name D Tu Im 68 Dialogue o y oninia o dien tease eet Es 68 Parenthetical isso Dae ies Ti i ps VEI EP 69 SMOE pon A ta IM ED IEEE VD MCA E S M 69 TIransillOl Luuuecemedsecinsdeda ie ds 70 Other FOnmManting Elmer TEE E i NTE eTA 71 Character Extensa indi 71 CONTO IE hRaraci n Nate a A T 72 MORE and CONT D 2 o la 73 wen M RS SCT RO A e ei cent oot Sta tls 73 Industry standards and CONVEntONS oasis taria ld id 73 he different elementsS Ola MMM 76 PAGO gt do te RERUM 77 Movie Magic Screenwriter Scene ADSL MNT 77 Scene HEAGING sirnane 77 o v teles eee ce aan
324. ns to your preference Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 275 e Click on the Printing tab and set the Print Bottom Continueds and Print MORE options to your preference Click on the OK button to accept your changes 4 Under the Production Menu select Lock the Script Click OK to confirm your decision A Lock the Script window displays Lock the Script TURN OWN the following LOCK the following Mi Top Scene Continueds MI Left amp Right Scene Numbers WI scene Headings Mi Page Breaks v Bottom Scene Continueds Auta Revision Marks All Header Text Set Up Header Text Ed gute qtd pop QM HE I coa 2 Set the Header to Print on Every Page WI After Locking the Headers set the Revision Draft Color to BLUE Remove All Current Revision Marks t Cancel Screenwriter s defaults for Locked Scripts are already selected for you Generally you will want to accept these settings unless your Production Company dictates otherwise If desired you can e TURN ON or off the options you prefer by clicking on their check boxes Grayed out options have already been selected by your prior choices in Element Styles e LOCK or Unlock items as you prefer by clicking their check boxes e SETUP the Header Text by editing the default codes Click on a Code s button to enter itin the Header The default Header Text for the White shooting script reads something like White Revision 12 25 97 120 using the current
325. nt This is unconventional as Transitions are intended to bridge two other elements Unchecked part of the element preceding the Transition is broken to appear at the top of the new page The previous page may have extra blank white space as a result Allow Transition on Bottom CONTINUED line lIf checked forces a Transition element to fit on the bottom of a page if the next element is Scene Heading or Act Scene Text Only applies when Bottom Scene Continueds are turned on the Transition takes the place of the Bottom Scene Continued Miscellaneous Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line wi Count More Line in Page Breaking Starting Page Number a ella Start 1st Farced Page on Line Allow Scene on TOP CONTINUED line lf checked a Scene Heading or Act Scene Text that is the first item on a page is placed where the Top Scene Continued would appear Only applies when Top Scene Continueds are turned on Unchecked the first element text on a page appears in the same position on each page regardless of the Top Continueds Count More Line in Page Breaking lf checked the line containing MORE is considered part of the Dialogue element for page breaking purposes Unchecked only the actual Dialogue text is considered when deciding where to break the page Starting Page Number Allows you to specify a different starting page number for the script Default is 1 Start 1st Forced Page on Line Allows text on the first
326. nt at the current cursor position in the document Promote Outline Element Promotes moves to the left the current outline item s by assigning the style above the current style in the Outline Style Table The keyboard command for promoting an outline element is CTRL LEFT ARROW Demote Outline Element Demotes moves to the right the current outline item by assigning the style below the current style in the Outline Style Table The keyboard command for demoting an outline element is CTRL RIGHT ARROW 152 Opens the Outline Element Styles window which controls the list and format of all available outline styles This is the same as selecting the Format Element Styles command and selecting Outline Styles Top Goes to the beginning of the list in the NaviDoc panel Bottom Goes to the end of the item list in the NaviDoc panel Page Up Goes up one screen s worth of items in the item list of the NaviDoc panel Page Down Goes down one screen s worth of items in the item list of the NaviDoc panel Previous Row Goes up one item in the item list in the NaviDoc panel Next Row Goes down one item in the item list in the NaviDoc panel Decrease NaviDoc Font Size When the NaviDoc is open this command decreases the font size of the items in the visible panel The font change does not effect hidden NaviDoc panels The keyboard command for this is CTRL Ctrl Left Bracket Increase NaviDoc Font Size When the NaviDoc is open th
327. ntifying each speech for recording sessions editing and so on Animation dialogue numbering preferences are found under Screenwriter gt Preferences Anim Dialog in the program Go to Animation Dialog Preferences 254 for more on this topic Animation Recording Scripts Many animation production companies want Recording Scripts print outs of dialogue only with each speech numbered sequentially Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 303 16 11 1 Printing Animation Recording Scripts Many animation production companies want print outs of just dialogue with an incrementing number to the right of each speech Under the File menu select Print A Print window displays Select the Dialogue radio button The Print window displays options for printing Dialogue Dialogue Printing Print Dialogue with Reference Page Numbers and Statistics EJ Dialogue with Cues for Actors Entire Scenes that ANY of the Selected Characters are in f Entire Scenes that ALL of the Selected Characters are in Animation Recording Script Format F3 Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only ANNIE m SelectAll ANOTHER MAN BERT BOUNCER CARTER CHARLIE CHILDREN CHILDREN S VOICES CLARENCE COP Clear Selection P Select the Animation Recording Script Format radio button Or to print Revised speeches only select the Animation Recording Script Format Asterisked Speeches Only
328. nts 11 REVISION Ma vac elated queni im eteseueiod esum Nae dees dae x IM I LIMITED M 284 Js Alternate Scene Number isis 285 Encked Letter SiS A AAA AA A OS 285 Advanced Locking Features cui dadas 286 Changing the Leve Or more d nome CE 286 Overriding a Scene Numbers ind 287 PIXON ICCA AAA eee eaeee aes ee ae ee 288 CONVEMUING A PAGES eset cs de ata sins dai E E 288 COMON SHO RATES LOT 289 Set Revision Draft Color Orders aei dia Resa d buds 290 Producton BreakdOWNS oe Dm 291 Print Standard BreakdoWN S cinco stet rs I ert eaa capte ext pa Ia estes ras dae esset dita ax Gna 291 SOM Breakdown PrImiarily Dy sudo ioo descr qoo voe A AA Neb RO IE M LA DERI LIE 292 SOCOM he elim o MR PP 293 Calc ulaimg Dyson Scent hea Sete ne aay oss testet e scode A 294 Display Eigh Totals e 295 Miscelldrieous ODIOFS e e S E De DEO de E S 295 Breakdown Tagging roana a a Ea a E a aa a aa ceteris E RR 296 tagging Mode ii A AS E A e 296 Tagging MSc cia ld it 296 UMmadana EMSs sp te IA AA A 297 Tag ems Global tt e o Le be 297 Ignore Selection Tor BEA IOWAS A EEEE Ea EEAS 297 UNITA NEMS eria a t isaac 297 Edit Breakdown Cale gore Sunre a a a va dele ule M Mie c i PM O S 298 Breakdown AS e 299 layout Breakdown Sheels a ledge sess 299 Export to Movie Magic Scheduling 2 eroe oe 1a ooo tror eroe eio traten aen a eon toas
329. nts with other Movie Magic ocreenwriter owners using pre 6 0 versions of the software To save your file in the pre 6 0 format SCW use the Export to submenu located in the File menu and choose Screenwriter 4 x and 2000 scw from the list of file formats The scw file format is compatible with Screenwriter versions 4 0 and SCW later However saving your file to the scw format may cause loss of NaviDoc information in the file such as outline styles 24 Movie Magic Screenwriter 4 4 Undo Levels The Undo levels have been changed from a maximum of 20 to a maximum of 99 4 5 Shortcut Key Changes in 6 0 Changes to Command Key Assignments for Movie Magic Screenwriter Macintosh Command Name Old Shortcut New Shortcut CMD Option Delete Delete Previous Word Previous Word Cth Delete Cth Delete Delete CMD Delete CMD Delete Delete Delete Next Word Next Word Ctrl Delete Forward Delete Forward CMD Delete Forward CMD Delete Forward Forward Bo Top of document document Home CMD Home CMD Home Home Bottom of document of document CMD End CMD End Word Left Left Ctrl Left Arrow Ctrl Left Arrow Left Arrow CMD Left Arrow CMD Left Arrow Left Arrow Word c Ctrl Right Arrow CMD Right Arrow Extend Selection Word Lef
330. nwriter 6 Help 359 17 7 17 7 1 Keep Element Together Files Installed The following files are installed with Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 0 e Installed Contents e Sample Scripts and Templates sse e Start Menu Folder Sample Scripts and Templates My Documents Screenwriter Documents Sample Scripts Export to Scheduling mmsw Generic Comic Sample mmsw Gosset amp Kayle Comic Sample mmsw Novel mmsw Radio Show Sample mmsw Screen mmsw Sitcom1 mmsw Sitcom2 mmsw Spec Script mmsw Stage Play mmsw Templates Defualt Template Instructional Templates Generic Comic Template def GossetKayleComicTemp def Multi Media Template def Novel Template def Radio Show Template def Radio Play Templatedef opec Script def otage Play def Blank Templates Generic Comic Template def GossetKayleComicTemp def Multi Media Template def Novel Template def Radio Show Template def Radio Play Templatedef 360 Movie Magic Screenwriter opec Script def Stage Play def TV Templates TV Templates 3rd Rock from the Sun def Ally McBeal def Babylon5 def Bay Watch def Beverly Hills 91202 def Boy Meets World def BuffyTheVampireSlayer def Caroline in the City def Chicago Hope def CSI def Cybil def Dawson Creek def Days of Our Lives def Dharma and Greg def Doctor Quinn def Drew Carey Show def Early Edition def Ellen def ER def Frasier def Friends def Grace Under Fire def Hercules def Home Improvement d
331. o Reassign Outline Element Styles in the PO GUIS I NER PER 187 A Note About Copying Styles Between DOCUMENIS cceceee cece eee e ee ee ee ee teed teed ran 188 OMG SAIN Sat tanec csse os ON 189 Outline Tools in the Document VICW ccccececceccsccecsececceccuceccuccuscuccececaucecaucaucutauceecsecausessetanceecutaueaeeass 190 Movie Magic Screenwriter Adding and Removing Outline Elements in the DocUMeNt ccccccccccncnnnncccnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnennnnnonnnnnnnonnnnns 190 Reassigning Outline Elements in the Document sessssssssssssseeeeeeeen nennen nnn nnne nnns 190 Promoting and Demoting Outline ElementS cccccccoconnnnnnconcnnnocnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnanrrnnnnnnnnnos 191 13 Prm ng the DOCU MEN eem 192 Page SOU Rc M 192 DOCUMENT LAVO UL 193 Header and FOOUEN omita 194 Pte ele Na CIO Ratton ces Et T TIT EU NIE ETE 195 PUNIM Date AS actum d vidue tete a ds 196 P b In ACUBIGSK AS ross caca aus RE uS Satan dao 196 PUTIN Scene E3bel AS aseo p a beth Ue p n ditus A 196 A AA EE PIRE er ere ee eee 197 Alon Headers PODES is AAA bud ces kid bwin reo sedan E 197 Blank Bines TolloWilid Sado aia ti aaa 197 A 197 Printing the DOCU NE 6 oes citet ouo che iaa 198 Production Breakdowns Print Window 111111 eeeeeeee eiii eeeeee e
332. o the Production menu and click Breakdown In the cascading menu choose Tagging Mode It will reveal all tags Go back into the Production menu through Breakdown and click Tagging Mode again to turn it off This will hide all tags and cause the squares to disappear Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 99 7 1 Title Page A Title Page comes before page one of the document In a spec script all it needs to contain is the script s title the author s name and an address and contact phone number In a production script what text appears on the title page is determined by the production company Screenwriter s Title Page Publisher allows you to create a title page with a WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get page layout Grid lines are displayed to help you position your text boxes and do not print The title page is automatically saved with each document yet it stays out of your way while writing Display Size fe Full Page _ Zoomed To add or edit text double click on existing text or at the location on the page where you want new text to go Or use the buttons below Add Text Edit Text Align Horizontal Pe Align Vertical binding margin when horizontally centering on page PrintTitlePage Import Export Cancel P 4 Opening a Title Page Under the File menu select Title Page Publisher and you will see a screen like the one in the example below You can enlarge
333. oc Menu 25 e Tools Menu s e Production Menu 29 e Window Menu 239 e Help Menu s Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 17 1 1 Screenwriter Menu About Screenwriter Preferences a6 Services p Hide Screenwriter H Hide Others X a H Show All Quit Screenwriter db 311 e About Screenwriter Opens Screenwriter s About Screenwriter window which shows the serial number version number copyright and trademark notices and credits e Preferences Opens a new document and lets you select a pre existing document template e Services Screenwriter supports the OSX Services menu which provides a handful of features writers might find useful For example if a user selects a word in their document they can do the following via the Services menu e Look up the word in Word Menu via Screenwriter gt Services gt Find in Word Menu e Look up the word in the OSX Dictionary via Screenwriter gt Services gt Look Up in Dictionary e Let the computer speak the selected text via Screenwriter gt Services gt Speech gt Start Speaking Text e Google the word via Screenwriter gt Services gt Search With Google See OS X help for more information on this feature e Hide Screenwriter Hides the Movie Magic Screenwriter program e Hide Others Hides all programs except Movie Magic Screenwriter e Show All Shows all active programs e Quit Screenwriter
334. oc Tools Production Window There are three types of menus e Pull Down Menu s e List Menu ss e Options Menu se Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 89 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 Pull Down Menu ECL rie coc j About Screenwriter Preferences a6 E terer mm Services En Hide Screenwriter 35H Hide Others X 38H Show All Quit Screenwriter 0 Pull down menus pull down from the Main Menu Bar With the menu displayed use the mouse to click on an option NOTE If there is a Mac OS X Quick key equivalent for a menu option it displays to the right of the Menu ltem as in CMD Q for Quit Screenwriter in the example above List Menu iP Character Names GEORGE GEORGE S VOICE GOWER List Menus are scrollable menus with text items selectable for input into your document without typing such as the Character List in the example To select an item e Type enough letters to match the item you want typing c highlights CARTER in the example above while typing ch highlights CHARLIE Then press RETURN e Or Click on the item you want using the mouse e Or Scroll through the items with the arrow keys and press RETURN to select the highlighted item More items can be viewed by clicking or dragging in the scroll bar on the right of the menu Options Menu Option menus have different types of input options including Push Buttons Check Boxes Radio Buttons and Text amp N
335. oc menu the Insert Element button on the top toolbar or the Outline Element button on the right toolbar e Press the Delete button to remove selected outline elements from the document Pressing this icon deletes the entire outline element NOTE Placing the text edit cursor within an outline item in the document is sufficient use the Delete button You can also delete outline elements by selecting their contents and hitting Backspace or Delete on the keyboard Reassigning Outline Elements in the Document Act Break Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Label Script Note Shoat Title Centered Transition Sequence Scene Beat Create Edit Outline Styles This control sets the outline style of the selected paragraphs in the document view It is an easy way to reassign an outline style The current style is identified by a check mark To modify styles click the Styles button See Element Styles 182 Scene Heading Li Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 191 Promoting and Demoting Outline Elements o a These icons change the outline style of selected outline items based on the style s position in the Outline Styles table e Click on the Promote button Left Arrow to promote move to a greater level in the hierarchy the outline element by assigning the style above the current style in the Outline Styles table The keyboard command for promoting an outline el
336. of Day This control shows or hides scene heading elements in the scene list of the Scenes Panel ocenes headings may show or hide scene numbers interior and exterior designation or time of day Scene Element Spacing Control This control shows spacing between scene elements When ON it puts double spacing between scene elements in the Outline Panel When OFF it puts single spacing between scene elements in the Outline Panel Note The effects of this control are visible only when multiple scene lines are visible See Viewable Scene Lines Control 176 Sync Control On Off This control appears on all panels and effects them globally Synch ON When enabled clicking in the document will scroll the NaviDoc to that location and display the sync frame around that row Synch OFF With the sync button disabled clicking in the document will not scroll the NaviDoc NOTE clicking on a row in the NaviDoc will always scroll the document regardless if the sync button is enabled or disabled Scenes Panel Options Y Alternate Background Color for Scenes Panel Odd Row Text BEE Odd RowFill Even Row Text BY Even RowFill e Scenes Panel Font These options control the appearance of the text font in the scene list They include the font face font size font color and font background color 176 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 10 7 12 11 e Row Lines This option controls the app
337. of a new document press RETURN Attention Je Put In FADE IN A pop up box displays asking you if you want it to start your script with FADE IN e Click on the Yes button to put it in e Click on the No button to start your script without it Next a Scene Heading element is automatically created Scene Heading Scene Heading also called a Slugline designates the beginning of a scene It tells the reader if the scene is interior INT or exterior EXT and where and when the scene takes place A Pop up list displays with Initial Scene Heading Text options FULL SHOT FADE IN Make this an Outline Element Mo Initial Text End of Act Start New Act Make this a Shot Make this a Transition Nevermind You can either click on a pop up list item with the mouse or press the Hot Key designated by the underline for that item For example type e for EXT to enter EXT and the correct spacing following it Type v for Never mind to Cancel or press ESC 118 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 5 10 6 INT Next enter a Location Location To enter a Location that s already been used in this script press RETURN If you do not have any existing locations simply type one in A Pop up list displays with your script s unique Location Text options Scene Locations HALLWAY Type the first letter of the Location or if more than one hav
338. of him his coffee untouched WAITRESS Dialogue Dialogue A speech by a character Formatting e Left margin is roughly 2 5 from the left edge of the page e About 3 5 wide e Left justified e Sentence case e There are no blank lines above Dialogue EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner is full to capacity The UNSHAVEN MAN sits at the counter Staring at the gold amulet in front of him his coffee untouched Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 69 WAITRESS Anything else Sir can I get you anything else Parenthetical Shot Parenthetical wryly This element is used to indicate how a character s dialogue is to be spoken usually to emphasize subtext occasionally they can be used for Action if it is only a few words e g palming the coin It is generally accepted that they should be used very sparingly since they can be a sign of an amateur writer Formatting e Left margin is about 3 0 from the left edge of the page e About 1 5 wide e Left justified e Lower case e There are no blank lines above a Parenthetical EXAMPLE INT GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE DAY The diner is full to capacity The UNSHAVEN MAN sits at the counter Staring at the gold amulet in front of him steaming coffee untouched WAITRESS Anything else Sir can I get you anything else UNSHAVEN MAN palming the amulet No Shot Secondary heading or sub scene This element can be
339. of the commands The Search and Spell menus have been removed The Production and Window menus remain unchanged For current Screenwriter users the table below should help your transition to the new arrangement The table lists the menu items that have changed and identifies their new locations After the table are screenshots of the new menus In the table below new menu items are in BOLD ITALICS LOCATION LOCATION NAME 20 Movie Magic Screenwriter Header Footer Setup Page Layout Title Page Publisher Publish to Internet Program Options Register with Writer s Guild Backup to Floppy Cut Element Insert Element Clear Paste into Current Element Paste From Change Text Color Normal WP Mode Paste Special Turn Off Block Convert Case Change Text Style View Menu NaviDoc Scene Numbering File File File File File File File OLD MENU LOCATION Paste Special Paste Special Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit OLD MENU LOCATION Format Header and Footer Format Document Layout View Tools Tools Options Tools REMOVED NEW MENU LOCATION NAME Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit Format Font Color Format Normal Word Processor Mode REMOVED REMOVED Format Format Font Style NEW MENU LOCATION NAME View View Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 21 Toolbars Normal Index Cards View NaviDoc Hide Names in Pop Up List H
340. ooccoccccooooooononononononononnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnss 348 Production Problems and SOlUtlOriS s aano t irt ida indices 350 importing Doc ments pee Rm 351 Preparing Documents Tor ImpoFtfig reni saci in cee chadese aces evita SERE al i 351 Bie uere P 352 Gut and Paste IMPOR israel 353 Importing a Macintosh Word Processor script cessisse nennen nnne nnn nnne 355 Importing a Scriptware for Windows SCripPl occccccccccnnnnnnnnonnoccnnnncnnnonnnnononnnnnnronnnncnnnnnnonnn nono ennt nnne nenas 355 Cleaning Up Imponed SCS c eua cuoc u261 e A cei E Debt veces ees 355 EXDOMING DOCUMENTS mee 356 EXDOIU fuxlxssbumse M MINE I MM ML IMMUNE 356 Importing a Screenwriter Export SOPA 357 Gut and Paste EXDOFIFIG 33 52 o oso a rico 357 Format Cod S 358 A A ES EOK E EEEE EE 359 Sample Scripts and Templates cu eio o eee eas deg ee a s ib a eb dre Cr ed ede inde deine 359 Index 362 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 13 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help Movie Magic Screenwriter Software for Writing Screenplays Teleplays Stage Plays Novels Animation Scripts Comic Book scripts Multimedia Scripts amp more User s Manual for Mac OS X 24 hour Web Technical Support http support screenplay com re
341. or reduce the size of the title page displayed onscreen with the Full Page and Zoomed buttons at top right 100 Movie Magic Screenwriter 7 2 7 3 Title Page Publisher Display Size 3 Full Page Zoomed x v Mi show Grid Inches Centimeters To add or edit text double k on existing text or a clic tthe location on the page where yo want new text to go Or use the butt low Add Text Align H tal Align Vertical use ee inch binding margin when horizontally t n page Print Title Page Import Export RE TRE IE ETL ET PE RE AA Cancel Creating Text Boxes Double click anywhere on the title page to create a text box The Edit Text window displays TUTTI mee Show Me The Magic b y Screenwriter EDITA eturn to break lines Blur Font Courier ress ret gt lick OK FU E BBE ioc i NA Ex a ys Size 18 H Coane ED Type your text The Left three buttons allow you to select Bold Underline and Italics respectively The next button lets you select the text s Font The next three buttons allow you to select Left Justified Centered or Right Justified text NOTE All the text in any given text box has the same style i e bold underline etc font and justification If you want the document s Title to appear differently from the Author s name for example underlined a separate text box
342. or the Delete command Delete Left of the cursor by character DELETE Delete Right of the cursor by character FORWARD DELETE Delete to End of Line CMD OPTION FORWARD DELETE Delete Next Word seeen ion CMD FORWARD DELETE Delete Previous Word se CMD DELETE Undo To Undo a text edit select Undo before selecting any other editing command Under the Edit menu select Undo or press CMD Z Screenwriter has a multi level undo capable of undoing up to the last 99 editing changes you made It can undo cutting amp pasting blocks search amp replace and more Screenwriter recognizes three basic types of editing e Adding text including Pasting e Deleting text including cutting deleting blocks e Global processing such as search replace formatting changes etc Redo To restore a text edit you ve just Undone Under the Edit menu select Redo or press SHIFT CMD 2Z Formatting Text screenwriter deals with text formatting Bold Underline Italics Strikethrough by placing hidden format codes surrounding the formatted text One code starts the format another ends it 150 Movie Magic Screenwriter 11 9 1 11 9 2 11 9 3 11 9 4 11 9 5 In normal use you won t need to be aware of these codes Screenwriter s default is to Hide Format Codes To display or hide the codes under the View menu select Sho
343. ort Layout Breakdown Sheets Print Standard Breakdowns e Tagging Mode Toggles Tagging mode on or off When turned on a checkmark appears next to Tagging Mode on the menu Tagging mode allows you to tag items by double clicking on them then selecting categories from a list Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 333 Edit Categories Displays a screen where you can change the names or shortcut codes of Breakdown Categories Tag Item Globally Displays a screen allowing you to tag every appearance of an item in your document Untag All Items Removes all Breakdown tagging codes from your document Movie Magic Scheduling Export Exports your tagged items for import directly into Movie Magic Scheduling Allows you to choose from a list of scenes from your document e Print Standard Breakdowns 2 Movie Magic Screenwriter has its own powerful internal breakdown capabilities Select this item to go to a Breakdown Sheet menu where you can select what and how you want your breakdowns printed Layout Breakdown Sheets Movie Magic Screenwriter has built in industry standard Breakdown Sheets and this menu item will let you layout which categories go where on the breakdown sheets TV Breakdowns Shows options for TV sitcom production breakdowns Generate Rundown Sheet Print Set Lists Scene Character Lists e Generate Rundown Sheet sss e Generate Set List 333 e Scene Character Lists 237
344. ort is on a different computer than Screenwriter you can t use the Cut and Paste method Instead 1 Open the Mac Word Processor e g Microsoft Word or TextEdit and open the script file you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under the File menu choose Save As Save the script under a different name 3 In the Save As window there should be an option to save the script in a different format Typically it says something like Format or File Type or Save Type Change it to Rich Text Format or RTF If that s not available choose Text or ASCII Text If Text or ASCII options like With Line Breaks or With Formatting are available select them 4 Click on OK to save When the file s saved exit the Windows Word Processor lf importing from a different computer transfer the saved file to your Screenwriter computer Now follow the Direct Import instructions above Importing a Scriptware for Windows script First export the Scriptware script as a Scriptware Tagged file 1 Open Scriptware for Windows and open the script you want to import to Screenwriter 2 Under the File menu select Export then Scriptware Tagged 3 In the file name field Enter C Movie Magic Screenwriter Scripts lt File Name gt TAG Click on the Export button to save the Export file 4 Exit Scriptware Now follow the Direct Import instructions above Cleaning up Imported Scripts ocreenwriter may require you to do some cleaning up after importing a script
345. ouble clicking on it with the mouse Only text in Action Note or Outline elements can be tagged A Breakdown Category screen displays Click on a category to assign the item in which to assign the item for the overcoat Costume is the appropriate category A Format Code is placed around the item displaying an abbreviated code for the Breakdown category for Costume the code CS displays around the item to give CS overcoat NOTE Tags are invisible and will not print Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 297 16 7 3 16 7 4 16 7 5 16 7 6 Untagging Items Tagged items can be untagged by e Placing the cursor directly after the ending Format Code square bracket and pressing Backspace Delete on Mac on the keyboard e Placing the cursor directly before the beginning Format Code square bracket and pressing the Delete Forward Delete on Mac key on the keyboard e f no other editing has been performed since tagging the item click Edit Undo Tag Items Globally Tagging an item globally tells Screenwriter to tag every occurrence of an item in the script instead of manually tagging it each time you find it yourself This saves you time and the possibility of missing an occurrence of an item To tag an item globally Select the item by double clicking on it Or under the Production menu select Breakdown then Tag Item Globally The Tag Item Globally menu displays If you selected an item it
346. page of the script and all pages following Forced Page Breaks to start further down the page than the first line Enter the line number to start text on Used in Sitcom formats to start each scene about a third of the way down the page 272 Movie Magic Screenwriter Locked Scripts The options on this page are only used during production Locked Scripts are covered in the Production Features 273 chapter Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 273 16 16 1 Production Features e Production Rewrites 273 e The Production Cycle 27 e Revision Marks 278 e Locked Script Options esi e Advanced Locking Features 286 e Production Breakdowns 291 e Breakdown Sheets 299 e Export to Movie Magic Scheduling so Hi P ti 301 e Animation Recording Scripts 302 Production Rewrites After the final draft of a script is turned in by the screenwriter and the decision to go into production is made copies of what is now the shooting script are distributed to cast and crew Each time a change is made to the script after that everyone needs a copy of the changes Instead of sending out the entire document to everyone again only those pages with changed text are sent the revised pages Revised pages have revision marks next to those lines that have changed or revision marks in the header if most of the page has changed Added A and B and deleted Omitted scenes an
347. pe from the menu Screenwriter 4 x and 000 scw Adobe Acrobat PDF pdf Rich Text Format rtf Plain Text txt HTML Publishing html Movie Magic Scheduling Export sex Gorilla scheduling sex CompanyMOVE ShowPlanner sex FrameForge 3D Studio txt Avid Editor Format txt There are the export file types formats currently available e Screenwriter 4 x and 2000 scw Normally used for saving for pre 6 0 Screenwriter documents e Adobe Acrobat PDF pdf Used to export to Adobe Acrobat This is a widely used format that can be opened and printed by a wide variety of software programs on both Windows and Macintosh e Rich Text Format rtf Compatible with most Microsoft programs such as Microsoft Word Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 357 17 5 2 17 5 3 e Plain Text txt Used to export to programs which cannot handle any of the other format A plain text format with all the text of the document indented correctly using spaces HTML Publishing html This feature saves your document as an HTML file and allows you to upload it to an FTP site In order to upload your document you will need to know the URL user name and password Movie Magic Scheduling Export sex Screenwriter can export all your tagged breakdown items for every scene to a Screenwriter Export file with the file extension SEX This file can be imported directly into Movie Magic Scheduling wher
348. phabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not Checking this radio button and pressing OK brings up a Select Names screen Click on one or more name s to select them then Double Click on the top bar of the Select Names screen to return to the Production Breakdowns menu NOTE If you select any Primary sort other than Script Order Time of Day Normalization is performed any scene that ends with CONTINUOUS LATEH or SAME TIME is automatically given the previous Scene Heading s Time of Day Movie Magic Scheduling File Prints a breakdown to disk saving it as a Movie Magic Scheduling import file with a file extension of SEX It contains the Scene Number Scene Heading Starting Page Number and page count in Eighths of a page and all items Tagged with Breakdown Tagging Options under Secondary Sort and Miscellaneous are grayed out and unselectable Script Breakdown Sheets Prints breakdown sheets that include any items you ve tagged in Breakdown Tagging Secondary Sort by Secondary sort order allows you to specify how you want the scenes sorted within the Primary groupings of Interior VS Exterior Location Time of Day or Characters For example Interior VS Exterior as the Primary sort and Script Order as a Secondary sort would give this kind of breakdown EXTERIOR 1l HOSPITAL DAY de 4 458 4 PARK DAY 4 4 2 8 5 HOSPITAL EVENING A 5 676 2 LES INTERIOR 2 HOSPITAL
349. pitalization as Search Text ONLY Checked finds only exact case matches Unchecked this option finds all instances of the search text without consideration of the text s case From Cursor Position Begins the search at the cursor position Entire Document Begins the search at the beginning of the document e Replace with Enter the text to replace the found text Leave this empty if you wish to remove the found text when using any of the Replace commands e Keep Capitalization of Original Word When checked this makes sure that the replaced text matches the case of the found text in each instance If the found text is all caps the 158 Movie Magic Screenwriter 11 11 2 Change Character Name 11 12 replaced text will be all caps If the found text is mixed case the replaced text will be mixed case etc Unchecked all replaced text is inserted in the case as it is typed in the Replace with text box Character Name Change Search for l ANNIE CORAM RA GC ee ERG RO eee eee MURAT ee RA Ea RR ee o mm m n oom s ml Replace with ANDREA Search Backwards F3 From Cursor Position fe Entire Script Screenwriter handles character name elements different from normal text Changing a character s name is simple Note When you change a character s name it changes it everywhere in your document e Search for Pick the name you want to change from the popup menu of character names e Replace with
350. play If you would like to keep the scrap file simply go to the File menu and click Save Cut to Cuts the selected text removing it from your document and saving it in a new file e New File Removes selected information from the original document creates a new file puts the selected information within it and allows you to name the file before the program saves it Screenwriter keeps the original document open To retrieve the new file you must go to File Open e Existing File Removes the selected information from the original document and 98 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 12 copies it to a document that already exists Choosing this option brings up a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the file that you would like this text to be pasted to Select the file and click open Screenwriter pastes the text to the end of the document and closes the file Your current document will remain open e Scrap File Creates a new file with the same name as your current document but at the end will have scrap The file that it creates will have the same name of your current document but at the end will have scrap You can find this document by going into the Window menu At the bottom of this menu it lists all the open documents Simply click on your scrap file and the document will display If you would like to keep the scrap file simply go to the File menu and click Save 3 Give the new file a differen
351. play The elements in a screenplay are e Scene Heading s slugline e Action 7 description e Character Name se e Dialogue ss e Parenthetical ee wryly e Shot e secondary heading sub scene e Transition 701 e Other Formatting Elements 7 ocreenwriter automatically uses the format for a spec screenplay by default If you have changed your Default def template or you want to make sure you have loaded the original opec Script format click on Format Load Styles From Template and choose Spec Script from the Blank Templates folder Scene Heading Scene Heading also called a slugline This signifies the beginning of a new scene and tells the reader where and when it takes place Formatting e Flush with the left margin 1 5 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 67 Action e Right margin is approximately 1 0 from the right edge of the page and staggered e ALL CAPS e One blank line double spaced above each new Scene Heading some writers prefer two blank lines triple spaced e Never at the bottom of a page There are three components of a standard Scene Heading the Start of Scene Location and the Time of Day e Start of Scene A typical Scene Heading begins with INT interior or EXT exterior e Location This signifies where the scene actually takes place e g GRANNY ALTHEA S CAFE e Time of Day Shows what time the scene takes place typically DAY
352. pport Questions 348 Television Templates 105 Template 96 105 Template Icon 18 Templates 359 Temporarily Disable 350 Text 91 Text as Action Only 352 Text between Each Act 335 Text Editing 145 Text Entry Editing 229 Text Entry Editing Options 222 Text Only Non RTF 352 Text or Numerical Input Fields 87 Text to Precede Pg Numbers 335 Text to Speech 212 The Bottom Bar 16 Thesaurus 158 327 Thru 282 Tilde 151 Tile 95 Tile Horizontally 339 Tile Vertically 339 Timed Backup 96 Timed Backup Frequency 239 Timed Backup Icon 18 Time of Day 118 136 140 174 202 204 292 Time of Day Dashes 265 376 Movie Magic Screenwriter Time of Day List after Location Selection 230 Title 109 124 269 Title Centered 115 Title Centers the current Element 342 Title Page 99 102 198 Title Page Icon 18 Title Page Publisher 94 99 102 318 Title Page Publisher Icon 94 Title Page Template 102 to 123 Toggle NaviDoc Display 344 Toggles Word Processing Mode 341 Toolbar 108 109 111 112 Toolbars Menu 226 Tools Menu 92 327 Top 19 324 325 Top Scene Continued 197 Top to Bottom 100 Top Toolbar 16 91 93 124 Tops 100 Totals of All Rounded Eighths 204 Trademarks 15 Transition 109 115 123 129 136 271 342 Transitions 136 140 232 266 Treat as a Sentence End in Dialogue 154 Troubleshooting 347 True Total of All Lines 204 Turn off Block 146 Turn Revision Color Off 330 TV Bre
353. press BACKSPACE to return the cursor to the Character Name element Then press Shift 9 left parenthesis Deleting a Character Extension With the cursor at the end of a Character Name element press the Forward Delete key to delete the Character Extension Or with the cursor anywhere in a Character Name element press Shift 9 left parenthesis A Character Extension Pop up List displays Type e for No Extension The cursor moves to the Dialogue element following the Character Name Dialogue Dialogue is the element that indicates the spoken words of a character A Dialogue element can only be created immediately following a Character Name or its Parenthetical element 1 With the cursor in a Character Name or Parenthetical element press RETURN The cursor moves to a new Dialogue element BERT 2 Type your character s dialogue BERT What was I thinking 3 Press RETURN BERT What was I thinking 4 The cursor moves to a new Action element Second Dialogue Paragraph 122 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 10 To split up a long paragraph of Dialogue into two or more shorter paragraphs of Dialogue or to enter a second paragraph of Dialogue choose Edit Add Dialogue Paragraph To use the keyboard to enter a second paragraph of Dialogue press SHIFT RETURN twice to put in two hard returns BERT What was I thinking I had to act quickly that s why I jumped in I knew 1f I were drowni
354. produced stored in any retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means mechanical electronic magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without prior written consent by Write Brothers Inc Trademarks Screenwriter and the Screenwriter Logo are trademarks of Write Brothers Incorporated Movie Magic is a registered trademark of Entertainment Partners Inc Dramatica is a registered trademark of Write Brothers Incorporated SmartCheck SmartTab ZapSave QuickType iPartner and PrintThing are trademarks of ScriptPerfection Enterprises WordPerfect is a registered trademark of the WordPerfect Corporation Microsoft Word is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Movie Master is a registered trademark of Comprehensive Video Software Scriptware is a registered trademark of Cinovation Inc Collaborator is a registered trademark of Collaborator Systems all others are registered trademarks of their respective holders 082207001 16 Movie Magic Screenwriter Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 To run the program in Mac OS X simply double click on the Movie Magic Screenwriter Icon Main Menu Bar s10 Movie Magic Screenwriter s Pull Down menus can be accessed from the Main Menu Bar by single clicking on any of the menu items or by pressing ALT the underlined letter in the menu item NOTE To use Alt keys to access Main Menu Bar you must have Enable
355. quence with the page numbers they refer to Print Notes on facing pages of document already printed document Prints each Note opposite the page it refers to on the back of the previous page Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed Only asks you to insert the page preceding a Note so it can print the note for the following page Requires you to insert pages one at a time Print without Prompting requires you to insert entire document Requires you to insert the entire document including a Title Page Screenwriter only prints on those pages that have a Note on the following page Select Which Color Notes to Print lf you have more than one color of Note in your document check the colored boxes for the notes you want to print e Revision lf checked prints pages based on your selection v Asterisked Pages WHITE BLUE PINK Asterisked Pages lf checked prints only those pages which have Current Revision Marks on them and any A Pages immediately following them NOTE If you re working in a Locked script with Draft Revision Colors this displays a list Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 201 13 5 of Revision Colors as in the pictured example e Print in Reverse Order Prints your selection in reverse order starting with the highest numbered pages scenes e Run SmartCheck before this Print Job lf checked SmartCheck checks your document for common formatting errors before prin
356. r All New Documents Saves the format of the currently displayed document as the default template default def for one of these available script formats File gt New using Default Template will now use this format e User Lists Displays a menu where you can edit the User Lists and Text Aliases for the currently displayed document and set the defaults for New documents e Load User Lists from 13 Allows you to retrieve User Lists from other Screenwriter documents ASCII files Collaborator files or Screenwriter s Original Defaults Screenwriter Document Original Defaults e Document Layout Displays a window where you can change the top bottom and binding page margins Also gives you the option to cheat the line spacing for the entire document e Header and Footer Displays a menu where you can define the header and footer format and content for the currently displayed document e Font Color Shows options for changing the color of selected text If no text is selected the text from the cursor position to the end of the element is changed Blue Red Green User Defined v Black e Font Style Shows options for changing the style of selected text If no text is selected the text from the cursor position to the end of the element is changed v Normal Bold Italic Underline Strikeout e Change Case Shows options for changing the case of selected text If no text is selected
357. r deleting Scene Headings does not affect existing scene numbers generating A Scenes and OMITTED scenes instead If you add scenes between Scenes 23 and 24 for example the first added scene becomes 23A the second 23B etc This does not affect page breaks For example if you add a new scene before the first scene in the script the new first scene is numbered OA Multi Locked Once you have locked your script and added omitted scenes you may want to keep the new A Scene Numbering and give any new scenes a new unique number Checking this option enables you to do so Any new scene added between existing A Scenes will have a number added after it For example a scene added between scenes 13A and 13B would be numbered 13A1 the next one 1342 etc Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 281 16 4 2 If you add a new scene between an existing A Scene and a Normal Scene it is entered as a normal A Scene For example a scene added between 25B and 26 would become 25C If a new scene is added between a Normal Scene and an A Scene it is entered using the Multi Lock Character For example a scene added between scenes 103 and 103A would become A103 using the default Multi Lock Character Also see A Scene Numbering Scheme ez NOTE An individual Locked Scene Heading can be moved in the script without changing the numbering by Dragging and Dropping it Be careful to drag and drop only the Scene Heading The text of the sce
358. rd 1 8th or a truer 1 8th e Standard 6 lines 1 8th of a Page lf checked defines an eighth of a page as 1 6 lines If you have more than 8 of text on a page however it s possible for a page to calculate as longer than 8 8ths giving inaccurate page counts e Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th of a Page lf checked defines an eighth of a page as the total allowable lines on a page divided by eight When rounded this equals 7 lines Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 295 Display Eighth Totals by Display Eighths Totals by C Total of All Rounded Eighths fe True Total of All Lines Display Eighth Totals by Specifies how Screenwriter should calculate the totals for each Sort grouping If the displayed totals for each scene are added their rounding accumulates too leading to an inaccurate total e Totals of All Rounded Eighths lf checked rounds the displayed totals for each scene into eighths before adding them For example a group has Scene 5 with 39 lines and Scene 7 with 50 lines in it You have specified 6 lines per eighth For Scene 5 it calculates 39 divided by 6 6 5 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 7 8ths Scene 7 is calculated as 50 divided by 6 8 33 8ths or 1 and 0 33 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 1 1 8ths The total of Scenes 5 amp 7 calculates as 7 8ths 1 1 8ths 2 0 8ths e True Total of All Lines lf checked the actual numbers of lines in each scene are added
359. rd Menu Help Y Thesaurus Customize PA Normal Column Sh iPartner OEPEPEPEPUEEUEETESEND Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 229 15 3 Editing Preferences Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Editing Preferences Editing Files 5martCheck Spelling Misc Revisions Printer Keyboard Anim Dialog NaviDoc Outline ra Keep Insertion Caret Above Window Bottom 6 Lines T QuickType E v Enable QuickType Entry Ww Auto Pop Up Locations Y Auto Pop Up Time of Day v Use SmartTab vi Running Shot List wi Running Transition List v Auto Pop Up List of Character Names Mm When parsing Locations only strip known Times Pressing the ENTER Key in Dialogue takes you to a Character Name Tab in Dialogue goes to a Parenthetical m j in Script Note adds a Hard Return ral Drag and Drop should break Elements in Middle f lin Transition takes you to Action L4 in Action with hidden names goes to Dialogue Cancel QuickType preferences are located in the QuickType section 15 3 1 QuickType Preferences QuickType Kil Enable QuickType Entry i vi Use SmartTab Auto Pop Up Location vi slice i do Iv Running Shot List Auto Pop Up Time of Da vi ian y v Running Transition List yv Auto Pop Up List of Character Names When parsing Locations only strip known Times 230 Movie Magic Screenwriter Auto Pop Up Y
360. re you want to add the second part select Paste From under Edit menu and the file that contains the second part of your script Q have made some changes in the Top Toolbar Editor and than restored my Screenwriter for Windows from the Windows 95 Taskbar but the changes were not there what did do wrong A You have to close and restart your Screenwriter for Windows for the changes to take effect Q have cut some of my text and than continued working on something else when wanted to check that cut text in my Clipboard Viewer and got the message Cannot display Data in clipboard in an unknown format gt why A You have to check Share Clipboard with Other Windows programs under Misc In Tools gt Options menu Q Yellow background in my Notes makes the text in them hard to read can change the background color 350 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 3 3 A Go to Format menu select Element Styles and than Notes change color as desired Q was trying to put some text in my dialogue in parentheses but as soon as typed the left parenthesis was in Parenthetical element is there a way around that A Instead of pressing just the left parenthesis type Ctrl Shift Q Is there an easy way to move an element down the blank page A Press F3 and specify the number of lines that you want to skip in Cheat Element menu Q My character reads poetry in her speech how do go to the next line of
361. reak Scene Scene Label Date Flush Right Put in Date As Month Day Year fe Manth Day Year F3 Day Month Year F3 Day Month rear Rd Put in Act Break As ry r als ry alis J Numbers J Letters Words fe WORDS J Roman Numerals Put in Scene Label As oy oy oy Numbers LJ Letters Words fe WORDS F Roman Numerals a Print Headers On fe Mot Page One F3 Every Page a Every Page Except First Page of Scene Align Headers Footers Header Footer Margins Inches Flush Left 8 Flush Right Left 15 Right 1 0 B SetFont Blank Lines Following Header 1 Preview d Cancel a A P he 13 3 1 Header and Footer Text You can have one or two lines of Header Text and one line of Footer Text Type in any text in the appropriate Line window Headers for Spec Scripts normally contain the page number only flush right and followed by a period To insert codes at the cursor position for the following items click on their buttons e Pg Inserts ff the code representing the Page number To have the page number appear with a period following it e g 119 type a period after this code e Act Break Inserts the code representing the Act number for TV shows and Stage Plays To have the act number appear as Act 2 put Act in the Header e Scene Number Inserts ct the code representing the Scene Heading number To have the number appear as Scen
362. reaks Scene Numbers Locked Header Text Individual Character Continued Individual Page Length Total Script Length e Temporarily Disable e Locking of Pages Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Pages are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions e Locking of Scenes Enables you to cut and paste text as if the Scenes are not locked Screenwriter will not keep track of OMITTEDs or perform any other Locked Script functions Importing Documents Screenwriter can Directly open documents saved in these formats e ASCII text e RTF Rich Text Format Final Draft RTF with Style Sheets in Rich Text Format e MS Word 2 0 6 0 and 7 0 for Windows e WordPerfect 5 1 amp 6 x files for Windows e Scriptware Tagged e Movie Master ocreenwriter also supports Cut amp Paste importing directly from other Windows programs Preparing Documents for Importing No matter which format you import your document into Screenwriter from there are two simple rules which must be followed e n the original file each script element i e Character Name Dialogue Action etc must start on its own line e he document must be in a general script format i e Character Names before Dialogue and so on NOTE The following instructions assume that your Screenwriter document subdirectory is set to the Screenwriter default folder If not go to the correct subdirectory where approp
363. reates a new user defined outline style Delete Style Button Removes the selected user defined outline style from the table e Style Name The outline style label that appears in NaviDoc menu lists Style Level The indent level of the outline style from zero 0 to nine 9 The higher the style level number is the further the style is indented to the right Print Controls the printing of the style when printing the document The choices are Yes and No The default is Yes Document styles are exempt from this control e Frame Assigns a frame to the outline style The frame choices of available include None Dotted Gray Thin Line Thick Line and Groove The default is None Document styles are exempt from this control Colors For Outline Styles this option controls the text and background colors of the outline style in the NaviDoc Outline Panel and document For Document Styles this option controls the text and background colors of the item style in the NaviDoc Outline Panel only 12 11 14 Delete Outline Style Control This control removes the selected outline item s from the document and the outline list ne Scenes Notes Bookmarks Add Outline Element T Sequence Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help When deleting an outline element you are given two choices Deleting Scene Headings a TUR PS PA When deleting scene headings do you want to delete the entire scene or just the scene heading O Del
364. reats Ellipses as a sentence ending for purposes of page breaking Unchecked pages won t be broken at ellipses Don t put at end start of broken Action With this option enabled if you have action in parentheticals and Movie Magic Screenwriter breaks an action line over a page break it will not put in an ending parenthetical on the half left at the bottom of a page nor a starting parenthetical on the half that starts the new page With this option NOT enabled if you have action in parentheticals and Movie Magic ocreenwriter breaks an action line over a page break it will put in closing and starting parentheticals as if these broken action elements were each individual elements Chat Sound Chat Sound TweetTweet This sound will play if iPartner receives a chat message and the chat window is not in front This preference controls the sound played if Partner 2 receives a chat message and the chat window is not in front Voice Commands Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter AA Configure This preference enables Screenwriter to respond to voice commands When Enable Voice Commands in Screenwriter is checked Screenwriter uses Mac OS X s built in speech recognition system to listen for and respond to spoken commands The Configure button brings you to the Keyboard Preferences 252 tab where voice commands may be added or modified Diskette Button on Tollbar Acts Like Save Acts Like
365. rect Typos as you type Prompt on Multiple Words during Auto Correction Maximum 10 Auto Correct Sound f Mone Query when you Fix Auto Corrected Words Auta Capitalize Auto Capitalize Sentences Zz Auto Capitalize Character Names Except immediately following Shots All Caps iv Correct Double Capitals e g PRoblem iv Treat Y as a Sentence End in dialogue for the purposes of auto capitalization amp spacing Correct Capitalization Spacing when Run Manually Ignore Capitalization when Checking Words Auto Space Sentences to 2 Spaces Cancel Correct Double Capitals e g Mlstake If checked words that start with two capital letters are corrected by Auto Correct and display an error prompt in a manual Spell Check Unchecked these errors are ignored as correct The Spell Check as you Type and Edit option must also be checked for this function to work SpellCheck as you Type If checked Auto Correct Character Name Aliases and Substitution Text Aliases are allowed Unchecked they are disallowed and grayed out on this page 244 Movie Magic Screenwriter 15 7 3 15 7 4 Auto Correct Typos as you Type V Auto Correct Typos as you type v Prompt on Multiple Words during Auto Correction Maximum 10 13 Auto Correct Sound None He Y Query when you Fix Auto Corrected Words If checked Auto Correct corrects common letter inversion typos such as teh to the as
366. red title that doesn t contain Act Break or Scene Label information First create a blank Action element Then click on the Current Element window on the Top Toolbar and select Title from the drop down list script Note Shot Title Centered Transition Act Break An Act Break indicates where one act end and another begins typically used in Stage Play Television and MOW Movie of the Week formats Prologue Text Type any valid Prologue Text at the beginning of a blank element and Screenwriter automatically formats it NOTE until you customize the User Lists the only Prologue Text that Screenwriter initially recognizes is TEASER PROLOGUE or COLD OPENING See User Lists 136 New Act To start a New Act Type newact at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter inserts it as ACT where is the next consecutive Act Number and formats it automatically A forced page break does not get entered Alternatively press RETURN at the beginning of a blank Action element then type c for Start New Act A forced page break is entered followed by the appropriate new Act Break element Same Act To continue the Same Act type sameact at the beginning of any blank element Screenwriter inserts it as ACT where is the same Act Number and formats it automatically A forced page break does not get entered End of Act To end an Act type end of at the beginning of any blank element Alternatively
367. regardless of visibility Hiding specific outline styles does not affect the visible outline elements in the outline list of the NaviDoc Outline Panel Allow Dragging Outline Rows These options control moving outline items around via the NaviDoc Outline Panel It has two options o Up Down moves rows This option controls whether or not moving items is allowed in the NaviDoc Outline list Dragging a selected item up in the NaviDoc moves the item above other rows earlier in the document Dragging a selected outline item down in the NaviDoc moves the item below other rows later in the document o Left Promotes row Right Demotes row This option controls whether or not reassigning outline styles by dragging is allowed in the NaviDoc Outline list Moving an outline item to the left in the NaviDoc promotes the item to an outline element style higher up in the outline hierarchy Moving an outline item to the right in the NaviDoc demotes the item to an outline element style lower down in the outline hierarchy Allow Sounds for Outline Drag amp Drop These options control sounds associated with various actions made within the NaviDoc Outline panel Scene Heading Field View Control XY Scene Number m Y Int Ext WE Time of Day This control shows or hides parts of the Scene Heading elements Scene Numbers Interior and Exterior or Time of Day in the outline list of the Outline Panel Sync Control On Off This control app
368. revious scene help it I don t love you any longer Go to scene m Go to to LME sf And you feel quite sure about this too Tol 2 5 4 o1o New action New note New scene NORA New shot Yes absolutely sure That s why I New transition can t go on living here any longer Page down Page up Save all HELMER Save changes Can you explain why I have lost your Select all love Select element Select group Select page Select range Select scene NORA Select sentence evenly Select to beginning of script Yes I can It happened this evening Select to end of page when the miracle failed to happen Guo io eui or scan TE was then that I realized you weren t the man I thought you to be Select to end of script Select to next break HELMER AND NORA Select to page Helmer turns back to Nora Select to previous break Select to scene Select to start of page Select to start of scene Select word NORA Spell check element I ve waited so patiently for eight Spell check forward whole years well good heavens I m o de la LE de d md Spell check page E qu 3 amp 3 9 a Action Spell check script 2 Spell check selection Line 3 Page 1 of 3 Spell check word Start reading Helmer turns from Nora barely able to control his emotions CLOSE SHOT OF NORA HELMER Explain more clearly I don t understand you
369. riate 352 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 4 2 Direct Import To open an MS Word WordPerfect ASCII RTF Final Draft RTF Movie Master or Scriptware Tagged file 1 Open the Screenwriter program 2 Under the File menu select Open 3 Select the File Type for the type of file you re opening v Screenwriter mmsw scw Previous Saved Versions bk Timed Backups tmb Text RTF Rich Text Format Dramatica Macintosh Dramatica StoryView Exchange dsw Windows Scriptware Tagged tag All Files If the file you want to import does not have the appropriate File Extension i e RTF for Rich Text Format TAG for Scriptware Tagged etc selecting All Files as the file type shows files with any extension 4 Select the file you want to import to Screenwriter If necessary change the subdirectory Click on OK The Text Interpretation window appears How Should Interpret This Text Import Text in Script Format C Import Text as Action Only Y Text Only non RTF __ Use Stylesheets Use most aggressive interpretation of the source text Use when line spacing in the source text is inconsistant though it can cause shots to be imported as Character Names Don t use Capitalization Information for Element Identification Use when Character Names may be lower case in the source text Ignore Margins for Element Identification Actio
370. riety of options for selecting text with the mouse Left Click Using the mouse Left Click directly in front of the text to be selected While holding the Left Button down drag the mouse cursor across the text Release the button when all the desired text is highlighted To continue selecting text that s off screen move the mouse cursor above or below the document window while still holding the button down it continues scrolling and selecting in that direction Double Click Place the cursor on the word to be selected Triple Click Triple clicking the Left mouse button on a word selects the entire Element in which that word is located CMD Click Pressing down the CMD key while clicking a word selects the entire sentence in which that word is located Right Click Place the cursor on the word sentence element to be selected Right Click or CTRL CLICK the mouse to bring up the context menu then use the Select Special submenu to make your selection Keyboard Selection Place the cursor on the word sentence element to be selected Press the SHIFT key and hold it down Press other movement keys such as an arrow or page up down key to highlight the text Release both keys when the desired text is selected Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 147 11 5 1 11 5 2 Adjusting the Selection If you have selected some text and then realized that you need to select less or more text you don t have to start over
371. row 179 Right Speed bar 16 Right SpeedBar 91 93 Right Toolbar 125 right vertical slider 170 Roman Numerals I Il lll 196 Rounded Eighths 295 Row Height 164 Row Lines Option 169 172 175 179 RTF 219 220 352 Ruler 223 318 Run SmartCheck 198 327 Running Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 Running Movie Magic Screenwriter6 16 Running Shot Lists 232 Salmon 274 SAMEACT 124 140 Sample Scripts and Templates 359 Save 96 311 312 343 SaveaCopy 19 Save ACopy 311 312 Save All Open Scripts 96 311 312 Save As 112 Save as Template 19 Save As Template 105 Save As Template 311 312 Save as the Default Layout 112 Save As 343 Save As 96 98 311 312 Saving a Document 87 Saving Lists 140 Scene 125 146 324 342 Scene Body Text 136 139 140 Scene Character Lists 337 Scene Continued Text 265 Scene Controls 174 Scene Element Spacing Scene Header Field View Scene Header View 175 Scene Heading 115 117 119 125 129 Scene Heading Text 140 Scene Heading w o OMITTED 331 Scene Headings 265 350 Scene Info 129 195 Scene Information 115 138 196 Scene Labels 268 Scene List 173 Scene Number Scene Numbering Scene Numbers Scene Omitted Scene Range Scene Range Scenes 19 325 Scenes Panel 160 173 174 175 Scrap File 97 314 Screenplay 103 Screenwriter 6 Menus 310 Screenwriter Commands 87 Screenwriter Help Manual Script Breakdown Sheets Script Directory 237 scriptelements 261
372. rrectly RICE You can t INT JACK S ROOM CONTINUOUS JACK 208 and anxious scans 4 book Style Sheets for Dummies JACK Shoot My contest deadline is next week RICK 0 8 Hy program does scene numbering dialogue mores and continueds It even has index cards Jack leaps from his chair rushes towards the door INT RICK 5 ROOM CONTINUOUS Jack storms into the room look of disbelief on his face JACK Show me RICK interrupting the Magic Watch this ON THE COMPUTER SCREEN Electronic index cards one for each scene of screenplay Rick drags card 3 over card 1 Card 91 becomes 1 card becomes 2 and the other cards renumber to match RICK CONT D What do you think of it zo far Ho answer Rick turns to see Jack checkbook in hand rushing out the Rick smiles turns back to his screenwriting FADE OUT Open the Program Double click the Movie Magic Screenwriter alias on the Desktop or double click on the Movie Magic Screenwriter application under Macintosh HD Applications Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Screenwriter opens a new blank document and automatically uses the template for a Screenplay Spec Script by default Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 31 How to Write The only special keys you need to write your script in Movie Magic Screenwriter are TAB RETURN and the Open Parenthese key if you use Parentheticals wrylies Use the
373. sions Options Retain previous versions of documents BE Files Retain up Eo E previous versions of a document Place previous version Files in 2 4 subfolder named Previous versions Q The same Folder as Ehe document 2 Documents and SettingsVchris h Previous Versions Create a new previous version File only once per editing session Every time a document is saved When checked these options control where previous versions of your document are automatically stored when you use the File gt Save command in Screenwriter This option retains versions of the file as they were BEFORE a save command is performed We recommend you do NOT consider these files backup files since they are temporary and can be overwritten as you continue to save your document RECOMMENDATION MAKE SEPARATE BACKUPS OF YOUR WORK Use these BK files as emergency file retrievals only e Retain up to previous version of a document This option sets the number of previous version files of a document Screenwriter keeps around The number is from 1 to 100 Each bk file is a complete copy of the document file The default number of versions retained is 5 That means Screenwriter stores up to five additional copies of each document you work on Setting the number higher can begin to take up a lot of disk space e Place previous version files in This option controls where the previous versions of your document are saved e A subfolder name
374. size right vertical slider This control sets the font size for the text in the outline list The default position is the middle of the slider and corresponds to the default font size set in the Outline Panel options Moving the slider up reduces the font size to a minimum of 10 points smaller than the default font size Moving the slider down increases the font size to a maximum of 10 points greater than the default font size The keyboard commands for decreasing and increasing the NaviDoc font size are CTRL and CTRL 182 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 11 11 Current Element Drop Down List Act Break Action Character Name Dialogue Parenthetical Scene Heading Scene Label Note Shoat Title Centered Transition Sequence Scene Beat Create Edit Outline Styles This control located in the toolbar at the top of the document window sets the outline style of the current paragraph in the document view It is an easy way to assign or reassign an outline style The current style is identified by a check mark If the selection is not an outline style no check mark is shown The NaviDoc menu also has commands for setting outline style assignments 12 11 12 Outline Style Management Control Use the Format Element Styles command and select Outline Styles or use the NaviDoc Create Edit Outline Styles command to open the Outline Styles Format Table This table controls the list and format of all a
375. so move through the NaviDoc using the menu items under the NaviDoc menu Templates The Template tutorials include e Screenplay Template tutorials e Industry Standards and Conventions tutorial e e The Different Elements of a Screenplay tutorial ss e Sitcom Template tutorials e Industry Standards and Conventions 73 64 Movie Magic Screenwriter e The different Elements of a Sitcom 7s a Sil E BN Si E Si B m 9 3 1 Screenplay This tutorial gives an overview of an industry standard screenplay including format conventions and usage e Industry Standards and Conventions tutorial 64 e The Different Elements of a Screenplay tutorial ss For a step by step tutorial of writing a screenplay see the 10 Minute Tutorial 29 Industry standards and conventions The screenplay format is arranged so that one screenplay page translates to roughly one minute of screen time This can vary depending on the writing style and how much action or dialogue is in the script dialogue tends to translate to a shorter run time than does action The average length of a screenplay is 90 120 pages with dialogue driven scripts generally being on the longer end even though their run time may end up being the same or shorter than action As a writer it is your job to convey your story ideas characters and images rather than explain how the film will be shot Camera angles and transitions for the most part should be
376. sources Screenwriter Help Manual 7 Automatic Help Balloons Restore All Program Hints Check For Update e Web Resources Includes a list of useful World Wide Web links to assist you with using Screenwriter and screenwriting in general Edit User links command under the Web Resources allows you to enter your own screenwriting links for easy access e Screenwriter Help Manual Displays the searchable Index of the Online Help e Automatic Help Balloons When selected Movie Magic Screenwriter displays a brief description of functionality when placing the mouse pointer over icons and features e Restore All Program Hints Restores program hints to default settings 340 Movie Magic Screenwriter e Check For Update Checks the internet for updates to Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 2 Key Assignments Shortcut Keys for Editing Shortcut Keys for Inserting and Manipulating Elements Shortcut Key for File Operations Shortcut Keys for Formatting Shortcut Keys for Menus Shortcut Keys for NaviDoc Shortcut keys for Navigation Shortcut Keys for Selection Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys Function Keys Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 341 17 2 1 Shortcut Keys for Editing Paste Text alternate Paste into Current Element Open Find window Find Next Continue Last Replace amp FindNext CMD OPTION R Delete the character to the left of the caret DELETE Delet
377. suing the shooting script for the first time turn on and or customize all the Production Features you d like to use especially Top and Bottom Continueds Each of these options is described in detail elsewhere in the manual and in this Online Help 1 Save the screenwriter s final draft using File Save As Give it a different name to reflect the date and its status as the White shooting draft you re about to create e g MyScript WHITE Now you can save your work at regular intervals using the Save command NOTE To customize the Production Features for the way you or your production company work continue with Steps 2 and 3 To accept Screenwriter s default settings skip directly to Step 4 2 Under the Format menu select Element Styles e Click on the Scene Headings button and set the Scene Numbers and Scene Continued Text to your preference e Click on the Locked Scripts button and set the Scene Omitted Text A Scene Numbering Scheme Revision Mark Text and Locked Letter Skip List to your preferences Do not Lock Scene Headings and Page Breaks here You ll do all Locking from the Production menu e Once you have the settings customized to the way your production company works click on Make Default for All New Documents if you want all new files to have this format e Click on the OK button to accept your changes 3 Under the Tools menu select Options e Click on the Revisions tab and set the Revision Marks optio
378. t Mat zt Starting 1 Page Breaks Y Always put Right Number on Line 1 Lacked Scripts Scene Continued Text ps r Save as Default for Top of Pg CONTINUED ae Sy Pris Wi Bottom of Pg CONTINUED fay Left Margin of Bottom Continued 5 5 T M Allow words that are five or more letters long to extend l or 2 letters beyond the normal right hand margin ji 15 15 1 Element Styles Format gt Element Styles Down the right side of the Element Styles window are buttons for displaying the unique characteristics of individual Elements e Character Names 2631 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 261 e Transitions 266 e Act Breaks 267 e Scene Labels 268 e Notes 269 e Centered Title 269 and options for e Page Breaks 269 e Locked Scripts 272 e Outline Styles 182 Click on a button to display that element s options Options common to all script elements Options common to all script elements though with different values for each are Margins Left and Right adjustable in units of 1 10th of an inch Margins in Inches Left 1 5 3 Right 1 0 B Justified Justified Justified is a feature that appears in the text formatting section of the following menus Dialogue Parenthetical Action and Notes When this option is enabled all words along the right side of the script will be aligned
379. t just as if you d typed INT The number of items in a User List is determined by Element as follows Character Names 1 Initial Scene Text Scene Body Text Locations Shot Text Time of Day Act Break Scene Label Prologue Text Tag Text End of Act Text A Transitions 138 Movie Magic Screenwriter 10 27 1 10 27 2 FADE IN Text Substitution Text User Lists for Character Names amp Scene Body Text Locations are only used to supplement what Screenwriter puts on its popup list and uses in Auto Text Recognition Before Screenwriter pops up User List text for Character Name or Scene Body Text it first scans the document to find existing text in those elements Then it adds text from the User List and displays You only need to add to either of these User Lists if you e Write more than one document with the same Characters or Locations for example for multiple episodes of a TV series and want them to display automatically e Want Alias Text for specific Character Names for example typing vk to have the program enter Von Karajan e Already typed in lists of this text elsewhere such as in an outline or a separate story development program and want to re use this work User Lists for Act Break Scene Label and End of Act Text have Alias Text that is only used for auto text recognition The actual text is used for popup lists and for replacing t
380. t Ctrl Shift Left Arrow Shift CMD Left Arrow Extend Selection Word Right Ctrl Shift Right Arrow Shift CMD Right Arrow Ctrl Page Up Go To Previous Page CMD Page Up CMD Page Up Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 25 Ctrl Page Down Go To Next Page CMD Page Down CMD Page Down Go To Previous Element Ctrl Up Arrow CMD Up Arrow Go To Next Element Ctrl Down Arrow CMD Down Arrow a a New Script Note Ctrl F1 Ctrl N TECOS A FECC Top of NaviDoc Ctrl Home Bottom of NaviDoc Option CMD End Ctrl End 26 Movie Magic Screenwriter Page Up NaviDoc Option CMD Page Up Ctrl Page Up Page Down NaviDoc Option CMD Page Down Ctrl Page Down Previous NaviDoc Row Option CMD Up Arrow Ctrl Up Arrow Option CMD Down ANON Ctrl Down Arrow Next NaviDoc Row Increase NaviDoc Font Size Ctrl Decrease NaviDoc Font Size Ctrl CESTAS IEA FT Ferona Son C eme merar FC pm Ee www O bem oem one en cem Pese nr Pme CECI Seem come Sage cem Same 0 emm umma ome Cheat lemen mde or Fa Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 27 Pop Up Element Type List pe Cmd L or F4 suene m oem Add Hard Retum Hard Return OpteReturn Return ShiftReturn Cap amp Bold Ward 28 Movie Magic Screenwriter 9 1
381. t Options 2s e Exporting the Script se e Production Scripts 273 e Animation Production 301 e Appendices sio Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 15 Copyright amp Trademark Notice The software described in this book is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such license Disclaimer Write Brothers Incorporated Ken Schafer and ScriptPerfection Enterprises make no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaim any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Movie Magic Screenwriter for Mac OS X is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied Write Brothers Incorporated Ken Schafer and ScriptPerfection Enterprises shall have no liability or responsibility to you or any other person or entity with respect to any loss or damage caused by Movie Magic Screenwriter M for Mac OS X including but not limited to any loss of profits interruption of service loss of business or consequential damages resulting from the use of such programs Copyright Notice Manual written by Kevin Hindley with contributions by Chris Huntley Stephen Greenfield Ken Haberman Kynan Jones and Richard McClelland Copyright Write Brothers Inc 1997 2003 2007 Portions Ken Schafer 1993 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be transmitted re
382. t Style 321 Footer 91 194 196 197 Footer Text 195 335 Forced Page Break 109 131 Foreign Characters 151 Foreign Language Spell Check 154 Foreign Languages 152 Format Menu 92 Format Codes 358 Format Menu 103 321 Format Options 186 Formatting Text 149 Forwards 153 198 Frame 164 183 FrameForge 3D Studio 356 From a Script 103 From Cursor Position 157 158 From Template 19 Ful Page 99 318 320 Full Page Icon 94 FULL SHOT 140 Function Keys 347 diis General NaviDoc Options 164 General Techniques 350 Generate 337 Generate Rundown Sheet 333 Generate Set List 335 Goldenrod 274 Gorilla Scheduling 356 Goto Menu 92 Goto Page dialogue 345 Goto End of Script 145 Goto Menu 324 Goto Page 93 Goto Page Menu 145 Goto Scene Listings 93 Goto Top of Script 145 Graph Breakdown 205 295 GRAY TEXT 229 Green 274 330 Green Highlights 331 Group 146 H Hard Dash 343 Hard Return 132 358 Hard Dash 131 358 Hard Space 131 358 Have it Prompt you to Insert Each Page as needed 126 Header 91 194 196 197 Header and Footer Setup 194 Header and Footer 321 Header Revision Mark 250 Header Text 195 335 Headers 288 350 Heading 280 Help Menu 92 339 Hide 126 Hide Elements on Screen 318 Hide Format Codes 149 Hide Locations in Pop Up List 318 Hide Names in Pop Up List 318 Hide Show aNote 125 126 Hideable Elements 347 368 Movie Magic Screenwriter HOME 145
383. t element to Full Width 342 Sets current element to Left Column 342 Setup Draft Information 329 Setup Duplicate Locations 332 Setup Duplicate Names 332 Setup Menu Animation Dialogue Numbering 302 Setup Numbering Layout 338 Setup Options 152 Setup Page Layout 136 197 Setup Set List Layout Options 333 Setup Voices 212 327 Shift Tab inserts the previously used Character Name 342 SHIFT CTRL C 129 130 SHIFT CTRL F 133 Shift CTRL N 166 SHIFT DELETE 148 SHIFT ENTER 131 SHIFT INS 148 SHIFT TAB 119 Shooting Script 274 shortcut 254 Shortcut Key for File Operations 343 Shortcut Keys 149 347 Shortcut Keys for Editing 341 Shortcut Keys for Formatting 343 Shortcut Keys for Inserting Manipulating Elements 342 Shortcut Keys for NaviDoc 344 Shortcut keys for Navigation 345 Shortcut Keys for Selection 346 Shot 109 115 123 342 Shot Text 136 140 Shots 232 266 Show 126 Show Format Codes Show partner 208 shows spacing between elements 178 Shuffle 111 Shuffle Mode 109 111 112 Shuffle Multiple Index Cards 112 Single Starting Blank Space 241 149 223 318 358 Sitcom 103 Sitcom Version 103 Sitcom Version II 103 Size 261 Skip Once 153 Slave view 209 slider 170 SmartCheck 240 241 SmartCheck Options 222 SmartCheck Prompts 242 Soft Hyphen 343 Soft Hyphen 131 358 Sort Breakdown Primarily by 292 Sort Scenes 174 Sorted Alphabetically 205 Index 375 Spaces to indent Outline Levels Opt
384. t font in the bookmarks list They include the font face font size font color and font background color Row Lines This option controls the appearance of the line that separates the bookmarks in the bookmarks list The choices are None Dotted Gray Thin Solid Thick Solid and Groove This option also has a control for the color of the Row Lines Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 173 12 10 Scenes Panel The NaviDoc Scenes panel replaces the Scene Pilot feature in earlier versions It is used to move through your document quickly The Scenes panel is reached by selecting the Scenes Tab in the NaviDoc panel The keyboard command for showing the Scenes Panel in the NaviDoc is CTRL 42 Scenes Panel Sync Frame for you this is for vou as he leaves See you again EXT STREET DAY MED LONG SHOT Uncle Billy is walking along the street humming happily to himself He sees some men decorating the Court House with banners and bunting there is a huge sign reading Welcome Home Harry Bailey UNCLE BILLY calls out Be sure you spell the name right INT OUTER OFFICE BUILDING AND LOAN DAY FULL SHOT The offices are unchanged still small time and old fashioned The same office force albeit a few vears a la ee EET AA A Page 3 of 68 When you select a scene in the NaviDoc the document is scrolled to the beginning of the scene in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the scen
385. t from within Screenwriter 1 Click on File gt Send as E mail Attachment or click on the Send E mail icon on the Top Toolbar The Send as Email Attachment dialog opens From the Attach As list choose PDF Portable Document Format 3 From the Compose Message In list choose which e mail program you use 4 Click OK 5 The PDF Export Options dialog will come up Entire Document will already be selected 6 as well as Export Title Page if one exists in the document Make any desired changes to the options and click Export The e mail program you chose should open up with the PDF file attached and ready to send 46 Movie Magic Screenwriter 5 2 5 2 1 Tutorials There are several tutorials for Screenwriter available online at Screenplay com Support lutorials NaviDoc The NaviDoc tutorials include e Opening and Closing the NaviDoc ws e Common Controls 7 e Using the Outline Panel 4s e Using the Scenes Panel se e Using the Notes Panel se e Using the Bookmarks Panel e2 Opening and Closing the NaviDoc Show how to Open Close the NaviDoc and its panels mouse amp keyboard NaviDoc Splitter There is a splitter between the NaviDoc and the document that controls its width When the mouse cursor is placed over the splitter it will indicate that with a double arrow 16 INT OUTER OFFICE I BUILDING AND She reaches up and kisses F _17 INT GEORGES OFFI
386. t name Click on OK to save it If you selected Copy To clicking on Cancel discards the new file and leaves your text intact in your original document If you selected Cut To clicking on Cancel discards the new file and leaves your text on the Clipboard but removed from your original document You still need to Save it to another file or Paste it back into your document otherwise you have deleted the text Merging Documents There may be occasions when you want to combine two documents into one file such as when two writing partners are writing different scenes of the same document To merge the documents 1 Open the first document the one you want to merge into 2 Place the cursor at the position you want the second document to be added The new Pasted From text will appear after the Element the cursor is in 3 Under the Edit menu select Paste Special and then select Paste from 4 At the menu of documents displayed select the document to merge from Click Open to combine the two documents Screenwriter prompts you about how you d like to format the incoming text The two documents are merged To Cancel the merge close the merged file without saving it To keep a copy of the first file unchanged save your merged file under a different name using Save As under the File menu NOTE f you merge a document that is tagged it will have squares on either side of the words that are tagged To correct this simply go t
387. t the previous next row the document will be moved to that element as well Menus You can also move through the NaviDoc using the menu items under the NaviDoc menu Sorting Scenes In the Scenes panel you can choose the order in which the scenes are displayed in the Scenes panel Sorting scenes does not affect the document Sorting Scenes 1 Click on File gt Open and open Screenplay Sample in the Sample Files folder 2 Click on the Scenes panel in the NaviDoc CTRL 2 3 Click on the Sort Scenes button on the Scenes panel 58 Movie Magic Screenwriter Y Sort by Scene Number Sort by Int Ext Sort by Location Sort by Time of day There are four ways to sort the scenes e Scene Number Shows the scenes in the Scenes panel in script order e INT EXT Groups scenes by their initial scene text of INT interior or EXT exterior e Location Groups scenes alphabetically by their location e g BOB S CAF then CAROL S APARTMENT etc e Time of day Groups scenes alphabetically by their time of day e g DAY then EVENING then NIGHT etc 4 Click on each option to see how it changes the way scenes are displayed in the Scenes panel Hide and Show Scene Heading Fields 5 2 5 In the Scenes panel you can choose to hide or show the different parts of the Scene Headings INT EXT Location and Time of Day 1 Click on File gt Open and open up the Sample Screenplay
388. t use a proportional font like Times New Roman or Arial Header Footer A spec sitcom script should have the page number followed by a period in the upper right corner of each page except page one Additionally you can have the Act Break and Scene Label information on a second line under the page number for example I A would be Act I Scene A Sitcoms do not use a footer Line Spacing Elements are separated by one blank line double spaced The exceptions are Parentheticals for actors instructions Page Breaks Each new Act or Scene of a sitcom should start on a new page Certain elements should never appear by themselves at the bottom of the page such as Scene Headings and Shots Screenwriter automatically handles proper page breaking including MOREs and CONT Ds for dialogue so you as a writer do not have to think about it as you are trying to get your ideas onto the page The different elements of a Sitcom The elements in a sitcom are e Act Break 7 e Scene Label 77 e Scene Heading 77 slugline e Action 7s description e Character Name 7s e Dialogue so e Parenthetical so wryly Transition e e Other Formatting Elements e2 To load a Sitcom template click on Format Load Styles From Template and choose Sitcom or Sitcom II from the Blank Templates folder or choose a specific sitcom from the TV Templates folder Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 7
389. t was chosen from the Voice window Based on the word entered in the blank field the Edit Pronunciation window gives four choices Add this word to the dictionary Change the pronunciation of this word Remove this word from the dictionary and Change capitalization or spelling Once a choice is made clicking Next goes to the next stage of modification The Change the Pronunciation of this word feature is more extensive and allows modification of the way a voice says the word To modify the way a word is pronounced type in a spelling that sounds more like the word or the phonetic symbols Add New Voice Clicking this button allows the user to add a new voice based on an existing voice The gender of the new voice can be male or female Whichever is chosen male or female determines the voice on which this new voice is based For example the voice will defaults to Mary if you choose female You can change the default voice by clicking on the Edit Vocal Characteristics button e Delete Voice Clicking this button deletes any user defined voice selected on the list Voices that come with the program cannot be deleted e Edit Voice Name Clicking this button allows the user to change the name of any user defined voice e Return to Voice Assign Clicking this button will return the window to its original configuration by showing all original buttons e Cancel Clicking this button removes any changes and returns you to the Setup
390. t with Locked Pages Otherwise it is grayed out e Fix Lock All Headers Locks the Headers of all pages except Flexible A Pages Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Flex All Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages converting them to the Current Header Only available in a script with Locked Pages e Unlock Headers Unlocks the Headers of all pages and turns Header Locking off for this script Only available in a script with Locked Pages Converting A Pages There may be times when you want to pull out a bunch of short A Pages to combine the text or convert an A Page to a Locked Page To Remove a Locked or Fixed A Page Break e Put the cursor at the beginning of the Element following that Page Break e Press the BACKSPACE key Delete key on Mac or under the Edit menu select Remove Forced Page Break e Screenwriter will display a dialog box that asks Delete this Locked Page Break Choose Yes Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 289 16 5 5 e The page becomes a Flexible A Page To Insert a Locked or Fixed A Page Break in a script with locked page breaks e Put the cursor at the end of the Element that you want the page break to follow e Press CTRL RETURN e Or under the Edit menu select Add Forced Page Break e At the Page Break screen that displays select the type of page break NOTE Adding or removing Locked Page Breaks changes the numbering of all following pages Adding a Fixed
391. te the totals for each Sort grouping If the displayed totals for each scene are added their rounding accumulates too leading to an inaccurate total e Totals of All Rounded Eighths lf checked rounds the displayed totals for each scene Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 205 13 5 4 into eighths before adding them For example a group has Scene 5 with 39 lines and Scene 7 with 50 lines in it You have specified 6 lines per eighth For Scene 5 it calculates 39 divided by 6 6 5 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 7 8ths Scene 7 is calculated as 50 divided by 6 8 33 8ths or 1 and 0 33 8ths which rounded upwards becomes 1 1 8ths The total of Scenes 5 amp 7 calculates as 7 8ths 1 1 8ths 2 0 8ths e True Total of All Lines lf checked the actual numbers of lines in each scene are added then rounded into eighths to give a more accurate total In our previous example the total of the lines from Scenes 5 amp 7 is 89 And 89 divided by 6 is 14 83 8ths or 1 6 83 8ths which rounded upwards comes out to 1 7 8ths Miscellaneous Production Breakdown Print Options e List Characters in Each Scene lIf checked lists all the characters whether they have dialogue or not directly underneath each Scene Heading in the breakdown Listing options are e Sorted Alphabetically lIf checked lists characters in each scene alphabetically e Script Order lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order i
392. text 341 Iia Date 195 196 333 DAY 118 140 Day Month Year 196 Day Month Year 196 Decrease font size in NaviDoc 344 Decrease NaviDoc Font 19 Decrease NaviDoc Font Size 325 Decreases Right Margin 342 Default Lists 140 Default Note Category 167 default def 321 Defaults For all New Scripts 140 defaut def 321 Delete 149 190 241 Delete Category 166 Delete Left 149 Delete Left Word 149 Delete Note 166 Delete Outline Style 184 Delete Right 149 Delete Style 183 Delete the character to the left of the caret 301 331 341 Delete the character to the right of the caret 341 Delete the word to the left of the caret 341 Delete the word to the right of the caret 341 Delete to End of Line 149 341 Delete Word 149 155 Demote Outline Element 19 325 Demote Outline Style Elements 344 Demoting 191 De Selecting Text 147 Dialog 130 Dialogue 109 115 121 122 129 198 264 270 Dialogue Numbering 302 Dialogue With Cues for Actors 198 Dictionaries 152 Dictionary Icon 18 Direct Import 352 Director 333 Directory 237 Display onscreen 229 Display Bookmarks NaviDoc Panel 344 Display Eighth Totals 204 295 Display Notes in Script 127 269 Display Notes NaviDoc Panel 344 Display Open File Menu 96 Display Options 93 149 318 Display Outline NaviDoc Panel 344 Display Scenes NaviDoc Panel 344 Display Screen Sized Retrieve List DISSOLVE TO 140 Distrib List 305 Distribution List 305 Document
393. the dialogue when need to A Press Alt Enter or select Add Hard Return from Edit menu when you need to go to the next line Q accidentally made a mistake in my registration information during installation how do change that A In Notepad or WordPad Win95 open the SCWRITER INI file located in the Windows subdirectory and edit the Registration section accordingly Production Problems and Solutions Screenwriter s Online Help is available to help with common problems encountered in the Production process Under the Production menu select Production Solutions then one of the following options Merge Text into Document General Techniques Scene Headings Page Breaks Headers Manual Overrides Temporarily Disable e General Techniques Walks you through the entire Production cycle helping you to avoid problems by demonstrating the proper procedure e Scene Headings Lists common problems encountered with Scene Numbers and Scene Headings in a production script and tells you how to solve them e Page Breaks Lists common problems encountered with Page Breaks in a production script and tells you how to solve them e Headers Lists common problems encountered with Locked Headers in a production script and tells you how to solve them e Manual Overrides Displays the appropriate Help screens for the Manual Override of Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 351 17 4 17 4 1 Page B
394. the element to parts of the Outline panel list that are not in view You can also use simple cut amp paste in the document itself to move an outline element NOTE holding down the CTRL key while dragging will allow the parent element to move independently leaving its child elements where they are The child elements will then become a part of the nearest parent element Copying Outline Elements Open the tutorial file 1 Click on File gt New from Template 2 Double click the Tutorials folder and open the file called Moving and Copying Outline Elements To duplicate selected outline elements click and drag them up or down to a new location in the Outline panel while holding down the correct modifier key 1 Click and hold the left mouse button down on the Sequence in the First Act 2 Holding the mouse button down drag the Sequence down into the Second Act 3 Press and hold the OPTION key on the keyboard 4 Release the mouse button Notice it has duplicated the element and any child elements at the new location This is known as a drag copy You can also use simple copy amp paste in the document itself to move an outline element NOTE holding down CTRL OPTION while dragging will make a copy of the parent element only at the new location Promoting and Demoting Elements Outline elements and some document elements can be promoted or demoted in the Outline panel What does this mean Promoting demot
395. then rounded into eighths to give a more accurate total In our previous example the total of the lines from Scenes 5 amp 7 is 89 And 89 divided by 6 is 14 83 8ths or 1 6 83 8ths which rounded upwards comes out to 1 7 8ths Miscellaneous Options Miscellaneous Options rA List Characters in Each Scene fe Sorted Alphabetically C3 Script Order FA Speaking Characters First C User List Order rA List Non Speaking Characters Each Group on New Page vi Print Tagged Items List Characters in Each Scene lf checked lists all the characters whether they have dialogue or not directly underneath each Scene Heading in the breakdown Listing options are e Sorted Alphabetically lf checked lists characters in each scene alphabetically e Script Order lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they appear e Speaking Characters First lf checked lists characters in each scene in the order in which they speak in that scene followed by character with no dialogue 296 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 7 16 7 1 16 7 2 e User List Order lf checked lists characters in each scene with those from User Lists first then all others alphabetically List Non Speaking Characters lf checked gathers the names of non speaking characters from the Action element and uses them in Breakdowns and Movie Magic Scheduling export files NOTE The Breakdown may pick up the name of
396. thods e Moving to it with the arrow or TAB keys and pressing the Space Bar e Clicking on it with the mouse e Pressing the Underlined QuickSelect Letter from the keyboard in this example r for R un Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 91 6 7 6 8 6 9 Radio Buttons f Current Page Forwards Entire Script Selected Text There are several Radio Buttons displayed as a small circle either blank or with a dot in it on the example above The first two are Current Page and Forwards Radio Buttons are similar to Check Boxes except that only one Radio button in any given group may be checked at any one time Text or Numerical Input Fields Header 2 Footer Header Footer Margins Inches 4 Left 1 5 A Right 1 0 Sa Text or Numerical Input Fields such as Header and Footer text or Header Footer Margins in the examples above allow you to enter text or numbers as appropriate Depending on the particular field spaces may be allowed and text may be automatically capitalized for you Editing Screen The default editing screen has several menu bars on screen e Main Menu Bar 22 e Top Toolbar ss e Right Toolbar es e Bottom Status Bar os 92 Movie Magic Screenwriter al Wonderful 6 mmsw dh dud d 1 y 4 BR gts ke da ap Dialogue B dii A eee E E EXT CHURCH ANOTHER ANGLE DAY C D MED CLOSE SHOT people entering chur
397. tination s style will be used If not the entire style will be copied over from the source document and created in the destination document This means if you copy a beat from a document with ten Outline Styles to a document with one outline style the beat style will be created No other styles will be copied unless you actually copy over elements with that style same as MS Word Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 189 12 11 20 Outlining Features B de T sequence 3 ine Scenes Notes Bookmarks Eerie AREAS ed eedem st p mdd iz uut amp a as Tile EXT STREET NIGHT Delete gt Add Outline Element CLOSE SHOT George in the uniform of an air raid warden AAA er ACER EC PECES REIN SERE ee ee is patrolling his beat Sequence pos JOSEPH S VOICE Air raid Warden EXT DUMP DAY CLOSE SHOT Wheelbarrow full of junk being dumped onto pile JOSEPH S VOICE SCr p drives EXT HOUSE NIGHT CLOSE SHOT man beside lighted window pulls down the shade as George blows his whistle IN gt ERE Screenwriter s new Outline feature helps you to develop organize and structure the different elements of your story You can create a hierarchical outline using the Outline Elements along with other document elements Outline Elements are similar to Notes except they are defined in a hierarchical order The Outline feature allows you to incorporate the existing
398. ting If you have set SmartCheck to always run before printing in Options under the Tools menu it is checked here Turn it off for this print job only by unchecking the box e Print Title Page lf checked prints the title page at the head of the script Only available if you have created a Title Page in the Title Page Publisher Selecting an Entire Document to print automatically checks this box and prints the Title Page e Preview Click this button to see a Print Preview of the current selection in WYSIWYG format Click on the appropriate button for Print Sends the onscreen page to the printer formatted exactly as it looks but at 10096 size Prev Goes to the previous page in the document Next Goes to the next page in the document Close Exits the Print Preview screen back to the Print Selection menu Zoom In Displays the document page larger onscreen Cycles through 53 93 13396 17396 213 253 of actual page size Zoom Out Displays the document page smaller onscreen Cycles through 53 9396 13396 17396 213 253 of actual page size Production Breakdowns Print Window Selecting Print Standard Breakdowns from the Production gt Breakdowns menu or from File gt Print gt Production Breakdowns displays the Production Breakdowns Print window which looks like the following 202 Movie Magic Screenwriter 13 5 1 Production Breakdowns Sort Breakdown Primaril
399. ting file An item named Stage Play def already exists in this location Do you want to replace it with the one you are saving 8 Click on Replace to overwrite the file 9 You should now be ae to load that template again with the correct format See Loading a Template os This method will not correctly restore the format if you have modified the settings and format of Stage Play mmsw In that case use the re install method above Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 107 9 1 Index Cards Many writers use index cards or 3 by 5 cards as an organizing tool before writing their scripts Using a separate card for each scene they jot down what happens in the scene where it takes place etc Numbering each card shows the flow of the story from scene to scene Adding a scene is as easy as inserting a new card between two others Moving scenes is equally simple though having to renumber the scenes each time is a chore When satisfied with the outline created with the index cards the writer can expand on that information to write the individual scenes that form the story Now Screenwriter brings you an easier way to work with index cards on your computer screen with Electronic Index Cards The information you write on each card transfers directly to a scene in your document The top line on the card becomes a Scene Heading and the description becomes Action Moving an index card is performed using the fa
400. tion is None Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 249 15 9 Revisions Preferences Options on this page allow you to change certain Production Features Revision Marks mentioned in the following section refer to Current Revision Marks not Locked Revision Marks See the Production Features chapter for more details Screenwriter gt Preferences gt Revisions Preferences Revision Marks on the Page print a Revision Mark on the Header E Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Mark Po Put the Header Revision mark on the line under the header rather than to the right of it Don t print Revision marks on each line for pages which have reached or exceeded the threshhold number af Revision Marks as defined above Asterisk Headers of NEW A Pages that don t have any revisions on them Print Separate full PAGE OMITTED pages Mark Element following Complete Deletion Vi Auto Update Locked Headers on Revision 15 9 1 After Revision Marks on the Page put a Revision Mark on the Header Lets you specify how many Current Revision Marks on a page are acceptable before putting a Revision Mark on the Header also to indicate a revised page 15 9 2 Use an Asterisk on the Header instead of the Normally Defined Revision Mark If checked puts the default asterisk as the Header Revision Mark even when you have changed the Current Revision Mark to be some other symbol Unchecked the He
401. tner is trying to edit Allow your partner to type in the document Once the Master clicks Yes the Slave can now edit the document Slave view editing capabilities Once you have permission to edit the document you can perform the following functions e Use the mouse to click in the document to edit e Use the Mouse to highlight text by holding the shift key and clicking where you want the text selection to be extended e Edit by typing in the document e SCroll by using the Up and Down Arrows or Page up Page Down 210 Movie Magic Screenwriter 14 1 5 You can also cut copy and paste text as well by using whatever keys are set on that computer to cut copy paste with in the Keyboard section of the Tools Options window These commands are being executed on the Masters computer so the Slave will not be able to paste text from another application on the Slave computer Likewise if the Slave invokes the paste text before copying or cutting text from the document the program will try and paste whatever is in the Masters clipboard from a previous application into the document with unpredictable results IMPORTANT While all of the keys listed below will work in slave mode some of them may cause popup list s to appear on the Master s computer if the Master has QuickType text entry turned on In order for the Slave to use the Quick Key s to change elements efficiently the Master must go into the Tools menu and cha
402. to display as such e g 15 17A 290 Movie Magic Screenwriter 16 5 6 Set Revision Draft Color Order Tools Set Revision Draft Color Order This feature opens the Revision Draft Color window showing the order in which revision colors will be used the default is the industry standard Revision colors are displayed in a Color window on the left side of the screen You can change these options Edit Revision Draft Colors WHITE BLUE PINK YELLOW GREEN GOLDENROD SALMON CHERRY BUFF TAN Drag and drop to change the j a b p b New Color 7 Delete Color order of the colors Current color WHITE KS Display Page Colors On Screen After the last color is used it should Save as Defaults for All New Scripts fe BLUE Loop to Double fy mau a Habs Cancel Color Window The Color Window has the name of the color and the actual color in the background A color that is selected will have a black dot to the left of its name and will set the current revision draft color Add New Color Allows you to add a New color for Revisions for example when all the existing Revision colors have been used Clicking this button will bring up a prompt to type the new color s Name Assign a color from the Color Palette that displays or design a Custom color The New Color displays after the currently selected color Delete Color Allows you to remove a Color from the Color list Click on the Color then on
403. to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 End of Show is Act Number Lets you specify how many acts are in the current script Screenwriter enters END OF SHOW at the end of the Act Number you specify here instead of END OF ACT Numbering Scheme l ets you choose how Acts are numbered from one of the following schemes e ACT A If checked uses letters to number the acts e ACT 1 NUMBERS If checked uses numbers to number the acts e ACT ONE If checked uses words to number the acts e ACT I ROMAN If checked uses Roman numerals to number the acts 268 Movie Magic Screenwriter Scene Labels Automatically put C in Scene Label Starting Number after Act Break Number Scenes Continuously Put in SCENE vi Center 5cene Label Text F4 Put Scene Label Information in Parentheses Numbering scheme 1 C SCENE A SCENE 1 NUMBER el fa SCENE ONE SCENE I ROMAN p ih i Automatically put in Scene Label after Act Break lf checked Scene Labels are automatically put in the script directly after Act Break as in Sitcoms Unchecked Scene Labels are not added as in MOWS NOTE The Use Scene Labels in Script setting does not update existing Act Scene Text this will stay the way you entered it unless you manually change it It only changes the appearance of future Act Scene Label you create after changing the setting To change e
404. tomizing Screenwriter gt Script Format Options se Title Page The title Cover page of sitcom is identical to a screenplay with the addition of the episode title It typically uses Courier or Courier New 12pt The title of the series the episode name and author s line should be centered vertically and horizontally on the page as well as double or triple spaced e The series title is in ALL CAPS e The episode title is in ALL CAPS enclosed in quotes e The author s name appears in Intial Caps e The contact information is generally in the lower left corner single spaced and left justified Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 75 ASKING THE JONESES DINNER WITH THE SMITHS Written by Joe E Smithee Joe E Smitthee 123 Main St Somewhere CA 99999 0186 555 1234 joeesmithee dzomeemail cornm Margins Sictom scripts should have a top and bottom margin of 1 0 although the bottom margin will vary from page to page because of the specific page breaking rules handled automatically by Screenwriter The left and right margins are specific to each element and are also handled automatically by the program Font As of this writing the industry standard font for screenplays is Courier 12 pt This includes any form of Courier such as Courier New since it is a monospaced font and takes up 10 76 Movie Magic Screenwriter characters per inch on the page when at 12 pt Do no
405. ts 241 Compose Message In 220 Cont d Text 263 Contents 14 339 Continue Last Replace Find Next 341 Continued 197 Continueds 263 Continues Last Search 341 CONTINUOUS 140 Convert Case 321 Converting A Pages 288 Copy 147 148 314 341 Copy andPaste 147 Copy to 97 314 copying outline styles 188 Copyright Notice 15 Correct Double Capitals 152 154 Count Words 327 Create Edit Outline Styles 19 Create Edit Outline Styles 325 Create a new previous version file 235 Create PDF 198 Create PrintThing File 198 Creating Alias Text 142 Creating Text Elements 100 CTRL 151 CTRL ALT K 135 CTRL 151 CTRL 151 CTRL 151 CTRL 151 CTRL 151 CTRL 1 133 162 176 CTRL 2 133 173 CTRL 3 164 CTRL 4 170 CTRL ALT 131 CTRL ALT DOWN ARROW 145 CTRL ALT END 145 CTRL ALT HOME 145 CTRL ALT UP ARROW 145 CTRL B 150 CTRL BACKSPACE 149 CTRL C 148 Ctrl Dash 131 CTRL DELETE 149 CTRL END 149 CTRL ENTER 129 CTRL F1 125 129 CTRL F6 95 CTRL G 145 CTRL INS 148 CTRL LEFT ARROW 145 CTRL N 150 CTRL O 129 Index 365 CTRL PgDn 145 CTRL PgUp 145 CTRL RIGHT ARROW 145 CTRL S 129 CTRL SHIFT 131 Ctrl Shift Dash 131 CTRL T 129 CTRL TAB 95 CTRL U 150 CTRL V 148 CTRL X 148 CTRL Y 150 CTRL ZERO 160 Current Page 198 Current Revision Marks Cut 147 148 314 Cut and Paste 147 Cut and Paste Import 353 Cut Element 19 314 Cut selected text 341 346 CUT TO 140 Cutto 97 314 Cuts selected
406. u E Lu EEEE REA o UN REUNIR ENS 105 Restoring an Overwritten Template A a cad 105 Mili qe ctl D A 107 fs iz Card VW ER A E 107 index Card TOMA per RA 108 Number of Index Cards on SCFENG cccccceseecccceeseeeeeeesceeeeeeseeeeeeesececeeeseseceeeseeeceenseseeeuagecesauaseeessesesensuneeeeeaes 109 Horizontal A vide Foscari V Suis ue eau vo e PEU dO d Cur EEUU VE SU GR UP PSP UPN d OT V GP LEE MOD PEVUN UL ALTER 109 verucaldrdex C ce cies ad aped eae a oes ae pe eon een Aan OLEI SEED LEAL LAE ec D du 109 Addan Inde A A RP Be cert ava Pt Cim uiv eT A E 109 Write am Index Card casi das 109 Editan INGOX CAV e 111 Shutfle an Index Card oui ora e SP noe ads 111 shuttle Multiple Index Cars ccs n 112 Printing indek Cards eR Rcs 112 10 VV EEG aA SCM bis EET I 115 INSCruing ETS IG AUS eeu a a a a e a a aa a ooo 115 TAR a A MEME I M E M E E E 116 o 117 Scene Hedding casas essere sce oa dcos nde tesa Es a REX ences cee ne 117 Localo e o eee aei Acute ti 118 Mod nec 118 PHO RN TENEMOS 119 Character Name canadian 119 lInsening Character NAMES s dem esto de recede ted epe et tied qe bea Cul esto oe Ete eel a 120 C Daracter EXIerIS Obras uto dcos stata LIRE SUE IIR A Los UD ESI lOs 120 Deleting a Character Extension aa eode qose
407. u create and manipulate outlines up to thirty levels deep e The Outline Panel 176 M F tli i D Q D t N iD 486 e Send As Email Attachment Command 219 Send documents as email attachments in RTF or Adobe Acrobat PDF formats Over 30 new templates for a total 104 templates and 12 sample files ss e 25 new TV show templates for a total of 86 TV templates e 2 new sample files comic story arc amp radio play and 2 updated sample files screenplay and stage play for a total of 12 sample files e 3 new Instructional templates classic film structure outline screenplay 4 sitcom structure for a total of 8 instructional templates e 4 new blank templates generic comic Gossett Kayle comic radio play radio show and 1 modified template stage play for a total of 10 blank templates e New Document Icons e New File Format zs e The View Toolbar Improved tool bars amp context menus e View Menu 318 e Menu Changes 10 Menus reorganized for easier use e Modified Keyboard Commands e Shortcut Key Changes in 6 0 24 e Fit width 224 zoom automatically adjusts the text size of your script as you resize the window 18 Movie Magic Screenwriter 4 1 e Redesigned look and feel to accommodate the latest versions of Windows and Mac e Retain previous versions 238 of documents e Makes Automatic back up copies 239 of documents e Automatically checks for Updat
408. ually use the following instructions Manual Revision Marks There are three ways to manually enter or remove revision marks e Asterisk Key Pressing the Asterisk key manually enters a revision mark on the line the cursor is blinking If the line already has a revision mark pressing the asterisk key removes it NOTE The Asterisk key is still used to type Manual Hevision Marks even if the Revision Mark has been re defined as a different character e Apply Revision Marks Applies revision mark to any currently selected line of text that does not have one applied If any lines already have revision marks this will not affect those lines e Remove Revision Marks Removes revision mark from any currently selected line of text that has one applied If any lines already have revision marks those will also be removed Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 279 16 3 2 16 3 3 16 3 4 16 4 Auto Revision Marks Auto Revision Marks are revision marks which are automatically entered for you as you edit your Locked script When you change a line Screenwriter gives it a revision mark in the right margin If you Undo the change it will remove the mark If you change it back the way it originally was manually that is still considered a change so the revision mark will remain Enabling Auto Revision Marks To enable Auto Revision marks This feature can be turned on or off under Production Auto Revision M
409. uments in 6 0 MMSW Format eeeeeesssesesseeeeeeeeenennn n Saving Documents as SCW Files sess nnn Undo Levels rrr Shortcut Key Changes iM 6 0 msisite cia 5 TUTONALS o E ESSERE Add Character Nam sd teer ridet tubae d dtr nes dedere Oben eid 7 Add Character Extension cccccccsesseeccceeesseeseeceeseseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeees SACADAS Mr CE TRE TIT 9S Add Another Character s iiootodoso roto es Cv otia cole DO cnet puteos bud outs TOY AGG Dido Diac tubus DOR Add Another Location scsi Add Combos aia AJJ AGHO OT Add Character Name onito S Add AIO GUC eeoa PPP UH Add Character Name minas sd A S se COO DU edd Add Dialogue RED ACIACUION ss tena a t M IL su Mitt insides Add TRAV SOMA teca Add Scene Hesdllg traia Add LOCA MO T Add time ot Day sse do Pivele M elroln MERE Add Character Name and Dialogue ssssssssss Add Character NAMIC ose iddoquiudoee uti mb SIR ue bau bdde UR tu edle dada di ind td Add PALE tic al sse ctu edet o Sos Dua Ge eoo doch et oboe ds bte A Meath ATT ASNO gt ma A ni 17 EE 24 Contents 3 DINA ACOM 42 90 Add Goritued DIaloglB id 42 AA e a lenken ausa e tatto adr lecce ac Ms 43 92 Add More Acondic Ina aa Eu N 43 6 A sr 10 121010 Mc A N A T 43 Thats erm 44 EXO ING 1H PD ete ic 44 Stepsito Export to PDF expor ONIY rasieren
410. umerical Input Fields Select the option you want using any of these methods e Moving around in the menu by pressing TAB or SHIFT TAB e Clicking on it with the mouse 90 Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 5 6 6 pa p 7 g i peas Current Page Forwards _ Entire Script Selected Text C Selected Pages y 7 roh J Selected Scenes List a gt Production Breakdowns Revision Asterisked Pages 7 Character List y i Dialogue Scene Heading List Script Notes uai l C Outline Report Run SmartCheck before this print Job Print in Reverse Order Preview Print Title Page Cancel te A Push Buttons There are two Push Buttons displayed as rectangular boxes in the File gt Open window as shown in the example below Open and Cancel Select a Push Button using any of these methods e Moving to it with the arrow or TAB keys and pressing RETURN e Clicking on it with the mouse Selecting OK or Open in this case always exits a window accepting all of the current settings or selections Selecting Cancel always cancels a menu without changing anything Checkboxes vi Run SmartCheck before this print Job Print in Reverse Order An example of a CheckBox displayed as a small box either blank or with a Checkmark in it is shown in the example above titled Run SmartCheck before this Print Job A CheckBox can be checked or unchecked using one of these me
411. umn If checked prints a separate far left column for Act Break Scene Label Unchecked that information prints as the first line of each box e Print Separate Page Number Column lf checked Page Numbers print in a separate column Unchecked they print in the upper right corner of the main box e Print Separate Day Night Count Column lf checked prints a separate right hand column for Day 1 type information at the end of each Scene Heading Prints D or N followed by the number e Underlining and Boldfacing of Act Break Scene Label Scene Headings e Print total boxes at end of pg lf checked prints 3 Totals boxes at the foot of each page e Print Scene Description Text if any If checked prints the scene description text Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 335 e Specify Set List Settings s Brings up the Generate Set List window Generate Set List COPY Prints the Set List on its own without the need to also print Rundown Sheets ET LT ee TT Header Footer Page Numbers Prefix for Page Numbers Act Break None Pg f Bold am E 1 Starting Page n e Underline scene Headings Final Text M Bold END OF SHOW f List Characters in Each Scene f Underline Bold Al Caps Font Palatino eta Size f Always Print Set List with Rundown Sheets Put in Cliphoard Rather Than Print Underline Print Now Cancel
412. us Version iens atcp dados doit 238 Atomatic med Backups A A Fede e A EY ey ean es 239 Password Protect DOCUMENTS io iret eta e nem e xii uted e ica 239 When Opening Existing DOCUMEN Sarzana ovt bere eto eheu esum ei pate deme a Sd a a ee Pone Eo NE 239 SiMartCheckK Optom rs a Aaa tas 240 Automatically Run SmartCheck Before Printing c ccccececccesseeseeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeseeaseeeeeeesaaeeeesesessaanses 241 Beep When Formatting IS FOUR e odia 241 BI mE SIUNEoel cc 241 Ignore Blank Lines which have Revision Marks ssssssssssssssssssseseneneee nennen eene nnne neris 242 Ignore the same Name speaking twice in a row when Extensions do NOT o M o O M DHT RN CROCI ea a nae eaters tiene sangeet ee A DURS NER N 242 Combine OMITTEDs that are Widowed on PAYl oococococcooooooconononononononononononononnnnnnnnnnononononononononnnonononnnnnonnnnnnnos 242 Ssmo Hec Pro Si rico 242 Spelling QOUOMNS a 243 Correct Double Capitals e g Mistake oooooonnncicicnnncccccnoococcononacononnnnonnnnnnoononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnananrnnrnnannnnos 243 Pel RcckaS Y00 Type dial 243 AUio Correct LVpos as YOU TD A Dd e do 244 Beep On Ano Wn Wo os 244 PUTO C AMA IZ Gi city UR IS O EE MEE PERRO 245 MISC PrelerenGCes das 246 MISC CIAMEIOUS oen e 246 Chat SOU Gta dias cat ac M T e TNT TENE 247 VOICE COM
413. utline Style 185 Outline Style Assignment 182 Outline Style Management 182 Outline Style Table 191 Outline Styles 182 Outline tab 176 Outline Tools 190 Outline View 183 Outlining Features 189 Override 136 Override 329 332 Overriding 287 Overriding Dialogue Numbering 304 P O V 140 Page 136 146 153 324 Page Break Type 332 Page Breaking 2 71 Page Breaks 269 350 Page Down 19 325 Page Margin Settings 112 Page Number 271 PAGE OMITTED 250 Page Setup 192 Page Setup 343 Page Up 19 325 Page s Header Draft Color 332 Paper Orientation 192 Paper Size 192 Paper Source 192 Parenthetical 109 115 121 122 129 263 342 Parentheticals 264 Password Protection 239 Paste 147 148 314 Paste from 314 Paste into Current Element 314 341 Paste Text 341 Pause AutoCorrection 327 PDF 219 220 252 PgH 195 PgDn 145 PgUp 145 Pink 274 Place previous version files in 235 Plain Text 356 Play Sample 212 port number 206 Preferences Icon 18 Preparing a Script for Importing 351 Prev 197 Preview 197 198 Previous character 145 Previous Element 145 Previous Line 145 Previous Row 19 325 Previous Scene 145 Previous Scene Heading 324 345 Previous Screen 145 Previous Script Page 145 Previous Versions 235 Previous Word 145 Print 183 197 198 311 312 343 Print a Note 125 126 Print Act Info 335 Print Bottom Continued 251 372 Movie Magic Screenwriter
414. vailable outline styles Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 183 Element Styles Use the table on the right to Character Names add or remove Qutline Styles Dialogue STYLE NAME This name shows up in various style and element menus Parentheticals LEVEL Defines the hierarchy of an Scene Headings Outline Style Styles at a higher level may be hidden in the NaviDac Shots Outline View by clicking on the disclasure triangle Action PRINT unchecked means elements Transitions of this outline style will not print when you print your document nar will they consume space on the page Include these document styles in Outline View or increase page count Checked EE on forces elements of this style to Lu always print AND add to the page II Notes count NOTE you can always print Style Name Print Frame Colors Centered Title outline elements through ce ct Break F Tm T the Outline Report MERE B ali A ram y FRAME Style of frame drawn around i Scene Label Y eS the element in the document m m i oe Scene Heading Ti l A COLORS Text and fill color of EA B element in document and NaviDoc be R B ee Default for Outline view all new scripts Act Breaks Scene Labels ral Scene Headings Script Notes Ios ah Rad Gb I San a hihi NN RA ENTE AA A Use Current Font for All Elements k Revert P Located in the Format gt Element Styles win
415. w gusty day and his overcoat and muffler flap in the breeze Draped around one arm is a large Christmas wreath Under his other arm are several more copies of the paper JOSEPH S VOICE This morning day before Christmas about ten a m Bedford Falls time George comes to where Ernie the taxi driver is standing on the sidewalk E E JE A E E Script Note ine E Notes Panel Sync Frame When you select a note in the NaviDoc the document is scrolled to the note in the document view The Sync Frame a frame drawn around the note in the NaviDoc displays ONLY when the selection is within the note in the document r The sync frame disappears if you move the text cursor out of the note in the document 12 8 1 Notes List The Notes List displays all notes in the document Clicking on a note in the note list scrolls 166 Movie Magic Screenwriter 12 8 2 12 8 3 12 8 4 the selection to that note in your document Notes Controls Outline Scenes eNotes Bookmarks ha E EM Lili 8 iine E he Sie d The Notes Controls affect the display of notes and note text in the note list of the Notes Panel These controls also affect the notes in the document view Notes Command Buttons These controls are used to add and remove notes as well as change the category of a note e Delete Note Permanently removes the selected notes from the document and the notes list e Add
416. w Format Codes OPTION F3 A checkmark appears next to it reminding you it s on Bolding Text To format existing text as Bold select the text Then e Click on the Bold button labeled with a B on the Top Toolbar Or e Or press CMD B Underlining Text Biju N To format existing text as Underline select the text Then e Click on the Underline button labeled with a U on the top toolbar e Or press CMD U Italicizing Text To format existing text as talic select the text Then e Click on the Italics button labeled with an I on the top toolbar e Or press CMD I on the keyboard Striking Out Text OE To format existing text as Strikethrough select the text Then Press CMD K on the keyboard Removing Text Formatting Select the text to remove formatting from Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 151 11 9 6 11 9 7 11 9 8 e Click on the Normal button label with an N on the top toolbar e Or press CMD DASH on the keyboard Applying Multiple Text Formats You can apply multiple formats to existing text e g make text both Bold and Italicized without re selecting it multiple times Hold down the SHIFT key while applying any of the text formats The text remains highlighted ready for you to apply the next format Changing Case You can change the case of existing text without re typing it using these options e Uppercase CTRL U e Lowercase SHIFT CTRL U e Initia
417. w Key Combinations SHIFT CMD pace bown CMD PAGE DOWN UP ARROW DOWN ARROW RIGHT ARROW LEFT ARROW Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 17 2 8 17 2 9 17 3 347 Miscellaneous Shortcut Keys Mmmm T a E emm 9 IC Pewwew a HE E a Emme p m9 17 ume ema 5 meme j wu jeje IC eere E E UP Collapse All Hideable Elements MEME OPTION ARROW DOWN Expand All Hideable Elements CMH OPTION ARROW Function Keys GoTo Next Strikethrough or colored Text SHIFT Fo Show Porat Codes BEEN OPTION FB Open Thesaurus Lom Troubleshooting e Known Hardware Software Problems e Common Technical Support Questions and Answers s e Production Problems and Solutions sso 348 Movie Magic Screenwriter 17 3 1 17 3 2 Known Hardware Software Problems HP DeskJet printers These printers have an unprintable bottom margin of 3 4 of an inch Due to this anyone using this printer will probably get the top portion of the bottom continueds cut off in the print job To correct this INCREASE the bottom margin by 1 or 2 lines in the Document Layout option under the Format menu Font managers The presence of some font managers can cause some minor problems The problem will be easy to detect as your document will not print in the correct font Courier If your document appears in an unusual font or you are un
418. w for viewing editing and rearranging the document scenes in an index card format The Zoom Screen Text Icon Opens the Zoom Screen Text 224 window for setting the screen magnification of the document text without changing the printed font sizes in the document The Normal View Icon Displays the document text as a continuous scroll of text Page breaks show as dashed lines The Full Page Icon Displays the document text with extra space around the edges to simulate actual pages Opening a Document Under the File menu select Open Select from the list of available files changing the subdirectory drive or file type if necessary Click on OK to open the file To open a file you have recently saved select one of the numbered files at the bottom of the File menu Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 95 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 10 3 6 10 4 Opening Multiple Documents ocreenwriter allows you to have up to 9 files open at the same time e Open multiple documents at the same time from the File gt Open menu by holding down the SHIFT key and selecting a range e Or press the CMD Apple key to select multiple documents individually Displaying Multiple Windows Under the Window menu select either Cascade or Tile e Tile shows all open documents each at full page width stacked horizontally above each other Makes for easy cutting and pasting e Cascade shows all open docum
419. wever it is useful to know about the speech recognition user interface in Mac OS X See Setting Up Mac OS X for Voice Recognition Setting Up Mac OS X for Voice Recognition In the OS X System Preferences window there is an icon for speech preferences Lii Speech The speech recognition preferences panel in Mac OS X Tiger looks like this Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 217 00800 lt ShowAll Text to Speech Speakable Items On Off Commands a f 1 i Microphone Internal microphone p Calibrate Listening Key Esc Change Key Listening Method f Listen only while key is pressed Listen continuously with keyword Y Keyword Computer Upon Recognition Speak command acknowledgement Play this sound Whit SS Also there is quite a bit of useful information in Mac Help regarding sooken commands i e Finder gt Help gt Mac Help then search for spoken commands 218 Movie Magic Screenwriter Mac Help Qr spoken commands Mac Help spoken commands Click a topic below About alternative ways to control your computer About speech recognition Adapting speech recognition to your environment Changing how spoken commands are recognized Changing how your computer listens for spoken commands Closing the speech feedback window Creating spaken commands for keyboard shortcuts Creating spoken commands to control appli
420. xisting Act Scene Label use the Search amp Replace command Put Scene Labels in Parenthesis lf checked puts Parentheses around the Scene Label text as is required in some TV Sitcom formats Center S Info lf checked all Scene Label text is centered horizontally between the Scene Label margins Unchecked Scene Label text starts at the Scene Label left margin Put in SCENE If checked displays the word SCENE along with Scene Numbers Unchecked Scene Numbers display alone Number Scenes Continuously lf checked Scenes are numbered continuously from first to last Unchecked Scene Numbering restarts at 1 from each Act Break Starting Number Allows you to enter a Scene Number to start numbering from between 0 and 9999 Default is 1 Numbering Scheme l ets you choose how Scenes are numbered from one of the following schemes e SCENE A If checked uses letters to number the scenes e SCENE 1 NUMBERS If checked uses numbers to number the scenes e SCENE ONE If checked uses words to number the scenes e SCENE I ROMAN If checked uses Roman numerals to number the scenes Movie Magic Screenwriter 6 Help 269 Notes Display Mates in Document Print Notes in Document If you check PRINT NOTES IN DOCUMENT then the notes WILL take up space and your document will become correspondingly longer Display Notes in Document lf checked displays Notes onscreen Unchecked they are
421. y by Secondary Sort by Script Order Script Order p 3 Interior vs Exterior Interior vs Exterior Location Location aca h aai Time of Day Time of Day _ Characters All ER i Some Movie Magic Scheduling File LM Script Breakdown Sheets HUE ISLE Va uo Mr _ i a Mm List Characters in Each Scene Calculate Eighths by Sorted Alphabetically oo E J Standard 6 lines 1 8th Script Order Adjusted 7 lines 1 8th Speaking Characters First C3 User List Order Display Eighths Totals by rA List Non Speaking Characters Total of All Rounded Eighths Each Group on New Page True Total of All Lines Print Tagged Items Cancel EM i Production Breakdowns Print Options Breakdowns can be sorted before printing using Primary and Secondary Sort criteria Sort Breakdown Primarily by Script Order Prints a breakdown of all scenes in the order they appear in the document without any sorting Interior VS Exterior Lists all the EXT scenes followed by all the INT scenes Location Lists by Location in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that take place in the same Location Time of Day Lists by Time of Day in alphabetical order grouping all scenes that have the same Time of Day Characters e All Lists Every Character Name in the document in alphabetical order followed by the scenes they re in whether they have dialogue or not e

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Moteur pour volets roulants RolTop  User manual  Samsung 2333HD User Manual    User Guide - dataview.co.nz  CyberLink PowerDirector  1.1 ST – Straight Attachment 1.1 ST – Fixation directe 1.1  CP Evaluation en ligne risque chimique  Ficha Técnica weber plastificante  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file